MegaVert Series V1.1

MegaVert Series Medium Voltage Inverter
User Manual
Version V1.1
Revision date March 24, 2014
BOM 31012918
Emerson Network Power provides customers with technical support. Users may contact
the nearest Emerson local sales office or service center.
Copyright © 2013 by Emerson Network Power Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved. The contents in this document are subject to change without notice.
Emerson Network Power Co., Ltd.
Address: No.1 Kefa Rd., Science & Industry Park, Nanshan District 518057, Shenzhen
China
Homepage: www.emersonnetworkpower.com.cn
E-mail: overseas.support@emerson.com
Preface
Thanks for purchasing MegaVert series medium voltage inverter produced by Emerson Network Power Co., Ltd.
(Emerson for short).
The product is applicable to frequency conversion and speed regulation of medium voltage motor in industry
field. It is an AC electrical drive & convey device, which can convert electric energy input of 3-phase fixed
voltage and frequency (10kV or 6kVA 50Hz) into electric energy output of adjustable voltage and frequency. It is
used to control the operation of medium voltage AC induction motor. V/F control mode and vector control mode
are available to achieve the goals of saving electric energy and meeting process requirements.
The product can fulfill the speed regulation of 8000kW/10kV and below or 5000kW/6kV and below AC induction
motor.
This manual provides you with relevant contents and notes of installation and wiring, parameter setting, fault
diagnosis, troubleshooting and daily maintenance. To ensure that the MegaVert series medium voltage inverter
can be correctly installed and operated to exert its high performance, please read this manual carefully and
preserve this manual properly after installation.
This manual is delivered with the inverter. Please refer to this manual for installation, use and maintenance of
the inverter. Emerson Network Power Co., Ltd. reserves the right of further improving the product. The contents
in this manual are subject to change without notice.
Safety Requirements
Important Notes
Please read the relevant chapter of this manual before installation.

The medium voltage frequency-conversion and speed-regulation device can be used only after it is
commissioned by Emerson-authorized engineers. Or else, the damage caused by it will make the warranty
invalid.
After taking all precautions described in this manual, if a fault or error still occurs, please notify Emerson in time.
Safety Precautions
Risk of electric shock
Danger
1. Only authorized professional personnel can operate, maintain and move the product, or else, an electric shock, damage
or fault may occur. For any problem concerning safety, performance and quality caused by operation, maintenance and
moving by unauthorized personnel will make the warranty invalid.
2. Please read the user manual carefully before using the inverter.
Grounding
Warning
1. The device must be properly grounded before the input power is connected.
2. The minimum specification of the protective grounding cable must comply with local safety regulations on high leakage
current device.
Upstream power distribution
Note
The upstream power distribution protective device of the medium voltage inverter must be selected in compliance with local
electrical regulations.
Downstream power distribution
Note
If a switch component such as a circuit breaker or a contactor is needed to be installed between the inverter output and the
motor, please ensure that the on/off operation is performed when the inverter has no output, otherwise, the inverter and the
motor may be damaged.
Operating cabinet door
Danger
1. It is prohibited to open the cabinet door during operation, otherwise, a risk of electric shock exists.
2. It is strictly prohibited from operating the inverter by unauthorized personnel.
3. The cabinet door can be opened only after all external power supply has been cut off for twelve minutes; after checking
the voltage and grounding, you can maintain and inspect the device.
4. Before the inverter is powered on, be sure to close and lock the door.
5. Please read the user manual carefully before using the inverter.
Contacting with power units
Warning
You can contact with the power units only after all external power supply has been cut off for twelve minutes (eight minutes
for model below 1250kVA) and you have checked the voltage.
High voltage
Danger
After the 380V control power is on, the main circuit may generate rated output voltage to ground.
Capacitance
Warning
The capacitance wiring terminals will generate high voltage upon shorted! You can remove the capacitance only after all
external power supply has been cut off for twelve minutes (eight minutes for model below 1250kVA).
Socket
Warning
The single-phase three-hole socket in the control cabinet provides power for maintenance and lighting for the user. The
designed load is 1kW. Please do not use it for large power device such as an electric cooker lest the cable be damaged.
Temperature
Note
Do not operate the inverter beyond the temperature range, otherwise, equipment damage and personal injury may occur.
Waterproof
Note
Water is prohibited from entering the cabinet, otherwise, the device will be damaged or a electric shock may occur due to
leakage current.
Fans
Note
When maintaining and inspecting the inverter, make sure that the fans have completely stopped running.
Contents
Chapter 1 Product Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Naming Convention .............................................................................................................................................. 1

1.2 Appearance .......................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 Specification And Model ....................................................................................................................................... 3
1.4 System Basic Principle ......................................................................................................................................... 6
1.5 System Composition ............................................................................................................................................. 8
1.6 Environmental Requirements ................................................................................................................................ 9
1.6.1 Operating Environment .............................................................................................................................. 9
1.6.2 Storage Environment ............................................................................................................................... 10
1.6.3 Transportation Environment .................................................................................................................... 10
1.7 Technical Specifications ..................................................................................................................................... 10
1.7.1 Basic Operation Mode ............................................................................................................................. 10
1.7.2 General Technical Parameters ................................................................................................................ 11
Chapter 2 Installation ........................................................................................................................................................ 13
2.1 Installation Condition........................................................................................................................................... 13

2.2 Transportation And Moving ................................................................................................................................. 15
2.2.1 Moving Inverter With Packing .................................................................................................................. 15
2.2.2 Moving Inverter After Unpacking ............................................................................................................. 16
2.3 Installation Tools ................................................................................................................................................. 18
2.4 Unpacking And Inspection .................................................................................................................................. 19
2.5 Mechanical Installation........................................................................................................................................ 19
2.5.1 Dimensions And Weight .......................................................................................................................... 19
2.5.2 Installation And Fixation........................................................................................................................... 20
2.6 Installation Check................................................................................................................................................ 30
Chapter 3 Electrical Connection ........................................................................................................................................ 31
3.1 Notes .................................................................................................................................................................. 31

3.2 Cable Selection ................................................................................................................................................... 35
3.3 Cable Connection Torque ................................................................................................................................... 36
3.4 Cabling Holes ..................................................................................................................................................... 37
3.5 Cable Connection ............................................................................................................................................... 37
3.5.1 Connecting Protective Earth Cables ........................................................................................................ 37
3.5.2 Connecting Power Cables ....................................................................................................................... 40
3.5.3 Connecting Signal Cables ....................................................................................................................... 45
3.5.4 Connecting Cables For Power Distribution .............................................................................................. 50
3.5.5 Connecting Control Power ....................................................................................................................... 51
3.6 Cable Connection Check .................................................................................................................................... 53
Chapter 4 Power Unit ........................................................................................................................................................ 54
4.1 Electrical principle ............................................................................................................................................... 54

4.2 External Connections .......................................................................................................................................... 54
4.2.1 Input and Output Power Terminals .......................................................................................................... 56
4.2.2 Control Terminals .................................................................................................................................... 56
4.2.3 Bypass Options ....................................................................................................................................... 56
Chapter 5 Operation, Control And Display ........................................................................................................................ 58
5.1 Operation Safety ................................................................................................................................................. 58

5.2 Control Panel ...................................................................................................................................................... 58
5.2.1 Button Descriptions ................................................................................................................................. 59
5.2.2 Indicator Definitions ................................................................................................................................. 59
5.3 Operation Description Of HMI ............................................................................................................................. 60
5.3.1 Startup Screen ......................................................................................................................................... 60
5.3.2 Main Screen ............................................................................................................................................ 61
5.3.3 System Configuration Screen .................................................................................................................. 61
5.3.4 Parameter Settings Screen...................................................................................................................... 62
5.3.5 Operation Monitoring Screen ................................................................................................................... 67
5.3.6 Event Log Screen .................................................................................................................................... 71
5.3.7 Help Screen ............................................................................................................................................. 71
5.3.8 Control buttons ........................................................................................................................................ 72
Chapter 6 Descriptions On Basic Operation...................................................................................................................... 73
6.1 Basic Operation .................................................................................................................................................. 73

6.1.1 Power-On Of The Inverter ....................................................................................................................... 73
6.1.2 Operation Of The Inverter ........................................................................................................................ 74
6.1.3 Alarm, Fault And Reset............................................................................................................................ 74
6.1.4 Power-Off Of The Inverter ....................................................................................................................... 75
6.1.5 Emergency Power Off (EPO)................................................................................................................... 75
6.2 Operation Modes Of The Inverter ....................................................................................................................... 75
6.2.1 Running Command Channels Of The Inverter......................................................................................... 75
6.2.2 Operating Status Of The Inverter ............................................................................................................. 75
6.2.3 Speed Operation Mode Of The Inverter................................................................................................... 76
6.2.4 Frequency Setting Channel Of The Inverter ............................................................................................ 78
6.2.5 Control Mode Of The Inverter .................................................................................................................. 78
6.3 Guide On Setting Common Parameters ............................................................................................................. 78
6.3.1 Setting Running Command Channel ....................................................................................................... 78
6.3.2 Setting Reference Frequency .................................................................................................................. 79
6.3.3 Setting Running Control Parameters Of The Motor ................................................................................. 79
6.3.4 Setting Frequency Hopping Parameters .................................................................................................. 79
6.3.5 Setting Jog Parameters ........................................................................................................................... 79
6.3.6 Setting Parameters Of User Input And Output Ports ............................................................................... 80
6.3.7 Setting Speed Regulation Parameters .................................................................................................... 80
6.3.8 Setting Startup Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 80
6.3.9 Setting Stop Parameters.......................................................................................................................... 81
Chapter 7 Descriptions On Function And Setting .............................................................................................................. 82
7.1 System Configuration.......................................................................................................................................... 82

7.1.1 System Information .................................................................................................................................. 82
7.1.2 Password Settings ................................................................................................................................... 82
7.1.3 Parameter Initialization ............................................................................................................................ 82
7.1.4 System time ............................................................................................................................................. 83
7.1.5 Language Settings ................................................................................................................................... 83
7.1.6 Logout...................................................................................................................................................... 83
7.1.7 Control Buttons ........................................................................................................................................ 83
7.2 Parameter Setting ............................................................................................................................................... 83
7.2.1 Quick Setup ............................................................................................................................................. 83
7.2.2 Motor ....................................................................................................................................................... 84
7.2.3 Reference ................................................................................................................................................ 88
7.2.4 Control ..................................................................................................................................................... 94
7.2.5 Protection .............................................................................................................................................. 106
7.2.6 I/O .......................................................................................................................................................... 108
7.2.7 Communication ...................................................................................................................................... 120
7.2.8 User-Defined ......................................................................................................................................... 121
7.2.9 Service................................................................................................................................................... 121
7.3 Operation Monitoring ........................................................................................................................................ 121
7.3.1 Inverter Status ....................................................................................................................................... 121
7.3.2 Motor Status .......................................................................................................................................... 122
7.3.3 Power Unit Status .................................................................................................................................. 123
7.3.4 Running Control ..................................................................................................................................... 123
7.3.5 Energy Saving Calculation..................................................................................................................... 123
7.4 Event Log .......................................................................................................................................................... 124
Chapter 8 Fault Descriptions And Handling .................................................................................................................... 125
8.1 Descriptions Of Alarms And Faults ................................................................................................................... 125

8.2 Fault Handling ................................................................................................................................................... 126
Chapter 9 Service And Maintenance ............................................................................................................................... 134
9.1 Safety................................................................................................................................................................ 134

9.2 Daily Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................ 134
9.3 Periodical Check And Maintenance .................................................................................................................. 135
9.4 Replacing Main Components ............................................................................................................................ 136
9.4.1 Replacing Power Unit ............................................................................................................................ 136
9.4.2 Replacing Dust Filter ............................................................................................................................. 137
9.4.3 Replacing fuses ..................................................................................................................................... 137
9.4.4 Replacing Fan ....................................................................................................................................... 138
9.5 Warranty Of The Inverter .................................................................................................................................. 140
Appendix 1 Function Code List ....................................................................................................................................... 141
Appendix 2 Communication Mode .................................................................................................................................. 175
1. Connecting Mode ................................................................................................................................................ 175

2. Port Mode ........................................................................................................................................................... 175
Appendix 3 Descriptions On System Automatic Bypass ................................................................................................. 176
1. Operating Principle Of System Automatic Bypass .............................................................................................. 176

1.1 Conditions................................................................................................................................................. 176
1.2 Switching Process .................................................................................................................................... 176
2. Setting Of System Automatic Bypass ................................................................................................................. 176
2.1 HMI Setting ............................................................................................................................................... 176
2.2 Setting Of Multi-fuction Terminals ............................................................................................................. 177
3. Display Of System Automatic Bypass ................................................................................................................. 178
4. Faults Of System Automatic Bypass ................................................................................................................... 178
5. Conditions Not Allowing Switching To System Automatic Bypass ...................................................................... 179
Appendix 4 Descriptions On Multi-Split Soft Startup ....................................................................................................... 180
1. Operating Principle Of Multi-Split Soft Startup .................................................................................................... 180

2. Setting Of Multi-Split Soft Startup ....................................................................................................................... 180
2.1 Enabling Setting ....................................................................................................................................... 180
2.2 Setting Of Multi-Function Output Terminal................................................................................................ 181
Appendix 5 Descriptions On Output Switch..................................................................................................................... 182
1. Function Overview .............................................................................................................................................. 182

2. Terminal Configuration ........................................................................................................................................ 182
2.1 Input Multi-Function Terminal Setting ....................................................................................................... 182
2.2 Output Multi-Function Terminal Setting .................................................................................................... 182
3. Operation Descriptions ....................................................................................................................................... 183
Appendix 6 Descriptions On Belt Conveyor Control ........................................................................................................ 184
1. Belt Conveyor Applications ................................................................................................................................. 184

2. Control Parameter Settings Of Belt Conveyor .................................................................................................... 184
3. Fault Description Of Belt Conveyor ..................................................................................................................... 184
3.1 Handshake Failure ................................................................................................................................... 184
3.2 Inconsistent Information ........................................................................................................................... 185
3.3 Parallel System Startup Failure ................................................................................................................ 185
3.4 Parallel System Communication Failure ................................................................................................... 185
3.5 No.X Inverter’s High Voltage Circuit Breaker Not Closed ......................................................................... 185
3.6 CAN Communication Node Failure Of No.X Inverter ................................................................................ 186
3.7 Current Sharing Imbalance Alarm Of Parallel System .............................................................................. 186
3.8 Current Sharing Imbalance Fault Of Parallel System ............................................................................... 186
Appendix 7 HMI Menu Structure Tree ............................................................................................................................. 187
Appendix 8 Fan Box Dimension ...................................................................................................................................... 188
Appendix 9 Descriptions On Removing Transportation Brackets .................................................................................... 189
1. B-Type Inverter ................................................................................................................................................... 189

2. C-Type Inverter ................................................................................................................................................... 189
Appendix 10 Abbreviations.............................................................................................................................................. 191

Chapter 1 Product Overview 1
Chapter 1 Product Overview
This chapter introduces the naming convention, appearance, specification and model, system basic principle, system
composition, environmental requirements and technical specifications of MegaVert series medium voltage inverter
(hereinafter referred as inverter).
1.1 Naming Convention

The naming convention of the inverter is shown in Figure 1-1.
Figure 1-1 Naming convention
For example, MegaVert-F0400-06/06A-N means that the inverter is a high-performance inverter of 6kV input and
output voltage and 400kVA capacity rating without power unit bypass, and its edition is initial edition.
MegaVert - F 0400- 06 / 06 A - N
Power unit without bypass
Inverter edition (default setting); A: Initial edition
Output voltage 6kV
Input voltage 6kV
Capacity rating: 400kVA
Series name; F: High performance
Family name
Figure 1-2 Naming convention of MegaVert-F0400-06/06A-N
1.2 Appearance
The inverter appearance varies with the differences of inverter capacity, power unit number, model and other
configurations. The appearance of typical inverter is shown in Figure 1-3, and the appearance of integrated inverter is
shown in Figure 1-4.
MegaVert Series Medium Voltage Inverter User Manual

2 Chapter 1 Product Overview
6kV
Transformer cabinet Power unit cabinet Control cabinet

10kV
Figure 1-3 Appearance of 6kV and 10kV typical inverter

Control cabinet Power unit cabinet Transformer cabinet

Front view Rear view
6kV
Control cabinet Power unit cabinet Transformer cabinet

Front view Rear view
10kV
Figure 1-4 Appearance of 6kV and 10kV integrated inverter
1.3 Specification And Model

See Table 1-1 for specification and model of high-performance inverter; see Table 1-2 for specification and model of
normal-performance inverter.

Table 1-1 Specification and model of high-performance inverter

Rated output
1 Rated capacity Applicable motor Inverter size Gross weight
Model current 2
(kVA) power (kW) (L × H × D, mm) (No packing, T)
(virtual value, A)
MegaVert-F0280-06/06C 280 27 200 4
MegaVert-F0350-06/06C 350 34 280 4
1800 × 2550 × 1600
MegaVert-F0400-06/06C 400 35 315 4
MegaVert-F0500-06/06C 500 44 400 4
MegaVert-F0630-06/06C 630 55 500 4
1800 × 2550 × 1800
MegaVert-F0800-06/06C 800 69 630 4
MegaVert-F1000-06/06C 1000 96 750 5
2450 × 2730 × 1800
MegaVert-F1250-06/06C 1250 120 1000 5
MegaVert-F0300-10/10C 300 17 200 4
MegaVert-F0350-10/10C 350 20 220 4
MegaVert-F0400-10/10C 400 23 250 4
MegaVert-F0450-10/10C 450 26 315 2200 × 2550 × 1600 4
MegaVert-F0550-10/10C 550 32 400 5
MegaVert-F0650-10/10C 650 38 500 5
MegaVert-F0800-10/10C 800 46 630 5
MegaVert-F1000-10/10C 1000 58 800 5
MegaVert-F1250-10/10C 1250 72 1000 2250 × 2550 × 1855 6
MegaVert-F1350-10/10C 1350 78 1120 6
MegaVert-F0400-06/06B 400 38 315 4
MegaVert-F0500-06/06B 500 48 400 4
3200 × 2700 × 1200
MegaVert-F0630-06/06B 630 61 500 4
MegaVert-F0800-06/06B 800 77 630 5
MegaVert-F1000-06/06B 1000 96 750 5
MegaVert-F1250-06/06B 1250 120 1000 4575 × 2730 × 1200 6
MegaVert-F1600-06/06B 1600 154 1250 6
MegaVert-F1800-06/06B 1800 173 1450 7
MegaVert-F2000-06/06B 2000 192 1600 7
MegaVert-F2250-06/06B 2250 217 1800 8
5075 × 2780 × 1500
MegaVert-F2500-06/06B 2500 241 2000 8
MegaVert-F2800-06/06B 2800 269 2250 8
MegaVert-F3200-06/06B 3200 308 2500 9
MegaVert-F3500-06/06B 3500 337 2800 10
MegaVert-F3800-06/06B 3800 366 3150 10
MegaVert-F4500-06/06B 4500 411 3500 11
6600 × 2780 × 1500
MegaVert-F5000-06/06B 5000 481 4000 11
MegaVert-F5600-06/06B 5600 519 4500 12
MegaVert-F6250-06/06B 6250 597 5000 12
MegaVert-F0500-10/10B 500 29 400 5
MegaVert-F0550-10/10B 550 32 450 5
MegaVert-F0650-10/10B 650 38 500 5
MegaVert-F0800-10/10B 800 46 630 4000 × 2650 × 1200 5
MegaVert-F1000-10/10B 1000 58 800 6
MegaVert-F1250-10/10B 1250 72 1000 6
MegaVert-F1350-10/10B 1350 78 1120 6
MegaVert-F1600-10/10B 1600 92 1250 7
MegaVert-F1750-10/10B 1750 101 1400 8
MegaVert-F2000-10/10B 2000 115 1600 8
MegaVert-F2250-10/10B 2250 130 1800 6125 × 2730 × 1400 8
MegaVert-F2400-10/10B 2400 139 2000 8
MegaVert-F2600-10/10B 2600 150 2100 9
MegaVert-F2800-10/10B 2800 162 2240 10
MegaVert-F3100-10/10B 3100 179 2400 10
MegaVert-F3200-10/10B 3200 185 2500 10
6575 × 2780 × 1500
MegaVert-F3300-10/10B 3300 191 2600 10
MegaVert-F3500-10/10B 3500 202 2800 10

Rated output
1 Rated capacity Applicable motor Inverter size Gross weight
Model current 2
(kVA) power (kW) (L × H × D, mm) (No packing, T)
(virtual value, A)
MegaVert-F4000-10/10B 4000 231 3150 11
MegaVert-F4500-10/10B 4500 260 3550 11
6575 × 2780 × 1500
MegaVert-F5000-10/10B 5000 289 4000 12
MegaVert-F5250-10/10B 5250 303 4250 13
MegaVert-F5500-10/10B 5500 318 4500 19
MegaVert-F6200-10/10B 6200 358 5000 20
MegaVert-F6800-10/10B 6800 393 5600 20
11100 × 2780 × 1500
MegaVert- F7600-10/10B 7600 439 6300 22
MegaVert-F8600-10/10B 8600 497 7100 22
MegaVert-F10M5-10/10B 10500 606 8000 25
Note:
1: The sizes listed in the table are standard sizes. For other models, please consult Emersosn.
2: The motor power is related to the motor input power factor and efficiency. The applicable motor power in the table is educed
according to 95% motor efficiency and 0.85 power factor. If the motor input power factor and efficiency are relatively low, the
applicable motor power may be lower.
3. MegaVert-F×××-××/××C is integrated inverter
Table 1-2 Specification and model of normal-performance inverter

Rated output Applicable
Rated capacity Inverter size Gross weight
Model current motor
(kVA) 1 (L × H × D, mm) (No packing, T)
(virtual value, A) power (kW)
MegaVert-G0280-06/06C 280 27 220 4
MegaVert-G0350-06/06C 350 34 280 4
1800 × 2550 × 1600
MegaVert-G0400-06/06C 400 39 315 4
MegaVert-G0500-06/06C 500 48 400 4
MegaVert-G0630-06/06C 630 61 500 4
1800 × 2550 × 1800
MegaVert-G0800-06/06C 800 77 630 4
MegaVert-G1000-06/06C 1000 96 800 5
2450 × 2730 × 1855
MegaVert-G1250-06/06C 1250 120 1000 5
MegaVert-G0300-10/10C 300 17 200 4
MegaVert-G0350-10/10C 350 20 280 4
MegaVert-G0400-10/10C 400 23 315 4
MegaVert-G0450-10/10C 450 26 355 2200 × 2550 × 1600 4
MegaVert-G0550-10/10C 550 32 400 5
MegaVert-G0650-10/10C 650 38 500 5
MegaVert-G0800-10/10C 800 46 630 5
MegaVert-G1000-10/10C 1000 58 800 6
MegaVert-G1250-10/10C 1250 72 1000 2250 × 2550 × 1855 6
MegaVert-G1350-10/10C 1250 72 1000 6
MegaVert-G0400-06/06B 400 39 315 4
MegaVert-G0500-06/06B 500 48 400 4
3200 × 2700 × 1200
MegaVert-G0630-06/06B 630 61 500 4
MegaVert-G0800-06/06B 800 77 630 5
MegaVert-G1000-06/06B 1000 96 800 5
MegaVert-G1250-06/06B 1250 120 1000 4575 × 2730 × 1200 6
MegaVert-G1600-06/06B 1600 154 1250 6
MegaVert-G1800-06/06B 1800 173 1400 7
MegaVert-G2000-06/06B 2000 193 1600 7
MegaVert-G2250-06/06B 2250 217 1800 8
5075 × 2780 × 1500
MegaVert-G2500-06/06B 2500 241 2000 8
MegaVert-G2800-06/06B 2800 270 2250 9
MegaVert-G3200-06/06B 3200 308 2500 9
MegaVert-G3500-06/06B 3500 337 2800 10
MegaVert-G3800-06/06B 3800 366 3150 10
6600 × 2780 × 1500
MegaVert-G4500-06/06B 4500 433 3500 11
MegaVert-G5000-06/06B 5000 481 4000 11

Rated output Applicable

Rated capacity Inverter size Gross weight
Model current motor
(kVA) 1 (L × H × D, mm) (No packing, T)
(virtual value, A) power (kW)
MegaVert-G5600-06/06B 5600 539 4500 12
6600 × 2780 × 1500
MegaVert-G6250-06/06B 6250 602 5000 12
MegaVert-G0500-10/10B 500 29 400 5
MegaVert-G0550-10/10B 550 32 450 5
MegaVert-G0650-10/10B 650 38 500 5
MegaVert-G0800-10/10B 800 46 630 4000 × 2650 × 1200 5
MegaVert-G1000-10/10B 1000 58 800 6
MegaVert-G1250-10/10B 1250 72 1000 6
MegaVert-G1350-10/10B 1350 78 1120 6
MegaVert-G1600-10/10B 1600 92 1250 7
MegaVert-G1750-10/10B 1750 101 1400 8
MegaVert-G2000-10/10B 2000 116 1600 8
MegaVert-F2250-10/10B 2250 130 1800 6125 × 2730 × 1400 8
MegaVert-G2400-10/10B 2400 139 2000 8
MegaVert-G2600-10/10B 2600 150 2100 9
MegaVert-G2800-10/10B 2800 162 2240 10
MegaVert-G3100-10/10B 3100 179 2400 10
MegaVert-G3200-10/10B 3200 185 2500 10
MegaVert-G3300-10/10B 3300 191 2600 10
MegaVert-G3500-10/10B 3500 202 2800 10
MegaVert-G4000-10/10B 4000 231 3150 6575 × 2780 × 1500 11
MegaVert-G4200-10/10B 4200 243 3300 11
MegaVert-G4500-10/10B 4500 260 3550 11
MegaVert-G5000-10/10B 5000 290 4000 12
MegaVert-G5250-10/10B 5250 303 4250 13
MegaVert-G5500-10/10B 5500 318 4500 19
MegaVert-G6200-10/10B 6200 358 5000 20
MegaVert-G6800-10/10B 6800 393 5600 20
11100 × 2780 × 1500
MegaVert-G7600-10/10B 7600 439 6300 22
MegaVert-G8600-10/10B 8600 497 7100 22
MegaVert-G10M5-10/10B 10500 606 8000 25
Note:
1: The motor power is related to the motor input power factor and efficiency. The applicable motor power in the table is educed
according to 95% motor efficiency and 0.85 power factor. If the motor input power factor and efficiency are relatively low, the
applicable motor power may be lower.
2: For product models of 11kV, 6.6kV and other special requirements, please consult Emerson.
3. MegaVert-G×××-××/××C is integrated inverter
1.4 System Basic Principle

The medium voltage inverter is composed of a phase-shifting transformer, 15 single-phase H-bridge inverters (6kVA)
or 24 single-phase H-bridge inverters (10kVA) (power units with 3-phase input and single-phase output) and a control
system. Through connecting the AC output of each power unit in series, the inverter realizes 6kVA or 10kV medium
voltage output and reduces the harmonic of output voltage effectively.
The system schematic diagram of the inverter is shown in Figure 1-5.

CB3
CB1 CB2 6kV/10kV

motor
10kV
Power unit
sensor
sensor
50Hz M
Grid
Cascade
converter
User interface
I/O
Logic
Power supply Remote
circuit
I/O
control
Adapter
DSP
Control unit
Note: ----- Optional components
Figure 1-5 System schematic diagram
The phase-shifting transformer is used to convert primary side high voltage into multiple groups of secondary side
voltage needed by the power units; meanwhile, it can realize phase shift and electric isolation between the primary
side line voltage and secondary side line voltage, thus reducing the primary side harmonic. The secondary side
windings of the phase-shifting transformer use extended delta connection generally, with fixed potential difference
between the windings to form multiple-pulse rectifier mode, so that the harmonic current of the transformer secondary
side windings (that is, input of power unit) can be cancelled out without reflection on the primary side, thus improving
the current waveform of grid side and eliminating the harmonic pollution to the grid caused by the inverter.
The output side voltage of the medium voltage inverter is formed by cascade connection of output voltage of each
power unit. The power units are divided to three groups. For each group, power units of the same number (five power
units per phase for 6kV and eight power units per phase for 10kV) are connected in series as a phase. The output of
each power unit is equiamplitude PWM voltage waveform, and a fixed phase shift exists between the outputs of each
power unit. After the outputs are connected in series and added up, a sine wave terrace PWM waveform is formed on
the inverter output side. This kind of topology is also called cascade H-bridge multi level inverter. The main topology
of the inverter is shown in Figure 1-6.

N
Power unit
A1 B1 C1
A2 B2 C2
A3 B3 C3
N
Power unit A4 B4 C4
C AC 10kV
A1 B1
1
Grid A5 B5 C5
A2 B2 C2
A6 B6 C6
C
A3 B3
3
A7 B7 C7
A4 B4 C4
AC 6kV
Grid A5 B5 C5 A8 B8 C8
Phase shifting Phase shifting

transformer 10kV
transformer 6kV motor M motor M
Figure 1-6 Main power topological diagram of the system
The switching frequency of each power unit can be relatively low, but the equivalent switching frequency of inverter
output side voltage is relatively high, thus reducing the high-order harmonic of inverter output to a great extent.
According to the designed carrier wave PWM control algorithm, the control system controls the inverter output of
each power unit timely, gets AC output voltage with adjustable frequency and amplitude, and realizes frequency
conversion and speed regulation of the motor.
1.5 System Composition

The inverter system is divided into bypass cabinet (optional), transformer cabinet, power unit cabinet and control
cabinet.
1. Bypass cabinet is optional. You can select it according to your need. For other information about the bypass
cabinet, please consult Emerson.
2. The transformer cabinet mainly comprises input/output user terminal unit, a phase shifting transformer and cooling
fans.
3. The power unit cabinet is installed with cooling fans and 15 (6kVA) or 24 (10kVA) power units. Five (6kVA) or eight
(10kVA) power units are connected in series as a phase for each group. Seen from front of the cabinet, after serial
connection, the power units A1, B1, C1 at right side adopt star connection, the output of power units A5, B5, C5 (6kVA)
or A8, B8, C8 (10Kva) at left side are connected to the user output connection copper bar in the transformer cabinet.
4. The control cabinet comprises power distribution control, power control, I/O adapter board and user interface
terminal. The door plate of control cabinet provides operating buttons, indicators and human machine interface.
The inverter composition diagram is shown in Figure 1-7.

Resistance
panel
Figure 1-7 Inverter composition diagram
1.6 Environmental Requirements
1.6.1 Operating Environment
The operating environment of the inverter refers to IEC61800-4(GB12668.4-2006). See Table 1-3 for details.
Table 1-3 Operating environment specifications
Item Requirement
Installed on an indoor solid base vertically. See 2.1 Installation Conditions for detailed installation
Installation site
condition. The cooling medium is air
0 ~ 40°C, the air temeprature changes at a speed less than 0.5°C/min;
Ambient Derating is required for use when the temeprature is above 40°C, the highest temperature is 55°C; for
temperature specific derating standard, please contact Emerson;
The inverter can start up at -15°C, but the performance may not reach rated requirerments
5%RH ~ 95%RH, non-condensing, no frost. When the humidity reaches the highest value: 95%RH, the
Relative humidity
ambient temperature should be less than or equal to 40°C
No direct sunlight, free of ice, rain, snow and hail, the air pressure is 80kPa ~ 106kPa
The standard product cannot be used in salt fog environment, if needed, please consult Emerson
Sulfur dioxide < 0.3mg/m3; sulfureted hydrogen < 0.1mg/m3; chlorine < 0.1mg/m3;
Ambient
hydrogen chloride < 0.1mg/m3; hydrogen fluoride < 0.01mg/m3; ammonia < 1.0mg/m3;
ozone < 0.05mg/m3; nitrogen oxide < 0.5mg/m3
Sand < 30mg/m3; dust (float) < 0.2mg/m3; dust (sediment) < 1.5mg/(m2•h)
Meeting requirement of 2000m above elevation, the transformer needs special design above 1000m,
Altitude
derating is required for use above 2000m

1.6.2 Storage Environment
The storage environment of the inverter refers to IEC61800-4(GB/T12668.4-2006). See Table 1-4 for details.
Table 1-4 Storage environment specifications
Item Requirement
Storage site See the operating environment
Ambient temperature -40°C ~ +70°C, the air temeprature changes at a speed less than 1°C/min
Relative humdity 5%RH ~ 95%RH, the temeprature changes at a speed less than 1°C/min
Total transportation and storage time should not exceed six months. For special need, please consult
Storage time
Emerson
 Note
The inverter is not windproof or rainproof, especially after the wooden box is opened. If the inverter needs to be placed outdoors
temporarily, note to protect it from rain and condensing.
1.6.3 Transportation Environment
The transportation environment of the inverter refers to IEC61800-4(GB/T12668.4-2006). See Table 1-5 for details.
Table 1-5 Transportation environment specifications
Item Requirement
Transportation Packed in Emerson standard packing case, it can be transported by a truck, train, ship or similar
vehicle transportation vehicles
Ambient temperature -40°C ~ +70°C
When the temperature is at +40°C, the humidity is lower than 95%RH, the temeprature changes at a
Relative humdity
speed less than 1°C/min
Vibration: 2Hz ~ 10Hz, 10m2/s3; 10Hz ~ 200Hz, 1m2/s3; 200Hz ~ 2000Hz, 0.3m2/s3
Mechanical condition
Impact: 100m/s2, 11ms
 Note
1. During transportation, the inverter needs to be gently placed. Rain or strong sunlight, violent shock or hit and non-vertical
placing are strictly prohibited during transportation.
2. Please fully consider the inverter height when selecting transportation tools and roads.
3. Please select transportation and moving tools of enough weight-bearing capacity according to the inverter weight.
1.7 Technical Specifications
1.7.1 Basic Operation Mode
1. V/F mode
The V/F mode is rotation speed open loop control mode. In this mode, the inverter output voltage and output
fundamental wave frequency change according to the set curve. If the motor is installed with a speed sensor, the
inverter can start up PID function to perform rotation speed close loop control, thus realizing following the set speed
without steady-state error.
2. Vector control mode without speed sensor (VC control mode without PG)
The controller observes the rotation speed of the induction motor according to the inverter output voltage and current,
and realizes close loop vector control according to the observed rotation speed.
3. Vector control mode with speed sensor (VC control mode with PG)
The controller realizes close loop vector control according to the observed rotation speed signal of the induction
motor.

1.7.2 General Technical Parameters
Table 1-6 General technical parameters of 6kV inverter

Item Index
Output line voltage (V) 0 ~ 6kV
Output voltage
< 7% (upon rated output voltage)
harmonic
Max. output frequency
Power output 120, (75Hz ~ 120Hz running only in V/F mode)
(Hz)
System efficiency > 97%
Current overload
120% rated current for 1min, 120%~150% rated current for 3s
capacity
Rated 3-phase voltage: 6kV, The inverter can output rated power when the input
voltage is within ±10% range;
The output power will be derated when the input voltage is within -45% ~ -10% range,
Voltage
and the corresponding power derating range is -35% ~ 0%;
The inverter will shut down for protection when the input voltage is higher than 15%
rated voltage or lower than -45% rated voltage
Power input
Voltage waveform
Voltage unbalance rate < 3%, THDu < 4%
quality
Total input current
≤ 4% (rated output power condition)
hamonic (THDi)
Input power factor > 0.97 (rated condition)
Rated frequency 50Hz, fluctuation range: ±10%
Protection grade IIP30; IP20 for the fan assembly
System
Cooling mode Forced air cooling
characteristic
Noise ≤ 80dB
Auxiliary
power 380V Capacity For details, refer to Table 3-1
low voltage
Table 1-7 General technical parameters of 10kV inverter

Item Index
Output line voltage (V) 0 ~ 10kV
Output voltage
< 4% (upon rated output voltage)
harmonic
Max. output frequency
Power output 120, (75Hz ~ 120Hz running only in V/F mode)
(Hz)
System efficiency > 97%
Current overload
120% rated current for 1min, 120% ~ 150% rated current for 3s
capacity
Rated 3-phase voltage: 10kV, The inverter can output rated power when the input
voltage is within ±10% range;
The output power will be derated when the input voltage is within -45% ~ -10% range,
Voltage
and the corresponding power derating range is -35% ~ 0%
The inverter will shut down for protection when the input voltage is higher than 15%
rated voltage or lower than -45% rated voltage
Power input
Voltage waveform
Voltage unbalance rate < 3%, THDu < 4%
quality
Total input current
≤ 4% (rated output power condition)
hamonic (THDi)
Input power factor > 0.97 (rated condition)
Rated frequency 50Hz, fluctuation range: ±10%
Protection grade IP30; IP20 for the fan assembly
System
Cooling mode Forced air cooling
characteristic
Noise ≤ 80dB
Auxiliary
power 380V Capacity For details, refer to Table 3-1
low voltage

Table 1-8 Operation and control characteristic

Control mode
Item
V/F control VC control without PG VC control with PG
Digital set: 0.01Hz
Speed set resolution
Analog set: 0.1% × set max. frequency
Speed accuracy ±0.5% ±0.5%
Speed fluctuation 0.50% 0.30%
startup torque 3Hz, 100% rated torque 1Hz, 120% rated torque 0.1Hz, 120% rated torque
Max. frequency 10Hz ~ 120.0Hz
Basic frequency 10.0Hz ~ 50.0Hz. For frequency beyond the range, please consult Emerson
Frequency resolution Analog set: 0.1% × set max. frequency; Digital set: 0.01Hz
Output frequency Analog set: ±0.2% max. frequency
accuracy Digital set: ±0.01% max. frequency
When the grid voltage changes, the inverter can keep constant output voltage automatically
When the grid voltage fluctuates within ±10% range, the rated output voltage fluctuates less than or
Automatic voltage
equal to ±3%.
regulation (AVR)
No action’, ‘Action at all times’ and ‘No action upon decelerating’ are optional , the factory default setting
is ‘No action upon decelerating’

Chapter 2 Installation 13
Chapter 2 Installation
 Note
1. This chapter provides installation instructions only for professional operators who master basic knowledge about installation
and wiring of power distribution cabinet and drive & convey device.
2. If you have any uncertainty about the installation method, please consult Emerson sales department.
3. If you need to know other information during installation process, please refer to the construction and installation drawing
delivered with the inverter or consult Emerson.
This chapter introduces the environment requirements for installing the inverter, as well as operation procedures and
notes concerning installation of the inverter.
The inverter is to be installed in an electric room. Before installing the inverter, you must ensure that the environment
condition and ventilation rate meet the requirements.
The installation process is as follows:
1. Check the installation condition 2. Transportation and moving 3. Preparing installation tools
4. Unpacking and inspection 5. Mechanical installation 6. Installation check
2.1 Installation Condition

The installation condition of the inverter should meet IEC61800-4 standard. See Table 1-3 and Table 1-4 for detailed
environment requirements.
The inverter installation site’s neighborhood must be free of flammable substance, and the installation ground should
be as smooth as possible. The inverter must be vertically installed.
 Note
If the installation surface is not smooth (flat), the metal shell of the inverter may be deformed, thus causing dislocation of the
cabinet door, and/or failure in opening & closing the door.
Sufficient space should be kept around the inverter to facilitate installation and maintenance; meanwhile, it is also
3
beneficial to good ventilation (≥ 1m /s). The installation space requirement is shown in Figure 2-1.
Ceiling
Min. 800mm
Front
Min.
Min. 1600mm 800mm
Min. Min.
160mm 160mm
above the floor
At least 5mm
Cable trench:
800mm
Figure 2-1 Installation space requirement (side view)

14 Chapter 2 Installation
For safety and convenience of wiring, the inverter is recommended to be installed above a trench, as shown in
Figure 2-1. It is also recommended to select channel steel according to the inverter weight. See Table 2-1 for details.
Table 2-1 Selecting channel steel for inverter base
Inverter weight range Recommended channel steel type Inverter capacity rating
≤ 6T 10# channel steel ≤ 6kV/800kVA, 10kvV800kVA
> 6kV/800kVA, < 6kV/4500kVA
6T ~ 9.5T 18# channel steel
> 10kV/800kVA, < 10kV/4200kVA
≥ 9.5T 18# I-steel ≥ 6kV/4500kVA, 10kV/4200kVA
Note: The actual weight of the inverter may be different from the designed value, please select the channel steel type according
to the actual weight
Installation technical requirements:

1. The inverter has channel steel base with itself, do spot welding with the buried channel steel.
2. The embedded foundation must be 5mm higher than the ground, the tolerance of the basic base and level base
should be controlled within 1mm/1000mm.
3. Ensure that the inverter cabinet is reliably connected with the ground of the factory buildings, just do spot welding
between the ground point and the channel steel base of the inverter, and ensure that the ground resistance is less
than four ohm.
4. The cable trench need be arranged into two layers, the distance between the two layers is 200mm, and the level
distance is 0.6m ~ 0.8m. The holder need be polished, the cable trench need be equipped with facilities for
withstanding water, flood, waterlogging, mouse and so on, the trench should keep dry, and flame retardant treatment
is needed in the cable trench of the high voltage switch cabinet.
 Note
To reduce interference on control signal, please place the cables in two layers; it is recommended to set up the control cables on
the first layer and the high voltage cables on the second layer.
5. When lifting and unloading the inverter, please coincide the lifting center with center of gravity of the inverter as
close as possible; Do not support the inverter just by the top of the packing material. You should lift the inverter
according to the packing marking and position in the drawing. Take MegaVert-F0800-06/06B for example, the lifting
marking at the front of the packing material is shown in Figure 2-2.
Front of the
packing material
°
65
le≥
Center of gravity Lifting angle≥65°

ng a
ing
Lift
Figure 2-2 Lifting marking at the front of the packing material for MegaVert-F0800-06/06B
6. Take MegaVert-F0800-06/06B for example, the load-bearing drawing of the foundation installation rail is shown in
Figure 2-3. If you need more information about the load-bearing drawing, please refer to the installing & maintaining
document.

Transformer bearing position
AC output
cable
entrance
AC input
cable
entrance
3400
Figure 2-3 Load-bearing drawing of 6kV foundation installation rail (top view, unit: mm)
7. The estimating formula of the calorific value is: Calorific value Zth = Whole inverter capacity × 0.04(kW)
For example: Calculation formula of MegaVert-F0800-06/06B calorific value is: Zth = 800 × 0.04 = 32kW
 Note
1. The installation environment must meet the dustproof requirement specified in environment specifications (see Table 1-2).
2. An appropriate air conditioner must be equipped according to the estimating formula of the calorific value, to satisfy the
temperature requirement specified in operating environment conditions. Otherwise, exhaust pipes must be installed. The exhaust
pipes must be protected against water, mouse and so on. Filters must be installed on the indoor inlets. Please consult Emerson
customer service and support technicians, Tel: 4008876510.
2.2 Transportation And Moving

Transportation mode: truck, train or ship. During the transportation, follow the storage and transportation standard to
work and use a canopy to protect against rain.
Moving mode: use a crane with ropes (or chain hoist) for lifting; a forklift, a rolling rod or a trolley can be used.
 Note
1. All types of moving tools must have the bearing capacity more than the weight indicated on the outer packing of the inverter.
2. Before finishing installing the inverter on the work field, do not remove the EPE cushions on the top corners, edges, middle
part, LCD screen of the cabinet lest the cabinet be damaged during moving.
2.2.1 Moving Inverter With Packing
The inverter adopts a built-up box of sliding wooden structure as packing. The cabinet is fixed on the wooden box
base by bolts. The base is sliding wooden structure, satisfying moving by a one-way inlet forklift (or trolley) and lifting
by a crane or chain hoist.
1. Moving by a one-way inlet forklift
1) Please ensure that the forklift can bear the weight of the inverter before using the forklift.
2) When moving the inverter with packing case by forklift, insert the forklift arms into the forklift positions on the pallet.
Note that the center of gravity of the packing case should be right above the forklift arm. See Figure 2-4 for details.

Center of Center of
gravity C.G. gravity
C. G.
At least 1m
inserted
Note*: When the cabinet depth is 1200mm, the inserted length should be at least 1000mm;
When the cabinet depth is 1500mm, the inserted length should be at least 1200mm.
Figure 2-4 Schematic diagram of forklift moving
2. Lifting by a crane or chain hoist

When lifting the inverter with packing case by a crane, try to coincide the lifting center with the center of gravity of the
inverter that is silkscreened on the packing material. The lifting hook should be on the vertical extension line of the
center of gravity, as shown in Figure 2-2.
2.2.2 Moving Inverter After Unpacking
1. Lifting by a crane or chain hoist

1) Using the hanging beam assembly packed and delivered independently.
2) Remove the rat guards on the bottom of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 2-5.
Note: This figure takes 1600kVA

~ 2400kVA 10kV inverter for
example. For other cabinets or
other models, follow the same
method to remove the rat guards.
Rat guard (2 pcs at

front and 2 pcs at rear)
Screw (8 pcs)
Figure 2-5 Removing rat guards
3) Insert two hanging beams into the lifting holes on the base, and fix them by four sets of M6 × 140 bolts and M6
nuts; then place other two hanging beams in the middle of the top plate, as shown in Figure 2-6.

Hanging beam (2 pcs on

top and 2 pcs on bottom)
Note: This figure takes

1600kVA ~ 2400kVA 10kV
inverter for example. For other
cabinets or other models,
follow the same method to
install the hanging beams.
Ins
ert
in gt
he
ha
ng
M6 nut (2 pcs at front and 2 pcs at rear) ing
be
M6×140 bolt (2 pcs at front and 2 pcs at rear) am
Figure 2-6 Installing hanging beams
The use of the hanging beams: preventing ropes from sliding laterally and preventing cabinet from deformed owing to
huge stress during lifting process.
4) Lead steel wires through the lifting holes, get them stuck on both end gaps of the hanging beams on top and
bottom, and then hang them on the hanging hook of a crane or chain hoist, as shown in Figure 2-7.
Hanging point
Steel wire
Note: This figure takes

1600kVA ~ 2400kVA 10kV
inverter for example. For other
cabinets or other models, follow
the same method to lift it.
Hanging beam
Figure 2-7 Lifting schematic diagram
 Note
1. The steel wires should be long enough so that they can go through the hanging hook normally.
2. The steel wires should be strong enough to withstand the weight indicated on the inverter installation diagram or specified in
2.5.1 Dimensions And Weight.
5) Lift the inverter up steadily.

 Note
1. During lifting, do not hold up the inverter only by the top of the cabinet; do not try to lift up the inverter by the crossbeams on
top of the cabinet.
2. It is not allowed to remove the assembled base from the inverter cabinet for installing and moving in field.
2. Moving by a trolley
1) Use a jack or crow bar to raise the cabinet base, and place a trolley under the base.
 Note
1. The trolley should be placed outside and under the forklift holes of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 2-8.
2. The diameter of the wheel should not be less than Φ50mm; the distance between the two wheels (in the cabinet width direction)
should not be larger than 450mm, as shown in Figure 2-8.
3. The span of the wheels in the same row (in the cabinet depth direction) should not be less than 1200mm, at least two trolleys in
each row are required.
≥ Φ50mm
≤ 450mm
Trolley amplified
Forklift
hole
Transformer cabinet Power unit cabinet and control cabinet

Figure 2-8 Moving by a trolley (front view)
2) Moving the cabinet to its position steadily, and use a jack or crow bar to unload the cabinet.
3. Moving by rolling rods
Place rolling rods under the cabinet, and move the cabinet by using these rolling rods circularly. It is a simple moving
method.
Note: The distance between the two wheels of the rolling rod (in the cabinet width direction) should not be larger than
450mm.
2.3 Installation Tools

The installation tools include:
 The crane, forklift, jack, crow bar, rolling rod, chain hoist, ropes, and trolley
 Slotted screwdriver and cross head screwdriver
The specifications of the slotted screwdriver and cross head screwdriver are listed in Table 2-2.
Table 2-2 Specifications of slotted screwdriver and cross head screwdriver
Tool Specifications Tool Specifications
50X0.4X2.5 I -1PQB3860
1 100 3 B QB/T3860
100X0.6X4 I -1PQB3860
Slotted screwdriver Cross head screwdriver 2 150 3 B QB/T3860
200X1.2X8 I -1PQB3860
2 40 4 B QB/T3860
300X2X13 I -1PQB3860
 Torque wrench and wrench

The specifications of the torque wrench, wrench and adapter sleeve are listed in Table 2-3.

Table 2-3 Specifications of torque wrench, wrench and adapter sleeve

Tool Specifications Tool Specifications
Torque range (N·m): 10 ~ 50, 40 ~ 200
Range (N·m): 5 ~ 60
Driving square size (mm): 12.5 × 12.5
Torque driver Scale (N·m): 0.5 Torque wrench
Precision: ≤ ±3%
Diameter (mm): 25
Ruler reticle division (N·m): 0.5, 2
Adjustable wrench 100 GB/T 4440
Adjustable wrench Adapter sleeve One 12.5 series sleeve (type A and type B)
Adjustable wrench 200 GB/T 4440
 Multimeter
 Appliances for labor protection
2.4 Unpacking And Inspection

Unpacking and inspection should not be carried out before the inverter is moved to its final location. The inspection
should be conducted jointly by user representatives and Emerson authorized representatives.
After opening the package, you should:
1. Open the packing case pasted with ‘storage case for packing list’.
2. Take out the packing list.
3. Check the components one by one according to the packing list.
4. Check the quantity and serial number marked on the packing cases.
5. Check the correctness of the packing.
6. Check the quantity and model of the accessories.
7. Check that the inverter is in good condition.
2.5 Mechanical Installation
2.5.1 Dimensions And Weight
Taking MegaVert-F0400-06/06B ~ MegaVert-F0800-06/06B, MegaVert-G0400-06/06B ~ MegaVert-G0800-06/06B

6kV typical inverter as examples, their dimensions are shown in Figure 2-9. For other power rating products, refer to
1.3 Specification And Model.
2700

1200
Figure 2-9 Dimension drawing of 400kVA ~ 800kVA 6kV typical inverter (unit: mm)
2.5.2 Installation And Fixation
The inverter is to be installed on the channel steel base in the inverter room. It is recommended to lay out the inverter
base according to the dimensions and layout shown in Table 1-1, Table 1-2, Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-3, thus keeping
enough maintenance space for the inverter.
 Note
1. The base uses metal structure, requiring reliable grounding points.
2. It is recommended to keep at least 800mm cabling space for the cabling between the inverter and the external equipment.
3. Subsection welding is recommended between the cabinet base and the channel steel base when the cabinet is installed, with
about 0.5m welding interval and 20mm welding line for each section.
4. The integral structure inverter is the one that doesn’t need cabinet connection on the working field.
The procedures for installing the inverter are as follows: installing and fixing cabinets, installing fans on top of cabinet,
installing airducts and installing power units (For the power unit delivered with the inverter, refer to Appendix 9
Description On Removing Transportation Brackets).
Installing and fixing cabinets

 The integral structure inverter
The inverters of 280kVA ~ 800kVA 6kV and 300kVA ~ 1250kVA 10kV are integral structure ones, taking 800kVA 6kV
inverter for example, the procedures are as follows:
1. Remove all the fixed angles, as shown in Figure 2-10.
2. Position the cabinet, and directly weld the cabinet base and the channel steel base together.
Figure 2-10 Removing fixed angles
 The split structure inverter

The inverters which are above 6kV 800kVA and 10kV 1250kVA are split structure ones, the transformer cabinet of the
inverter is called cabinet 1, the power unit cabinet and the control cabinet of the inverter are called cabinet 2.
1. Remove all the fixed angles of cabinet 1&2, as shown in Figure 2-10.
2. Position cabinet 1, then directly weld the cabinet base and the channel steel base together.
3. Connect cabinet 2 and cabinet 1.
1) Remove the three cable holders on the left side of cabinet 2, the removing procedures are as follows:
a. Remove the cables bound on the cable holders.
b. Remove M6 self tapping screws for fixing the cable holders, and take down the cable holders, as shown in
Figure 2-11.
c. Preserve the cable holders and M6 self tapping screws properly.
Figure 2-11 Removing cable holders
2) Move cabinet 2 to the installation position, and align the cabinet connecter holes on the left side of cabinet 2 with
those on the right side of cabinet 1.
3) Place high voltage cables into cabinet 1 through the three cabling spaces; and place low voltage cables into
cabinet 1 through the cable slot, as shown in Figure 2-11.
4) Fix the six cabinet connecter holes with one M8 × 25 Sems screw, two M10 flat washer, one M8 flat washer and
one M8 nut, as shown in Figure 2-12.
Cabinet 1
M8×25 Sems Plain washer 10 M8 nut

screw (6 pcs)
Plain washer 8
Plain washer 10 Cabinet connecter
B amplified
Note: There are six places for cabinet

connection and fixation.
C处
Cabinet 2
B
Figure 2-12 Cabinet connection and fixation
4. Install and fix cabinet 2, directly weld the cabinet base and the channel steel base together.

5. After finishing the mechanical installation, you should connect the protective earth cables. The procedures are as
follows:
1) Find out the braided copper wire connected to PE2 (wire number: W571) in the power unit cabinet.
2) Lead the braided copper wire through the cabling hole, and connect the other end to PE3, as shown in
Figure 2-13.
Figure 2-13 Connecting protective earth cables
Installing fans on top of cabinet

 Single-fan
Except different fan numbers, the fan installation method of all 6kVA inverters and above 1250kVA 10kVA inverters is
the same. Taking MegaVert-F0800-06/06B as an example, the fan installation method is as follows:
 Note
1. Pay attention to preserve the related fasteners and accessories during installing the fan assemblies.
2. The fan assemblies of some types are heavy, please use sling or operate carefully by two persons, to avoid crushing risk.
3. Pay attention to the installing direction when installing, make the distance be shortest between the power supply box of the fan
(see Figure 2-16) and the waterproof cabling hole on top of the cabinet (on the top of the power unit cabinet and the transformer
cabinet, as shown in Figure 2-14), otherwise, it can cause that the fan cables are not long enough.
4. The fans of integrated inverters have been installed before delivery, with no need of installing on the working field, so there is
no instruction for this.
1. Remove the M5 × 12 screws for fixing fan baffles on top of the cabinets, and remove the fan baffles, as shown in
Figure 2-14.

Fan baffle (2 pcs)
M5 ×12 screws (8 pcs)

A
B
Waterproof
cabling hole
A amplified
Waterproof
cabling hole
B amplified
Power unit cabinet
Transformer cabinet
Figure 2-14 Removing fan baffles
2. Remove the outer packing of the fan assembly, then lift the fan onto the top of the cabinet by two persons or using
the fixture, and put it right above the position of the fan baffle which is removed just now. Ensure that the holes on
bottom of the fan assembly coincide with the holes on top of the cabinet completely, then fix the fan on top of the
cabinet by using M8 × 20 screws, as shown in Figure 2-15.
Figure 2-15 Installing fans on top of the cabinet
3. Remove the M5 × 10 screws on the left side of the fan, and then remove the power supply box cover of the fan, as

Figure 2-16 Removing power supply box cover of the fan
4. Connect the power cable and the temperature switch cable of the fan to the terminals in the power supply box.
Note that the wire number must be the same as the sequence described in Figure 2-17 when connecting cables.
 Note
Please connect the cables according to the wire numbers indicated on the fan cables.
Figure 2-17 Terminals of the fan on top of the cabinet
5. Restore the power supply box cover of the fan after finishing connecting the fan cables.
 Double-fan
 Note
1. Pay attention to preserve the related fasteners and accessories during installing the fan assemblies.
2. The fan assemblies of some types are heavy, please use sling or operate carefully by two persons, to avoid crushing risk.
3. Pay attention to the installing direction when installing, make the distance be shortest between the power supply box of the fan
(see Figure 2-20) and the waterproof cabling hole on top of the cabinet (on the top of the power unit cabinet and the transformer
cabinet, as shown in Figure 2-18), otherwise, it can cause that the fan cables are not long enough.
4. The fans of integrated inverters have been installed before delivery, with no need of installing on the working field, so there is
no instruction for this.
The fans of 500kVA ~ 1250kVA 10kV inverters are double-fans, so there is a little difference in the fan installation
method. Taking MegaVert-F1250-10/10B for example, the procedures for installing the fan are as follows:
1. Remove the M5 × 16 screws for fixing the fan baffles on top of the cabinets, and remove the fan baffles, as shown
in Figure 2-18.

A
Fan baffle (4 pcs)
M5 × 16 screws (16 pcs)
Waterproof
cabling hole
A amplified
Waterproof
cabling hole
Transformer cabinet B amplified

Power unit cabinet
Figure 2-18 Removing fan baffles
2. Remove the outer packing of the fan assembly, then lift the fan onto the top of the cabinet by two persons or using
the fixture, and put it right above the position of the fan baffle which is removed just now. Ensure that the holes on
bottom of the fan assembly coincide with the holes on top of the cabinet completely, and then fix the fan on top of the
cabinet by using M8 × 20 screws and M10 flat washer, as shown in Figure 2-19.
Figure 2-19 Installing fans on top of the cabinet
3. Remove the M5 × 10 screws on the power supply box of the fan, and then remove the power supply box cover of
the fan, as shown in Figure 2-20.

Figure 2-20 Removing power supply box cover of the fan
4. Connect the power cable and temperature switch cable of the fan to the terminals in the power supply box. Note
that the wire number must be the same as the sequence described in Figure 2-21 when connecting the cables.
Figure 2-21 Terminals of the fan on top of the cabinet
Installing airducts
Taking MegaVert-F0800-06/06B as an example, the method for installing airduct is as follows. For other models, the
installation method is the same.
1. Make airduct according to the size of the air outlet and the installing holes reserved for the airduct, as shown in
Figure 2-22.
Figure 2-22 Schematic diagram of airduct
Different fan airducts have different sizes. Refer to Appendix 8 Fan Dimensions for making them.
2. Loosen the M6 nuts on the airduct clamping part, and adjust the position of airduct clamping part to front or back
following the arrow direction shown in Figure 2-23, making the gap between the airduct clamping part and the fan
equal to the thickness of the airduct mounting flange.

Figure 2-23 Adjusting position of the airduct clamping part
3. Insert the airduct from up to down into the gap between the airduct clamping part and the fan, and use M6 × 16
screws to fix other three sides, as shown in Figure 2-24.
Figure 2-24 Installing airduct
Installing power units

1. Open the front door of power unit cabinet, and remove the outer packing of power unit.
2. Put the power unit into the power unit cabinet and fix it. The specific procedures are as follows:
 280kVA ~ 800kVA 6kV and 300kVA ~ 1250kVA 10kV inverters
1) Put the power unit into the power unit cabinet by two persons, and ensure that the screw holes on bottom of the
power unit coincide completely with the holes of the cabinet.
2) Fix the power unit in the cabinet with two screws, as shown in Figure 2-25.

Figure 2-25 Installing power unit of 280kVA ~ 800kVA 6kV and 300kVA ~ 1250kVA 10kV inverters

1) Put the power unit into the power unit cabinet by two persons, and ensure that the power unit has been completely
pushed into the cabinet.
2) Fix the power unit in the cabinet with two angles and four M6 × 16 Sems screws, as shown in Step 3 in
Figure 2-27.
1) Assemble the fixture and the power unit together, as shown in Figure 2-26.
Figure 2-26 Assembling fixture and power unit
2) Put the power unit into the power unit cabinet by using forklift and fixture, and then fix the power unit, as shown in
Figure 2-27.

Figure 2-27 Installing power unit
 Note
1. Pay attention to preserve the related fasteners and accessories during installing the power units.
2. The weight of the power unit is over 20kg, please be careful to avoid crushing risk.
3. Connect the cables on the front side of the power unit. The cable connecting position is shown in Figure 2-28.
Connect two cascade cables to the cascade terminal (CL1, CL2), two communication fibers (OT_A, OR_B) to the
fiber terminal, and three input cables to the input terminals (A, B, C).

Figure 2-28 Cable connection positions
4. Remove the screws on the back door, then remove the back door of the cabinet, and refer to Appendix 3 Bypass
Optional Components to install the bypass accessories.
 Note
If the inverter doesn’t have the bypass, please skip Step 4.
2.6 Installation Check

After the installation, perform the safety check according to Table 2-4.
Table 2-4 Installation check
SN Standards and requirements Pass Notes
1 The inverter is installed according to the drawings □Yes □No
2 The cabinets have been fixed with bolts □Yes □No
3 The cabinets are lined up □Yes □No
4 The inverter is clean □Yes □No
5 The placement of the equipment facilitates cabling □Yes □No
6 The trench is equipped with cable pipe □Yes □No
The surroundings have been restored, because the installation may destroy
7 □Yes □No
the surroundings
8 There is no marking lines on the inverter □Yes □No
9 Excess space has been kept in the cable trough □Yes □No
10 The placement of the inverter facilitates cabinet extension and maintenance □Yes □No
11 The assembled inverter is earthquake proof and fastened □Yes □No
12 Paint and galvanized layer on the cabinet are not peeled □Yes □No
13 No fold or crack exists on the bus straight curves □Yes □No

Chapter 3 Electrical Connection 31
Chapter 3 Electrical Connection
This chapter introduces the electrical connection of the inverter, including notes, cable selection, cable connection
torque, cabling holes, cable connection and connection check.
 Note
1. It is recommended to set the fast tripping current of the upstream circuit breaker to four to six times as large as the rated
current, set the overcurrent value to 2.54 times as large as the rated current, and set the overcurrent time to 0.2s ~ 0.5s. Besides,
you should take into account the matching of the upstream and downstream power distribution in the field and the motor startup
current upon bypass industrial frequency operation.
2. To ensure that the encoder works safely and reliably, the metal enclosure & rotating shaft of the encoder must be electrically
isolated from the rotor shaft of the motor, making the encoder contact with the non-mental part of the motor rotor. It is
recommended to use insulated rotating shaft velocity measuring encoder. When connecting signal cable of the encoder, you need
to connect its shielding coat to the PE (protective earth) terminal of the encoder input (see Table 3-6).
3.1 Notes
Before connecting the cables, check and complete the following items:
 Note
1. The inverters of 280kVA ~ 800kVA 6kV and 300kVA ~ 1250kVA 10kV have no Q8; the inverters of 5500kVA ~ 10500kVA
10kV adds Q9, Q11 and Q12.
2. Q1 is inlet cable breaker of 380V low voltage; Q3 and Q12 are breakers of top fans; Q4 is inlet cable breaker of pre-charging
loop; Q5 is outlet cable breaker of pre-charging loop; Q6 is 220V power supply breaker for the user; Q8 is bottom fan breaker of
primary transformer; Q9 is outlet cable breaker of secondary transformer pre-charging loop; Q11 is bottom fan breaker of
secondary transformer. The one-line diagram is shown in Figure 3-1.
Fan on top of cabinet
6kV KM6 Q8
10kVac
50Hz T1
380Vac
KM11
Q5
KM8 Q11
KM5
6kV
10kVac Q9
50Hz T2 380 Vac
R7~R12 R1~R6
KM9 KM3 KM2 KM10
Q4 Q3 Q12
Q6
Q1
380Vac
50Hz
Figure 3-1 One-line diagram of low voltage power supply
1. Open the high voltage circuit breaker of input side and the isolation knife-blade of bypass cabinet.
2. Q1, Q3 ~ Q6, Q8, Q9, Q11 and Q12 must be in open state.

32 Chapter 3 Electrical Connection
Q1, Q3, Q4 and Q6 are located in the control cabinet, their locations in typical inverter are shown in Figure 3-2, their
locations in 6kV integrated inverter are shown in Figure 3-3, and their locations in 10kV integrated inverter are shown
in Figure 3-4.
Figure 3-2 Positions of Q1, Q3, Q4, and Q6 in typical inverter
Q1
Q6
Q3
Q4
Figure 3-3 Positions of Q1, Q3, Q4, and Q6 in 6kV integrated inverter

Q4 Q3 Q6
Q1
Figure 3-4 Positions of Q1, Q3, Q4, and Q6 in 10kV integrated inverter
Q5 and Q8 of typical inverter are located on the upper part of right panel in the transformer cabinet, as shown in
Figure 3-5; Q5 of integrated inverter is located on the upper part of right panel in the transformer cabinet, as shown in
Figure 3-6.
Q8
Q5
Figure 3-5 Positions of Q5 and Q8 in typical inverter

Q5
Figure 3-6 Position of Q5 in integrated inverter
Positions of Q9, Q11 and Q12 in 5500kVA ~ 10500kVA 10kV inverters are shown in Figure 3-7.

Q12
Figure 3-7 Position of Q9, Q11 and Q12 in 5500kVA ~ 10500kVA 10kV inverters
3. Prepare the cables connected with the inverter and corresponding fasteners.
4. Confirm that the cable types, cross-sectional area (CSA) and voltage class meet the requirements.
5. Check that the phase sequence of the inverter input power is right.
6. Use a megger (10 megohm range) to check the insulation resistance between the phases for the 3-phase input
and output of each section and the insulation resistance to earth.
3.2 Cable Selection

All external power cable, signal cables and fasteners for external power connection must be prepared by the user.
1. Choose main power cable rightly according to actual inlet and outlet cable voltage and current class of the inverter
system and in compliance of related criterion in electric power industry, cable current flow, using criterion supplied by
cable manufacturer and needs for installation and layout. Shielded cables are recommended. Three-core separated
shielded armored cables are recommended. EPR and XLPE are recommended for the insulation materials. Use
copper-core cables to obtain smaller cable diameter.
2. Shielded twisted pair cables are recommended for the signal cables.
 Analog input/output cable: Choosing integrative shielded twisted pair cable with 0.5mm2 ~ 1.5mm2 section area;
2 2
 Digital input/output cable: Choosing integrative shielded twisted pair cable with 0.5mm ~ 1.5mm section area.
 Revolving encoder cable: Choosing integrative shielded twisted pair cable with 0.5mm2 ~ 1.5mm2 section area.
 Communication cable: Choosing special communication cable according to related communication regulation
and requirement, or integrative shielded twisted pair cable with 0.5mm2 ~ 1.5mm2 section area.
3. The control system requires 380V/50Hz power supplied by the user. To ensure that the system is able to work
reliably during the precharging process, the control power supplied by the user must have the capacity satisfied with
the suggesting capability in Table 3-1 (taking F series inverter as an example, G series inverter of the same capacity
is the same as it). The wire diameter of the cable must be at least 8mm2, with typical value of 10mm2. The width of
the breadth cannot be larger than 12.7 mm, as shown in Figure 3-8.
L≤12.7mm
Figure 3-8 Cable lug width

Table 3-1 Recommended capacity of inverter control system power

Model Control power capacity Model Control power capacity
MegaVert-F0280-06/06C MegaVert-F0300-10/10C
MegaVert-F0400-06/06C MegaVert-F0400-10/10C 20kVA
20kVA
MegaVert-F0400-06/06B MegaVert-F1250-10/10C
MegaVert-F0500-06/06B MegaVert-F0500-10/10B
20kVA
MegaVert-F0800-06/06B 20kVA MegaVert-F0800-10/10B
30kVA 30kVA
50kVA
40kVA
MegaVert-F4200-10/10B
50kVA
MegaVert-F10M5-10/10B
3.3 Cable Connection Torque

All the fasteners should meet the tightening torque and tightening force listed in Table 3-2 when you connect the
cables with screws (bolts). Any plastic deformation, crack and fracture are not allowed.
Table 3-2 Tightening torque and tightening force list (only for the fasteners)
Copper Stainless steel Brass
Nominal diameter of
Tightening torque Tightening Tightening torque Tightening Tightening torque Tightening
external thread (mm)
(kgf•cm) force (N) (kgf•cm) force (N) (kgf•cm) force (N)
1.6 0.93 284 0.61 187 0.99 302
2 1.89 464 1.24 304 2.01 493
2.5 3.87 759 2.54 498 4.12 807
3 6.90 1127 4.53 739 7.33 1197
4 16.05 1967 10.54 1291 17.06 2090
5 32.46 3181 21.30 2087 34.49 3380
6 55.13 4502 36.18 2955 58.58 4784
8 133.85 8198 87.84 5380 104.57 6405
10 265.14 12992 174.00 8526 207.14 10150
12 462.45 18883 303.48 12392 361.29 14753

Copper Stainless steel Brass

Nominal diameter of
Tightening torque Tightening Tightening torque Tightening Tightening torque Tightening
external thread (mm)
(kgf•cm) force (N) (kgf•cm) force (N) (kgf•cm) force (N)
16 1148.34 35168 753.60 23079 897.14 27475
Note: The tightening force is the pulling force applied to the external thread and the pressure applied to the connector during
fixing, it is the axial force of the external thread
3.4 Cabling Holes

The connection cables of the inverter shall go through the cabling holes at the bottom or top of the cabinet.
After the cable connection, all cabling holes must be sealed with sealing puddle.
 Note
1. Before leading the cable through the cabling hole, you must remove the corresponding protective cover on the cabling hole
first.
2. Cable fixing devices must be equipped on the two ends of the cable, to prevent the cable from bearing and wearing by force.
3. After confirming that all cables are correctly connected, apply sealing puddle to the cabling inlets and outlets evenly, to prevent
mouse and insect from entering.
3.5 Cable Connection
3.5.1 Connecting Protective Earth Cables
After finishing the mechanical installation, you should connect the protective earth cables. The connecting procedures
of protective earth cables for integral structure inverter are different from those for split structure inverter.
 Integral structure
The typical inverters of 400kVA ~ 800kVA 6kV 500kVA ~ 1250kVA 10kV are integrative structure, and they have three
ground points. The integrated inverters of 280kVA ~ 1250kVA 6kV and 300kVA ~ 1250kVA 10kV have two ground
points. The procedures for connecting protective earth cables are as follows:
1. Connect the shielding coat of input high voltage cable to the input copper earth bar in the transformer cabinet, as
shown in Figure 3-9, Figure 3-10.
Output copper
earth bar
Input copper
earth bar
Figure 3-9 Input/output copper earth bar of typical inverter

Output copper earth bar
Figure 3-10 Input/output copper earth bar of integrated inverter
2. Connect the shielding coat of output high voltage cable to the output copper earth bar in the transformer cabinet,
as shown in Figure 3-9, Figure 3-10.
3. Prepare a yellow-green cable (total CSA ≥ 120mm2) to connect the copper earth bar in the control cabinet to the
protective earth of the user side. The location of copper earth bar in the control cabinet of typical inverter is shown in
Figure 3-11, the location of copper earth bar in the control cabinet of 6kV integrated inverter is shown in Figure 3-12,
and the location of copper earth bar in the control cabinet of 10kV integrated inverter is shown in Figure 3-13.
Figure 3-11 Copper earth bar in the control cabinet of typical inverter (left view)

Copper earth bar
Figure 3-12 Copper earth bar in the control cabinet of 6kV integrated inverter
Copper
earth bar
Figure 3-13 Copper earth bar in the control cabinet of 10kV integrated inverter
 Split structure
The inverters of above 1250kVA 6kV and 1250kVA 10kV are split structure, and they have five ground points. The
procedures for connecting protective earth cables are as follows:
1. Ensure that the two protective earth points of cabinet connection have been connected according to the split
structure descriptions in Installing and fixing cabinets in 2.5.2 Installation And Fixation, as shown in Figure 2-13.
2. Connect the shielding coat of input high voltage cable to the input copper earth bar, as shown in Figure 3-9.
3. Connect the shielding coat of output high voltage cable to the output copper earth bar, as shown in Figure 3-9,
Figure 3-10.
4. Connect the copper earth bar in the control cabinet (see Figure 3-11, 3-12, 3-13) to the protective earth of the user
side.

3.5.2 Connecting Power Cables
Selecting cabling way

1. System without bypass cabinet
Before delivery, the top cabling holes of transformer cabinet are installed with two covers, and the bottom cabling
holes are installed with two insulators, as shown in Figure 3-14.
 If bottom cabling is selected, you do not need to remove the covers or the insulators, you can use the bottom
cabling holes directly.
 If top cabling is selected, you need to use a cross screwdriver to remove the covers for top cabling holes and the
insulators for bottom cabling holes, and then exchange their positions.
M6 × 16 screw (12 pcs)
Cover (2 pcs)
Top cabling
hole (2 pcs)
M6 × 16 screw (12 pcs)
Insulator (2 pcs)
Bottom cabling
hole (2 pcs)
Figure 3-14 Exchanging positions of covers and insulators
2. Typical inverter system with bypass cabinet

1) Remove the cover of bypass cabling hole at lower left side and the insulator on the bottom cabling hole from the
transformer cabinet, and then exchange their positions, as shown in Figure 3-15.
Cover of
bypass
cabling hole
Insulator
After
exchanging
positions
Insulator
Cover of
bypass
cabling hole
Figure 3-15 Exchanging positions of cover of bypass cabling hole and insulator

2) After exchanging positions of cover of bypass cabling hole and insulator, you can use the bypass cabling hole for
cabling.
3. Integrated inverter system with bypass cabinet (placed side by side with transformer cabinet)
1) Remove the cover of bypass cabling hole at lower right side and the insulator on the bottom cabling hole from the
transformer cabinet, and then exchange their positions, as shown in Figure 3-16.
Cover of
bypass
cabling hole
Insulator
After
exchanging
positions
Insulator
Cover of
bypass
cabling hole
cabling.
4. Integrated inverter system with bypass cabinet (placed side by side with control cabinet)
1) First remove the cover of bypass cabling hole on left side of inverter cabling room, and then remove the insulator
(see Figure 3-15) on the bottom cabling hole at lower right side of transformer cabinet, at last exchange their
positions, as shown in Figure 3-17.
Cover of bypass
cabling hole Exchanging
positions of
cover and
insulator
Insulator
Insulator
Cover of
bypass
cabling
hole
After exchanging positions After exchanging positions

cabling.
Connecing input cable of inverter

The specifications of inverter input port are given in Table 3-3.
Table 3-3 Specifications of inverter input port
Terminal symbol Terminal name and function description
L1, L2, L3 3-ph AC 10kV/6kV 50Hz input terminal
PE Inverter earthing terminal
The main circuit input power of the inverter is required as 10kV/6kV 50Hz. Connect the input cable to the input copper
bar in the transformer cabinet. The connection positions are shown in Figure 3-18.
Input copper bar
Integrated inverter
Input
copper
bar
500kVA ~ 1250kVA 10kV and 400kVA ~ 800kVA 6kV typical inverter

Cable holder
Input
copper
bar
Cable holder
Rear view

Figure 3-18 Connection positions for input cable
The phase sequence of the cable is L1, L2 and L3 from top to bottom; and the copper bar is labeled yellow, green
and red respectively. The input cable of each phase is to be connected to the copper bar through the hole close to the
end of the input copper bar by using bolts and copper bar. To ensure reliable connection, the recommended torque is
shown in Table 3-2.
The procedures for connecting input cable are as follows:
1. Selecting the cabling way. For specific procedures, refer to above-mentioned Selecting cabling way.
2. Through the top cabling hole or bottom cabling hole, connect the user-prepared input cable to the input copper bar.
3. Use the user-prepared cable tie to fix the input cable onto the cable holder (see Figure 3-18).
4. Use the accessory fireproofing mud to seal up the cabling hole.
 Note
1. The phase sequence must be kept consistent: L1 connects to L1 (yellow), L2 connects to L2 (green), and L3 connects to L3
(red).
2. For the integrated inverter, connect the input cable with the L1, L2 and L3 of the transformer directly. When connecting, note
that the phase sequence of input cable must be the same as that of transformer.
3. The integrated inverter has no top cabling way.
Connecting output cable of inverter

The specifications of inverter output port are given in Table 3-4.
Table 3-4 Specifications of inverter output port
U, V, W 3-phase AC 10kV output terminal
PE Inverter earthing terminal
The inverter connects with user side devices through the output copper bar in the transformer cabinet. The
connection positions are shown in Figure 3-19.

Output
copper
bar
Rear view
Integrated inverter
Output copper bar
Rear view
Output copper bar
Front view

Figure 3-19 Connection positions for output cable

Seen from the front of the output cabinet, the phase sequence of the cable is W/V/U from front to back; and the
copper bar is labeled red, green and yellow respectively. The output cable of each phase is to be connected to the
copper bar through the hole close to the end of the output copper bar by using bolts and copper bar. To ensure
reliable connection, the recommended torque is shown in Table 3-2.
The procedures for connecting output cable are as follows:
1. Selecting the cabling way. For specific procedures, refer to above-mentioned Selecting cabling way.
2. Through the top cabling hole or bottom cabling hole, connect the user-prepared output cable to the output copper
bar.
3. Use the user-prepared cable tie to fix the output cable onto the cable holder (see Figure 3-18).
4. Use the accessory fireproofing mud to seal up the cabling hole.
 Note
1. The phase sequence must be kept consistent: U phase connects to U phase, V phase connects to V phase, and W phase connects
to W phase.
2. The integrated inverter has no top cabling way.
3.5.3 Connecting Signal Cables
The signal cables are connected to the user IO terminal block, PA11-J200, PA11-J201 terminals in control cabinet.
The connection positions in typical inverter are shown in Figure 3-20; The connection positions in 6kV integrated
inverter are shown in Figure 3-21; The connection positions in 10kV integrated inverter are shown in Figure 3-22. You
can select to connect the cables.
PA11 user terminal
User low voltage

User I/O terminal block
cable entry holes
Figure 3-20 Connection positions for signal cables of typical inverter

User I/O terminal block PA11 user terminal
User low voltage

cable entry holes
Figure 3-21 Connection positions for signal cables of 6kV integrated inverter
User I/O
terminal
block
PA11 user terminal
User low voltage

cable entry holes
Figure 3-22 Connection positions for signal cables of 10kV integrated inverter
The procedures for connecting signal cables are as follows:

1. Select top cabling or bottom cabling, and use a screwdriver to remove the cover plate of the top cabling hole or
bottom cabling hole.
2. Lead the user-prepared signal cables through the top cabling hole or bottom cabling hole, and connect it to the
user IO terminal block along the cable trough on the two sides of the control cabinet.
3. Connect the shielding coat of the signal cables to the copper earth bar on the bottom of the control cabinet, as
shown in Figure 3-11, 3-12, 3-13.
The function and definition of the user IO terminal block, the PA11-J200 terminal and the PA11-J201 terminal are
given in Table 3-5 ~ Table 3-7.
 Note
The integrated inverter has no top cabling way.

Table 3-5 Function and definition of PA11-J200 terminal and user IO terminal block
Terminal
Classification Function description of terminal Technical specifications
No.
1 +24V
2 GND
3 +24V
4 GND
5 24V power +24V 24V power used by the external device
6 output GND 24V ± 10%, the max. current is 4A
7 +24V
8 GND
9 +24V
10 GND
38 Y1 output common terminal
40 Y1 output normally open contact
50 Eight routes of Y4 output common terminal
Relay normally-open, normally-closed contacts output,
52 relay output Y4 output normally open contact
resistive load: supportive of two types: 220Vac-5A and
54 supportive of Y5 output common terminal
24Vdc-1.5A; inductive load: derating by 30%; the min.
56 normally open Y5 output normally open contact
current is limited as 5mA. The relay output and the
58 and normally Y6 output common terminal
control part digital circuit are photoelectric-isolated
60 closed, Y1 ~ Y8 Y6 output normally open contact
66 Y7 output normally closed contact
72 Y8 output normally closed contact
11 Y18 transistor output common terminal
12 Y18 transistor output
Y11 ~ Y18, eight routes of transistor output,
Eight routes of multiplexing, supportive of 24Vdc-50mA.
transistor output The transistor output and the control part digital circuit
Y11 ~ Y18 are photoelectric-isolated.
Output terminal: +24Vdc, common terminal: GND
32 X1 ~ X4 common terminal
The passive dry contacts are provided by the user
33 X4 input terminal
Multifunction The common terminal supplies +24Vac for the internal
34 /
and multiplexing The programmable terminal for photo coupler isolation
digital input drain-source input:
36 /
terminal X1 ~ X4 Rated voltage: 24Vdc; Input impedance ≥ 4.3kΩ;
The max. input frequency is 200Hz
27 X8 input terminal Active 24Vdc node must be supplied to programmable
28 Multifunction X5 ~ X8 input common terminal terminal for photo coupler isolation input, and the max.
and multiplexing input frequency is 200Hz;
digital input Note: X5 ~ X8 should keep the same polarity, the
30 terminal X5 ~ X8 X7 input terminal recommended terminal is +24Vdc, the common
31 X5 input terminal terminal is GND

Terminal
No.
57 Current input 4 ground
59 Current input 4
61 Current input 3 ground Four routes of current type transducer output,
63 Analog output Current input 3 OUTPUT: DC 4mA ~ 20mA
65 channel Current input 2 ground Response time: 500ms
67 Current input 2 Output load: current type ≤ 500Ω
69 Current input 1 ground

71 Current input 1
One route of voltage type transducer input
41 Differential input -
INPUT: DC - 10~ 10V
Input overload: two times continuously
43 Differential input +
Response time: 500ms
45 Analog input Current input 3 ground
47 channel Current input 3 Three routes of current type transducer input
49 Current input 2 ground INPUT: DC 4mA ~ 20mA
51 Current input 2 Input overload: two times continuously
53 Current input 1 ground Response time: 500ms
55 Current input 1
Table 3-6 Function and definition of PA11-J201 encoding disk port and communication port
Terminal
No.
1 RS485-
Standard RS-485 communication port, isolated
2 RS485+
COM2 port
3
GND_ISO Standard RS-485 communication earth, isolated
4
5
Protective earth PE Protective earth
6
7
Encoder 24V power -
8 24V power used by the encoder
9 24V ± 10%, max. 200mA
Encoder 24V power +
10
11 Encoder Z channel -
Encoder input
12 Encoder Z channel +
13 Encoder B channel -
Encoder input
14 Encoder B channel +
15 Encoder A channel -
16 Encoder A channel +
17 External EPO common terminal The dry contacts are provided by the user.
EPO signal
18 External EPO feedback signal Rated voltage: 24Vdc
Table 3-7 Function and definition of X8 user IO terminal block

Terminal
No.
Output dry contact
1 Closing output
Rated load:
Conventional thermal current is 10A (resistive load)
2 Control signal of Closing output common terminal
Rated voltage ≤ 690Vac or ≤ 220Vdc
high voltage circuit
Output dry contact
3 breaker Opening output
Rated load:
Conventional thermal current is 10A (resistive load)
4 Opening output common terminal
Rated voltage ≤ 690Vac or ≤ 220Vdc
5 Spare
Spare /
6 Spare

Terminal
No.
Feedback signal common terminal
7* Feedback signal of
of high voltage circuit breaker The dry contacts are provided by the user.
high voltage circuit
Feedback signal of high voltage Rated voltage: 220Vdc
8* breaker
circuit breaker
Note*: The terminals of No.7 & No.8 carry hazardous voltages, please operate them with caution
The wiring of the user IO terminal block is shown in Figure 3-23.
Main circuit
Inverter three-phase input Inverter three-phase output Main circuit output terminal
input terminal Output circuit power AC three phases
Main circuit power Bypass Transformer
cabinet
Power unit cabinet 0~6kV/10kV
AC three phases L1
cabinet
Fan HA1 U 0~120Hz
A A1 A8
CT1
6kV/10kV L2 V
50Hz B N B1 B8 M
~
L3 CT2 W
C C1 C8
HA2 Load motor
Control power
terminal
L11 A
380Vac L12 B
50Hz L13 C
1, 3, 5, 7, 9
N N 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
24V + Inverter 24V
Earth terminal
24V - power output
PE A
Transistor 24V
A 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26
Main User
PA1-J12 User Y18 Y17 Y16 Y15 Y14 Y13 Y12 Y11
Touch RS485 control interface unit
HMI board B
screen board B 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25
communication
PA11
PA1
Digital output terminal
Eight routes of programmable transistor
16 Channel A+ passive dry contact output (Y11 ~ Y18)
15 Channel A-
14 Channel B+ C
passive dry contact output (Y1 ~ Y8)

Relay C 38 42 46 50 54 58
Eight routes of programmable relay

13 Channel B-
Encoder
User User
input PG 12 Channel Z+ PA11-J201 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6
Digital output terminal

interface unit
terminal 11 Channel Z- encoder D
board D 40 44 48 52 56 60
channel
9,10 24 V+ PA11
Relay
7,8 24 V-
5,6 PE PA11-J200 64 66 70 72
Normally
Normally
Normally
Normally
User I/O
closed
closed
open
open
User Y7 Y8
1 RS485 - PA11-J201 port unit
User E
2 RS485 + E 62 62 68 68
communi- COM2
3,4 Communication ground
cation port communication
5,6 PE
Photo coupler 28
28 28 28 28
External EPO 17 PA11-J201 Digital input terminal
(Dry contact normally 18 X8 X6 X7 X5 Four routes of photo
closed contact) external EPO F 24V coupler input (X5 ~ X8)
F 27 29 30 31
Photo coupler
24V+
GND 32
Relay closing output 32(24V+)
X8:1 Digital input terminal
(The signals serial-enter X8:2 Four routes of photo
X4 X3 X2 X1
the breaker closing circuit) G coupler input (X1 ~ X4)
Relay opening output G 33 35 37 39
X8:3
(The signals parallel-enter X8:4
the breaker opening circuit) 43
X8:5 + -10V ~ +10V differential
Spare X8 user - voltage input signal
X8:6 41
terminal H H 45 49 53
Analog
- input
Feedback signal of high block - DC 4 ~ 20mA current
terminal
voltage circuit breaker X8:7 I_IN_3 I_IN_2 I_IN_1
+ I input signal
(The inverter provides 220V X8:8 +
I 47 51 55
AC power internally, take care
when connecting the cables) J - J 57 61 65 69
Analog output
terminal
DC 4 ~ 20mA current
Iout_4 Iout_3 Iout_2 Iout_1
K output signal
+
K 59 63 67 71
Figure 3-23 Wiring diagram of user IO terminal block

3.5.4 Connecting Cables For Power Distribution
To ease the user, the inverter provides a power distribution socket for the user. The power distribution socket of
typical inverter is located at the lower right side of the control cabinet, as shown in Figure 3-24. The power distribution
socket of 6kV integrated inverter is located in middle of the left side of control cabinet, as shown in Figure 3-25. The
power distribution socket of 10kV integrated inverter is located at the upper left side of the control cabinet, as shown
in Figure 3-26.
Power distribution socket
Figure 3-24 Power distribution socket of typical inverter (front view)
Figure 3-25 Power distribution socket of 6kV integrated inverter

Figure 3-26 Power distribution socket of 10kV integrated inverter
The power distribution socket is described in Table 3-8.

Table 3-8 Description of power distribution socket
Controlling Position of the Output Output
Name Function description Number
switch controlling switch voltage (V) current (A)
3C socket, facilitating the
Power See Figure 3-1,
user to use electrical
distribution 1 Q6 Figure 3-2 and 220 10
appliance inside and outside
socket Figure 3-3
the cabinet
 Note
The 1-phase 3-hole power distribution socket supplies power for maintaining and lighting. The designed load is 1kW, so don’t
use it to supply power for the equipment with larger load, such as an electric cooker, to avoid wire damage.
3.5.5 Connecting Control Power
The inverter needs the user to provide control power, which is required to be 380V/50Hz. The specification of the
control power terminal block is shown in Figure 3-9.
Table 3-9 Specification of the control power terminal block
Terminal symbol Terminal name and function description Technical specification
A, B, C, N 3-phase AC 380V input terminal and N line See Figure 3-1
The control power terminal block of typical inverter is located in the lower part of the front side of the control cabinet,
as shown in Figure 3-27. The control power terminal block of 6kV, 10kV integrated inverter is located in the lower part
of the left side of the control cabinet, as shown in Figure 3-28.

Figure 3-27 Control power terminal block of typical inverter(front vision)
Figure 3-28 Control power terminal block of integrated inverter
The maximum wiring capacity of the control power terminal block is 14mm2, and the torque is required to be 21kgf•cm.
The connection procedures are as follows:
1. Select top cabling or bottom cabling, and remove the cover plate of the top cabling hole or bottom cabling hole.
2. Lead the user-prepared control power cable through the cabling hole, and connect its A (L11), B (L12), C (L13) and
N line to the control power terminal block in the control cabinet; connect its PE cable to the copper earth bar in the
control cabinet.
3. Use the user-prepared cable tie to bind the control power cable properly.

3.6 Cable Connection Check

After the system cable connection is completed, perform the safety check according to Table 3-10.
Table 3-10 Cable connection check
Standards and requirements Pass Notes
The whole unit is properly grounded, the grounding wires between the cabinets are
□Yes □No
properly connected
The door plates, side plates, rear panels and the cabinet are properly
□Yes □No
grounded
The mechanical parts are not loosened □Yes □No
The input cable and output cable are correctly connected □Yes □No
High voltage sampling board is correctly connected and fixed □Yes □No
The LED and the door open relay are fixed and their cables are
□Yes □No
connected
The phase sequence is correct □Yes □No
Transformer The cabinet, iron core of the transformer and supporting mechanical
□Yes □No
cabinet check parts are properly grounded
The components of the transformer are not damaged or displaced □Yes □No
The pressing cushion blocks of the transformer are fixed □Yes □No
The input, output and CT of the transformer are correctly connected □Yes □No
The transformer are connected in correct group □Yes □No
The tap position of input branch connection is correct, and make sure
□Yes □No
that the positions of three phases are the same
The fan cable is correctly connected and the fan is properly grounded □Yes □No
The soft start precharging resistance is fixed and is correctly connected □Yes □No
The cabinet is properly grounded □Yes □No
Each power unit is stably placed and fixed □Yes □No
The connection of the power unit is correct, including the input and
□Yes □No
output connection of the power unit
The HALL connection is correct, including the N point connection and
□Yes □No
the HALL fixation
Power unit The power units are correctly cascade-connected □Yes □No
cabinet check The connection and fixation of the fiber are correct, check that the fiber
□Yes □No
plug is not damaged
Check the cable connection, note the placement of the input cable, and
make sure that the cables are not crossed or do not contact with each
□Yes □No
other or the inverter chassis, power unit chassis, other energized
conductors or mechanical parts
The fan cable is correctly connected and the fan is properly grounded □Yes □No
The cabinet is properly grounded □Yes □No
The LED, buttons and HMI LCD screen are fixed and connected □Yes □No
The fiber is connected and the subrack enclosure is fixed □Yes □No
The control subrack is fixed and the control signal cables are connected □Yes □No
Control cabinet
The screws on the subrack panel are tightened □Yes □No
check
The power subrack and the battery are fixed and connected □Yes □No
The low voltage apparatus and the relay are fixed and connected □Yes □No
The internal IO terminal blocks are fixed and connected □Yes □No
The external IO terminal blocks are fixed and connected □Yes □No
Check that all cabinets are free of dust and foreign objects □Yes □No

54 Chapter 4 Power Unit
Chapter 4 Power Unit
The Megavert series power units are important components of the inverter. This chapter only briefly introduces
electrical principle and external connections of power unit. If you want to know more details about the power unit,
please refer to power unit manual or consult service center.
4.1 Electrical principle

The locations and connection relation of power units in the inverter are shown in Figure 1-6. The input of each power
unit comes from the secondary of phase-shifting transformer, and its output is equiamplitude PWM voltage. There is a
fixed phase difference between the outputs for eight power units of the same phase (five power units for 6kV). A
terrace shaped sine PWM waveform comes out from the output of inverter after the outputs are connected in series.
The operating principle of the power unit is shown in Figure 4-1.
BUS +
Module B CL 1
input CL2
C
Power
unit case
BUS -
Rectifier DC energy- Voltage Connecting IGBT IGBT

bridge storage sharing resistance of module 1 module 2
module capacitance resistance power unit case
Figure 4-1 Operating principle diagram of the power unit
After the 3-phase AC input of the unit is rectified by the diode and filtered by DC energy-storage capacitor, stable DC
voltage comes out. Under the control of main control system, the IGBT inverter bridge turns the DC voltage into
equiamplitude SPWM square wave voltage.
4.2 External Connections

The external ports of power unit are shown in Figure 4-2.

Chapter 4 Power Unit 55
CL-1
CL-2
CL-1
CL-2
OR-B
OR-BP
OT-A
OR-B
OR-BP OT-A
CBA CB A
MegaVert-FM025N0, MegaVert-FM035N0, MegaVert-FM050N0 MegaVert-FM075N0
CL1
CL1
CL2
CL2
A
B
C
OR-B
OR-B
OT-A
OT-A
OR-BP
OR-BP
C B A
MegaVert-FM100N0, MegaVert-FM150N0 MegaVert-FM200N0, MegaVert-FM250N0、MegaVert-FM300N0
OR-BP
C
B
A
OR-B
OT-A
CL1
CL2
MegaVert-FM350N0, MegaVert-FM400N0, MegaVert-FM450N0, MegaVert-FM500N0, MegaVert-FM550N0, MegaVert-FM600N0

Figure 4-2 External ports of power unit (front panel)

56 Chapter 4 Power Unit
4.2.1 Input and Output Power Terminals
Input and output power terminals include input terminals and output terminals of power unit, as described in
Table 4-1.
Table 4-1 Description of input and output power terminals
A, B, C Input terminals of power unit
CL1, CL2 Output terminals of power unit
4.2.2 Control Terminals
The control terminals are the fiber sockets, as described in Table 4-2.
Table 4-2 Control terminals
OR-B Fiber port of input signal
OT-A Fiber port of output signal
OR-BP Bypass fiber signal port
4.2.3 Bypass Options
The bypass function parts are the options of the medium voltage inverter produced by Emerson, you can select them
according to your needs. The appearance is shown in Figure 4-3. (According to different power rating, the number of
used bypass contactors is different. Please refer to the actual product.)
Figure 4-3 Bypass appearance
Main Function
The medium voltage inverter with power units in cascade connection features low harmonic for output voltage, high
efficiency and so on. However, when the power unit encounters a severe fault, the power unit will stop output for
protection, and the system cannot output voltages, thus causing the inverter stops operating. If the loads of the
inverter are important loads which cannot stop operating, it will cause direct economic loss.
To avoid shutdown condition owing to a fault, the bypass unit can cut off the faulty power unit from the system after
the power unit encounters a fault and stops output, make other un-faulty power units in cascade connection, and
keep relatively-large output voltage amplitude, to make the loads of the medium voltage inverter keep derating
operation.

Chapter 4 Power Unit 57
Operation mode
When one of the cascade-connected power units encounters a fault (Fuse fault, IGBT fault, capacitance fault and so
on), the power unit will stop output and thus the system stops output; start up the internal bypass circuit of the power
unit and transfer the output of the power unit to the bypass. Meanwhile, the main controller inside the inverter will
transfer the power units corresponding to other two phases to the bypass, to ensure that the 3-phase voltage of the
inverter output keeps balance. The main controller shall conduct corresponding adjustment, so that the inverter can
provide maximum power output under the precondition that overcurrent does not occur to the rest power units.
The action of starting up the bypass circuit of the power unit has no connection with which power unit is faulty.
However, make sure that the main controller can inspect the faults, including fiber communication fault, which can
cause bypass action. So the bypass function can protect not only the power semiconductor components, the
capacitance and other power circuit of the power unit, but also the control circuit, communication circuit and fiber
communication circuit of the power unit board, thus making further improvement on reliability.
Delivery mode
If the bypass function is needed, please specify your selection of bypass options when ordering the inverter, the
bypass assembly will be installed as a whole in the inverter and delivered with the whole system.

58 Chapter 5 Operation, Control And Display
Chapter 5 Operation, Control And Display
This chapter introduces the operation, control and display of the inverter, including operation safety, control panel and
operation description of human-machine interface (HMI).
5.1 Operation Safety

 The operation personnel must receive specialized training before operating the system, to avoid misoperation.
 The inverter is a high voltage device. Any operation personnel must observe the operation regulation strictly.
 During the operation, it is strictly prohibited from using any hard object to click the touch screen.
5.2 Control Panel

The control panel is composed of buttons, indicators and HMI, as shown in Figure 5-1.
Figure 5-1 Control panel
Clicking "control button" can enter the control panel interface after entered HMI system, as shown in figure 5-2

Chapter 5 Operation, Control And Display 59
Control
buttons
Figure 5-2 HMI control panel
5.2.1 Button Descriptions
The buttons on the HMI control panel are described in Table 5-1.
Table 5-1 Button descriptions
Button Description
Rotating this switch realizes switching between local control and remote control: rotating it to left
LOCAL-ROMOTE selecting
side switches to local control; rotating it to right side switches to remote control; rotating it to
switch
middle is null: neither local control nor remote control
Pressing this button stops output of the inverter, no matter the inverter is under local control or
EPO button remote control, meanwhile, a signal is sent out through the relay output terminal to open the input
high voltage circuit breaker, and the fault relay takes action
After the main control system passes the self test, pressing this button precharges the power
Start Inverter button units. After the switching-on condition is satisfied, the main control system will send a
switching-on signal and close the input circuit breaker automatically
After the startup condition is satisfied, pressing this button starts up the inverter in preselected
Start Motor button
startup mode, finally, the inverter operates stably at set output frequency
When the inverter is operating in normal state, pressing this button stops the inverter in
Stop Motor button
preselected shutdown mode, finally, the inverter stops output
After the fault source disappears, pressing this button clears the arisen faults that are allowed to
Clear Faults button
be restored
5.2.2 Indicator Definitions
The indicators on the control panel are defined in Table 5-2.

Table 5-2 Indicator definitions
Indicator Color Status Meaning
The main control system passes the self test, it is allowed to perform
Blinking
precharge operation or normal shutdown
RUN indicator Green On The inverter is in operating status
The main control system does not pass the self test, and the inverter is in
Off
commisionning mode or shuts down upon a fault
Blinking The inverter has minor faults
FAULT indicator Red On The inverter has severe faults
Off The inverter has no faults
1. Through the 380V auxiliary winding, precharge the inverter to generate
MAIN POWER On 6kV/10kV high voltage;
Red
indicator 2. Close the 6kV/10kV circuit breaker
Off The inverter 6kV/10kV high voltage is powered off
Note*:
Two MAIN POWER indicators are available: one is located on the control panel, as shown in Figure 5-1; the other is located on
the panel of the transformer cabinet

5.3 Operation Description Of HMI

The HMI provides an LCD display panel, touch buttons, as shown in Figure 5-3. For HMI menu structure, refer to
Appendix 7 HMI Menu Structure.
Figure 5-3 HMI
The LCD display panel displays English LCD screen, which can display events, alarms and faults, display and set
operating parameters, function code names and function parameter ranges.
The display functions include:
1. System operation block diagram
2. System input voltage & current values and output voltage & current values
3. State of any power unit, for instance, input voltage and bus voltage of the power unit
4. Options configured or not and their states
5. Help function and so on
The HMI is a large LCD touch screen with password protection. When no operation is performed within specified time,
the touch screen will turn off the backlight automatically, and enter a password-protection state. When you need to
use it, click the touch screen and it will light up again, type the correct password and then you can operate it normally.
In this way, the service life of the touch screen can be prolonged; moreover, unauthorized user can be prevented from
operating the touch screen. Refer to 7.1.2 Password Setting for the password level setting.
5.3.1 Startup Screen
After the LCD touch screen is powered on, it enters the startup screen, displaying ‘System in initialization, please
wait…’, as shown in Figure 5-4.
Figure 5-4 Startup screen

5.3.2 Main Screen
After the system initialization is done (see Figure 5-5), input the correct user name and password, the Enter System
button will appear, click the button to enter the main screen, as shown in Figure 5-6.
Figure 5-5 System self detection is done
Press the Enter system button to enter the main screen, as shown in Figure 5-6.
Figure 5-6 Main screen of state monitoring
The main screen of the LCD display screen is divided into first level menu, operation block diagram, and input and
output states.
The first level menu includes Control buttons, System Configuration, Parameter Settings, Operation Monitoring,
Event Log and Help. The six buttons are placed on the upper part of the touch screen in taskbar mode. Clicking any
first level button enters the corresponding operation screen.
The operation block diagram includes the following modules: High Voltage Input, Phase Shift Transformer, Power
Unit, Output, Motor Load, Low Voltage Input, Control Power and Main Control Unit. When a fault occurs to the
system, the corresponding module will be highlighted in red, prompting that the module has a fault. Clicking the
function module displays the current specific fault information.
The input and output states displays the voltage, current and frequency of the input 3-phase lines, and voltage,
current and frequency of the output 3-phase lines.
5.3.3 System Configuration Screen
Click the System Configuration button to enter the system configuration screen, and the System Configuration
button is highlighted, as shown in Figure 5-7.

Figure 5-7 System configuration screen
The system configuration screen is divided into three areas: the upmost is the first level menu, the left is the second
level menu and the rest is the content display area.
The second level menus of the system management screen include System information, Parameter Initialization
Password Setting, System Time, Language Setting, Logout/ and Control Buttons, Clicking any of the second
level menus enters the corresponding screen to view and set the parameters. For specific screen operation
description, refer to Chapter 7 Specific Description On Functions And Setting.
5.3.4 Parameter Settings Screen
Click the Parameter Settings button to enter the parameter settings screen. The second level menus of the
parameter settings screen include Quick Setup, Motor, Reference, Control, Protection, I/O, Communication,
User-defined, Service and Control Buttons. Clicking the corresponding button enters the corresponding screen.
The buttons of first level menu and second level menu corresponding to the current screen are highlighted. For
specific function description of the parameters, refer to Chapter 7 Specific Description On Functions And Setting.
 Note
1. Different levels of operation password are required for different parameters.
2. Different parameters have different setting ranges, when the values exceed the upper and lower thresholds, the HMI will not
allow typing them.
3. For some parameters whose upper or lower thresholds are related to other parameters, if their setting values exceed the upper
or lower thresholds, that is, the related parameter values, they will become invalid and return to last setting values.
4. The button with a red mark on it cannot be operated.
5. When the parameters are displayed in multiple screens, click the Last page button or Next page button to switch the screens.
1. Quick Setup screen

After you enter the parameter settings screen, the quick setup screen will be displayed by default, as shown in
Figure 5-8.
Figure 5-8 Quick setup screen

The quick setup screen displays the uppermost parameters of the inverter in two screens when it is operating
normally. Clicking the Next page button enters the setting screen of more quick parameters.
2. Motor screen
Click the Motor button to enter the motor screen, as shown in Figure 5-9.
Figure 5-9 Motor screen
Select the motor control mode and the motor, and then click the Confirm button to take effect.
Clicking the Motor 1 or Motor 2 can set the relevant parameters of Motor 1 or Motor 2. Taking Motor 1 as an
example, click it to enter its parameter setting screen, as shown in Figure 5-10.
Figure 5-10 Motor 1 parameter setting screen
Clicking the Next page button enters the setting screen of more Motor 1 parameters.
3. Reference screen
Click the Reference button to enter the reference screen, as shown in Figure 5-11.
Figure 5-11 Reference screen

The reference screen includes Frequency Reference, Multi Frequency Reference, AI input curve Reference and
Simplified PLC function Ref. Taking Frequency Reference as an example, click it to enter the frequency parameter
setting screen, as shown in Figure 5-12.
Figure 5-12 Frequency parameter setting screen
4. Control screen
Click the Control button to enter the control screen, as shown in Figure 5-13.
Figure 5-13 Control screen
The control screen includes Start/stop Control, Closed Loop Control, Flux Control, System Bypass Settings,
Output Switch Settings, Belt Conveyor Control and Static Torque Pre-control. Taking Start/stop Control as an
example, click it to enter the start/stop control parameter screen, as shown in Figure 5-14.
Figure 5-14 Start/stop control parameter screen
5. Protection screen
Click the Protection button to enter the protection parameter screen, as shown in Figure 5-15.

Figure 5-15 Protection screen
The protection parameters are used to set the protection points for fault handling, including Protection Parameter
Settings, System Fault Mask Word, Power Unit Fault Mask Word and Fault Handling Method.
Taking System Fault Mask Word as an example, click it to enter the system fault mask word screen, as shown in
Figure 5-16.
Figure 5-16 System fault mask word screen
In the system fault mask word screen, select the faults to be masked, and click the Confirm button to take effect.
6. I/O screen
Click the I/O button to enter the I/O screen, as shown in Figure 5-17.
Figure 5-17 I/O screen
The I/O setting includes Digital Input, Digital Output, Analog Input and Analog Output.
Taking the parameter setting screen of digital input as an example, click the Digital Input button to enter the
parameter setting screen of digital input, as shown in Figure 5-18.

Figure 5-18 Parameter setting screen of digital input
In the parameter setting screen of digital input, select the functions of relay input X1 ~ X8 and relevant function codes
(refer to 7.2.6 I/O Parameter), and then click the Confirm button to take effect.
7. Communication screen
Click the Communication button to enter the communication screen, as shown in Figure 5-19.
Figure 5-19 Communication screen
The communication screen includes Local Parameter, External Serial Communication, COM1 Communication
and COM2 Communication.
Taking COM1 Communication as an example, click it to enter the parameter setting screen of COM1 communication,
as shown in Figure 5-20.
Figure 5-20 Parameter setting screen of COM1 communication
In the parameter setting screen of COM1 (factory debug) communication, you can perform protocol selection, baud
rate selection, and data format selection, and set the communication overtime detected time.
8. User-defined screen
Click the User-defined button to enter the user-defined screen, as shown in Figure 5-21.

Figure 5-21 User-defined screen
The user-defined parameters are analog value and mask word parameters defined by the user. Clicking the Next
page button enters the next page of parameter setting screen.
9. Service screen
The service parameters are used in factory commissioning, not open to the user.
5.3.5 Operation Monitoring Screen
Click the Operation Monitoring button to enter the operation monitoring screen. The second level menus of the
operation monitoring screen include Inverter Status, Motor Status, Power Unit Status, Running Control and
Energy Saving Calculation. Clicking the corresponding button enters the corresponding screen. The buttons of first
level menu and second level menu corresponding to the current screen are highlighted.
1. Inverter status screen

After you enter the operation monitoring screen, the Inverter status screen is displayed by default, as shown in
Figure 5-22.
Figure 5-22 Inverter status screen
The Inverter status screen displays Input Status, Output Status, Temperature Monitoring, I/O Status and
Command Monitoring. Clicking any of the buttons enters the corresponding screen. The displaying content of each
screen is as follows:
1) The input status screen of the inverter displays the 3-phase input line voltage, 3-phase current, input frequency
and operating status indicators.
2) The output status screen of the inverter displays the 3-phase output line voltage, 3-phase current, output frequency
and operating status indicators.
3) The temperature monitoring screen displays the 3-phase temperature monitoring and cabinet temperature of the
phase-shifting transformer.
4) The I/O status screen displays the on/off state of the digital input and output terminals (the indicator is grey,
indicating the terminal is open; the indicator is green, indicating the terminal is closed), and the output voltage of the
analog input and output terminals.

5) The command monitoring screen displays operating command channel, speed operating mode and set frequency
of the inverter.
Taking Output status as an example, its screen is shown in Figure 5-23.
Figure 5-23 Output status screen
In the output status screen, the lower part displays a row of status indicators, including Run, Run reverse, Zero
speed, Acceleration, Deceleration, Constant speed, In pre-excitation, Adjustment, Frequency conversion,
Current Limited, Over voltage, Torque-amp limit, Speed-amp limit, Fault, Speed control, Power unit bypass,
Phase locked and Sys-bypass, indicating different running status respectively. If one of the indicators is on, it
indicates that the inverter is in corresponding status. See Table 5-3 for details.
Table 5-3 Descriptions on status indicators
Name Status indicator Inverter status
Run On (green) The inverter is running
Run reverse On (red) The inverter is running reversely
Zero speed On (green) The inverter is in zero-frequency standby status
Acceleration On (green) The inverter is in accelerating running status
Deceleration On (green) The inverter is in decelerating running status
Constant speed On (green) The inverter is in constant-speed running status
In pre-excitation On (green) The inverter is in pre-excitation
Adjustment On (green) The inverter is in self-adjusting control of the motor parameters
Freqency conversion On (green) The inverter is in frequency conversion status
Current Limited On (green) The inverter output is in overcurrent status
Over voltage On (green) The power unit bus of the inverter is in overvoltage status
Torque-amp(litude) limit On (green) The inverter output is in torque amplitude limiting status
Speed-amp(litude) limit On (green) The inverter output is in speed amplitude limiting status
Fault On (red) The inverter generates faults (minor fault or severe fault)
Speed control On (green) The inverter is in speed control mode
Power unit bypass On (red) The inverter is in power unit bypass running mode
Phase locked On (red) The inverter output voltage locks power grid voltage phase
Sys(tem)-bypass On (red) The inverter is in system bypass running mode
2. Motor status screen

Click the Motor status button to enter the motor status screen, as shown in Figure 5-24.

Figure 5-24 Motor status screen
The motor status screen displays Torque current, Excitation current, Output torque, Torque input, Motor output
power, Motor estimated frequency, Motor Actual frequency and Motor speed.
3. Power unit status screen

Click the Power unit status button to enter the power unit status screen, as shown in Figure 5-25.
6kV Inverter system 10kV Inverter system

Figure 5-25 Power unit status screen
The power unit status screen displays Power Unit Input Voltage, Power Unit Bus Voltage and Power Unit Bypass
Status Display.
Taking 10kV Inverter system as an example:
1) The options of Power unit Input voltage are ‘Voltage 1 ~ 4’. Clicking any option enters the corresponding screen.
Each screen displays the 3-phase input line voltage of six power units.
2) The options of Power unit bus voltage are ‘Voltage 1 ~ 2’. Clicking any option enters the corresponding screen.
3) The part under Power unit bypass status display displays the bypass status of 24 power units in three rows. The
power unit with an illuminated red indicator is in bypass status.
Taking power unit input voltage1 as an example, click Voltage1 to enter the power unit input voltage1 screen, as

6kV Inverter system 10kV Inverter system

Figure 5-26 Power unit input voltage1 screen
Taking 10kV Inverter system as an example, The power unit input voltage1 screen displays the 3-phase (AB, BC,
CA) input line voltage of six power units (A1, B1, C1, A2, B2, C2).
Clicking the Next page button enters the power unit input voltage2 screen. Clicking the Next page button in power
unit input voltage2 screen enters the power unit input voltage3 screen. In the same way, you can click the Next page
button till entering the power unit bus voltage2 page.
4. Running control screen

Click the Running Control button to enter the running control screen, as shown in Figure 5-27.
Figure 5-27 Running control screen
The running control screen displays status indicators, buttons and control options.
The status indicators include Running status indicator, Reverse Rotation indicator, Jog indicator, Local indicator
and Remote indicator. See Table 5-4 for specific descriptions.
Table 5-4 Descriptions on status indicators
Name Status indicator Inverter status
Green Running
Running status indicator
Grey Stopping
Red Running reversely
Reverse Rotation indicator
Grey Running forwardly
Green Jog running
Jog indicator
Grey Not Jog running
Green Local
Local indicator
Grey \
Green Remote
Remote indicator
Grey \
The buttons include Start Motor button, Stop Motor button, Clear Faults button and Jog button.
The control options include Jog Direction option and High Voltage CB Switching Mode option, which can be
selected by clicking.

5. Energy saving calculation screen

Click the Energy Saving Calculation button to enter the energy saving calculation screen, as shown in Figure 5-28.
Figure 5-28 Energy saving calculation screen
In the energy saving calculation screen, the saved electricity fee can be automatically calculated after the Unit
Electricity Fee is set.
5.3.6 Event Log Screen
Click the Event Log button to enter the event log screen. The second level menus of the event log screen include
Current Log, History Log, Save History Log and Clear History Log. Clicking the corresponding button enters the
corresponding screen. The buttons of first level menu and second level menu corresponding to the current screen are
highlighted.
The display content of each screen is as follows:
1. The current log screen displays the current fault information of the system and relevant operation event records of
the inverter.
2. The history log screen displays the historical fault information of the system and relevant operation event records
of the inverter. At most 1000 pieces of records can be recorded.
3. In the clear history log screen, you can clear all historical information after typing the correct password. But it is not
open to the user.
4. The history log can be stored in the USB disk at any time (the USB disk is required to be inserted in the HMI).
Taking History Log as an example, its screen is shown in Figure 5-29.
Figure 5-29 History log screen
5.3.7 Help Screen
Click the Help button to enter the help screen, as shown in Figure 5-30. The second level menus of the help screen
include System Configuration, Parameter Setting, Operation Monitoring, Event Log and About. Clicking the
corresponding button can view the corresponding instruction for use and software version information.

Figure 5-30 Help screen
5.3.8 Control buttons
After entering HMI system, Clicking Control buttons in any screen, the MegaVert Inverter Control Panel screen will
appear, as shown in Figure 5-31. It includes Start Inverter button, Run Motor button, Stop Motor button and Clear
Faults button. Clicking the corresponding button can control inverter with corresponding operation.
Figure 5-31 MegaVert Inverter control panel screen

Chapter 6 Descriptions On Basic Operation 73
Chapter 6 Descriptions On Basic Operation
This chapter introduces the basic operation of the inverter, including basic operation procedures, status indicating
logic, inverter operation mode and guide on common parameter setting.
6.1 Basic Operation
6.1.1 Power-On Of The Inverter
Power-on of control power

1. Before power-on, ensure that the input high voltage circuit breaker is in switching-off status;
2. Ensure that the knife-blade of the bypass cabinet is in frequency-conversion operating status;
3. Check that the inlet and outlet cables of the medium voltage inverter are correctly connected;
4. Close breaker Q8 of transformer cabinet (Inverters of which the power rating below 800kVA/6kV and
1250kVA/10kV do not have the breaker), and breakers Q9, Q11, Q12 in the subsidiary transformer cabinet (only for
inverter of 5500kVA ~ 10500kVA/10kV). Close all cabinet doors except the control cabinet door;
5. Close the breakers Q3, Q4, Q5, Q6 and Q1 in the control cabinet one by one;
6. Close the control cabinet door after closing the breakers;
7. After the control power is on, the main control system begins to perform self-test, including DSP chip RAM
detection, dual-port RAM detection, EEPROM chip detection, HMI communication detection and CAN communication
detection. The two indicators on the control panel turn on at the same time and last for 3s;
 Note
1. If one of the indicators does not turn on, the indicator or relevant hardware may be damaged and need replacement.
2. If all indicators do not turn on, a CAN communication failure may occur, check that the connection of digital IO board or other
boards is not loosened.
8. After the main control system passes all self-test, the RUN indicator (green) blinks;
If the RUN indicator still remains off, it indicates that the main control system does not complete the self-test. At this
point, refer to 8.2 Fault Handling to perform checks.
9. Click the Enter system button in the HMI and type the password, after that, you can set and monitor the
parameters.
Soft start and precharge

The following procedures take operations on the control panel for example. You can also perform remote operation
and display through digital IO terminals.
1. Set LOCAL-REMOTE selecting switch to ‘LOCAL’;
2. Press Start Inverter button on the control panel. At this point, the contactor KM3 closes and the auxiliary winding
precharging loop is powered on;
3. The inverter begins soft start and charges the power units. Then the high voltage CHARGING indicator (red) is on;
4. In precharging process, the system performs checks such as power unit IGBT self-test, fiber self-test and bypass
assembly self-test (when bypass assembly is configured) simultaneously;
5. After the precharging of the power units and relevant self-test are completed, the contactor KM3 opens
automatically. Close the inlet high voltage circuit breaker manually or automatically, after the switching-on is
successful, the high voltage CHARGING indicator (red) on the control panel is on. When the bus voltage of the power
units keeps lower than 800V or the self-test fails, and the lasting time is longer than 50s, the HMI will report ‘Soft
startup pre-charging failure’ fault, and the contactor KM3 will open automatically.
After the HMI reports ‘Soft startup pre-charging failure’ fault, refer to 8.2 Fault Handling to perform checks.

74 Chapter 6 Descriptions On Basic Operation
6.1.2 Operation Of The Inverter
Jog operation
The following procedures take operations on the control panel for example. You can also realize the function through
other command channels.
2. Set jog operation parameters correctly (refer to 7.2 Parameter Setting);
3. After the medium voltage inverter completes the precharging, and the system is in normal shutdown status, you
can perform jog operation:
Keep on pressing the Jog button on the ‘Operation Monitoring’ -> ‘Running Control’ screen on the HMI.
4. The motor begins jog operation, and the status is displayed as follows:
 Control panel: The RUN indicator (green) is on;
 HMI: The Running status and Jog indicators turn green on the ‘Operation Monitoring’ -> ‘Running Control’
screen.
5. Stop jog operation: release the Jog button on the HMI, the inverter will shut down in ‘decelerate to stop’ mode;
6. When the inverter output reduces to zero, the jog operation process finishes, and the status is displayed as follows:
 Control panel: The RUN indicator (green) blinks;
 HMI: The Running status and Jog indicators turn grey on the ‘Operation Monitoring’ -> ‘Running Control’
screen.
Normal operation
The following procedures take operations on the control panel for example. You can also realize the function through
other command channels.
2. Set parameters of frequency reference and start/stop control correctly (refer to 7.2 Parameter Setting);
3. After the medium voltage inverter completes precharging, and the system is in normal shutdown status, you can
perform startup operation:
Press the Start Motor button on the control panel or the Start Motor button on the ‘Operation Monitoring’ -> ‘Running
Control’ screen on the HMI.
4. The inverter starts up following the set startup mode, and accelerates to the set frequency following the set
accelerating mode. The status is displayed as follows:
 Control panel: The RUN indicator (green) is on;
 HMI: The Running Status indicator turns green on the ‘Operation Monitoring’ -> ‘Running Control’ screen.
5. At any time during the operating process, press the Stop Motor button on the control panel or the Stop Motor
button on the ‘Operation Monitoring’ -> ‘Running Control’ screen on the HMI, the inverter will shut down following the
set stop mode.
6. When the stop operation is completed, the inverter will enter normal shutdown status, as displayed as follows:
 Control panel: The RUN indicator (green) blinks;
 HMI: The Running Status indicator turns grey on the ‘Operation Monitoring’ -> ‘Running Control’ screen.
6.1.3 Alarm, Fault And Reset
When the inverter generates a fault or alarm, the HMI will pop up the corresponding fault or alarm window. According
to the different fault types, the indicator status on the control panel is described in Table 6-1.

Table 6-1 Indicator status on the control panel

Indicator status
Fault type RUN indicator (green)
FAULT indicator (red)
Stop status Running status
Normal Off Blinking On
Minor fault (F1) Blinking Off On
Severe fault (F2) On Off Off
The logic of alarm/fault resetting is as follow:

1. The alarm can be automatically reset;
2. Manual resetting is required after the minor fault disappears;
3. Most severe faults can be manually reset only when the inverter is in shutdown status. For the faults concerning
physical hardware damage, such as component damage, you must open Q1. After the faults are cleared, you can
close Q1 and perform operation.
4. The resetting operation can be realized through the following methods:
1) Pressing the Clear Faults button on the HMI.
2) Pressing the Clear Faults button on the ‘Operation Monitoring’ -> ‘Running Control’ screen on the HMI;
3) Using multifunction digital input terminal (selecting fault reset function, No. 8 function).
5. In shutdown mode, after all faults (including minor faults and severe faults) have disappeared and been reset, you
can start up the inverter.
6.1.4 Power-Off Of The Inverter
1. Confirm that the inverter is in shutdown status;

2. Switch off the input high voltage circuit breaker;
3. Open the control cabinet door, open the air breakers Q3, Q4, Q6, and Q1 one by one to cut off the 380V power
supply.
6.1.5 Emergency Power Off (EPO)
Under any emergent condition, press the ‘EPO’ button on the control panel (see Figure 5-1), the input high voltage
circuit breaker is switched off, the inverter stops output, and the motor begins ‘coast to stop’.
6.2 Operation Modes Of The Inverter
6.2.1 Running Command Channels Of The Inverter
The running command channels of the inverter mean the physical channels through which the inverter receives
running commands: start motor, stop motor, jog and so on.
1. In local state (the selecting switch on the control panel is set to ‘LOCAL’), the following methods are valid:
Local control mode via the control cabinet: operating the HMI and corresponding buttons on the control panel.
2. In remote state (the selecting switch on the control panel is set to ‘REMOTE’), the following methods are valid:
1) Control mode via the multifunction terminals: define the functions of X1 ~ X8 digital input terminals;
2) Control mode via the COM1 (factory debug) and COM2 communication ports: using communication mode.
For switching and selecting specific running command channel, refer to 6.3.1 Setting Running Command Channel.
6.2.2 Operating Status Of The Inverter
The Inverter has the following kinds of operating status:

1. Status of waiting for charging: After the control power of the inverter is on, but the operations of soft start and
precharging have not been performed.

2. Status of charging process: In the status of waiting for charging, press the Start Inverter button, the inverter begins
to precharge the power units and perform related self test operation. After the precharging and self test are finished,
the inverter will perform automatic switch-on or wait for manual switch-on by the user, which depends on the set
switch-on mode.
3. Status of allowing running: It is the normal shutdown status. After the inverter is powered on and initialized, if no
running command is inputted, or a valid shutdown command is executed during operation, the inverter will enter this
status.
4. Normal operating status: After receiving a valid running command, the inverter enters the normal operating status.
5. Faulty operating status: Minor faults (F1) occur during normal operating status, then the inverter enters faulty
operating status, and operates at faulty running frequency, which depends on the parameter setting of ‘Continuous
running frequency selection at minor fault’ (F29.03), refer to 7.2.5. Protection parameter Setting.
6. Zero-frequency standby status: It means that the inverter is in operating status with the RUN indicator on, but stops
outputting voltage. Special or abnormal operations, such as external cutoff, simplified PLC function pausing, both set
frequency and current frequency lower than the zero-frequency threshold, may cause that the inverter enters the
zero-frequency standby status.
7. Faulty shutdown status: Minor faults (F1) cannot be reset and cleared in shutdown status, or severe faults (F2)
occur in any status, then the inverter is prohibited from outputting voltage, and enters faulty shutdown status.
Table 6-2 Indicator character in various operating status
Indicator status
Operating status The inverter stops output or not
RUN indicator FAULT indicator
Waiting for charging Blinking Off Yes
Charging process Blinking Off Yes
Allowing running Blinking Off Yes
Normal operating On Off No
Faulty operating On Blinking No
Zero-frequency standby On Off Yes
Faulty shutdown Off Blinking/on Yes
6.2.3 Speed Operation Mode Of The Inverter
The inverter can run in five different speed control modes, in priority order, which respectively include: jog operation,
external process closed loop operation, simplified PLC function operation, multi-section speed operation and ordinary
operation, as shown in Figure 6-1.

The system is
powered on.
The input high Normal

voltage circuit shutdown status
breaker is
switched on.
Jog Y Jog High
command? operation priority
N
External process Y
close loop operation
is valid? External
N Process close loop N process
operation is prohibited? close loop
operation
Y
Simplified PLC Y
operation is
valid?
N Simplified PLC N Simplified
operation is prohibited? PLC
operation
Y
Y Multi-section
speed
The states of multi- operation
section speed frequency
selecting terminals are
not all 0?
N Ordinary Low
operation priority
Figure 6-1 Selection of speed control mode
The five speed operation modes provide five different frequency command sources. The various kinds of operation
modes are described as follows:
1. Jog operation: In normal shutdown state, after receiving a jog operation command, the inverter will operate
according to jog accelerating & decelerating time (F12.33, F12.34) and jog frequency (F08.13).
2. External process closed loop operation: When the external process closed loop function (F17.00) is selected to be
valid, the inverter will select the process closed loop operation mode, that is, the inverter will perform closed loop
regulation according to the setting and feedback signals (F17.01 ~ F17.36, refer to 7.2.4 Control Parameter). Through
the multifunction terminals (No. 21 function), you can invalidate the process closed loop operation mode and switch
the inverter to lower level of operation mode.
3. Simplified PLC function operation: When the simplified PLC function (F11.00, low 4 positions) is selected to be
valid, the inverter will select the simplified PLC function operation mode, that is, the inverter will operate according to
the preset operation mode (the frequency and operating time of each phase can be set, F11.00 ~ F11.30, refer to
7.2.3 Reference Parameter). Through the multifunction terminals (No. 22 function), you can invalidate the simplified
PLC function operation mode and switch the inverter to lower level of operation mode.
4. Multi-section speed operation: When the multifunction terminals (No. 1, 2, 3, 4 functions) are not all in OFF states,
the inverter will select the multi-section speed operation mode. You can select the multi-section frequency from 1 to
15 to perform multi-section speed operation through the logic combination of the four terminals (F10.00 ~ F10.14,
refer to 7.2.3 Reference Parameter).
5. Ordinary operation: When none of the above four special speed operation modes is invalid, the inverter will enter
the ordinary speed operation mode. At this point, the frequency setting depends on the setting of main frequency
setting.

6.2.4 Frequency Setting Channel Of The Inverter
The main frequency setting can be set through the following five physical setting channels:
1. HMI touch screen
2. Multifunction input terminals;
3. COM1 communication port (factory debug);
4. COM2 communication port;
5. User analog input;
The main frequency setting obtained through the above-mentioned channels can be used as the frequency source of
the speed operation mode (‘External process closed loop operation’ mode and ‘Simplified PLC function operation’
mode) of the inverter. After corresponding logic handling, the output frequency command can be finally obtained.
For detailed operations of switching and selecting the main frequency setting channel, refer to 6.3.2 Setting
Reference Frequency.
6.2.5 Control Mode Of The Inverter
The inverter has three control modes, which is set by the parameter of ‘Motor control mode selection’ (F04.00, refer to
7.2.2. Motor Parameter):
1. Vector control mode without PG: that is the vector control mode without speed sensor. PG is not required to be
installed; meanwhile, the mode features high control performance, such as the characters of low frequency & high
torsion, and high speed-stabilizing precision etc.. It can complete high-precision speed control, and it is usually used
in the occasion requiring high-robustness, which the V/F control mode cannot satisfy.
2. Vector control mode with PG: PG is required to be installed on the controlled motor shaft to ensure the control
performance. The mode is applicable to the occasion in which the torque response is faster and the speed-stabilizing
precision is higher.
3. V/F control without PG: it can be used in common occasion that does not require high performance.
6.3 Guide On Setting Common Parameters

This section briefly introduces the setting procedures for some common function parameters. For detailed parameter
functions and descriptions, please refer to Chapter 7 Descriptions On Function And Setting.
6.3.1 Setting Running Command Channel
Four running command channels are available. You can modify it through the following methods:
1. HMI operation:
 Enter ‘Parameter Settings’ -> ‘Quick Setup setting’ screen on the HMI (see Figure 7-5 and Figure 7-6);
 Enter ‘Parameter Settings’ -> ‘Control’ -> ‘Start/Stop Control’ screen on the HMI (see Figure 7-37).
2. Multifunction terminal control (you are required to set the corresponding functions of X1 ~ X8)
 ‘The command is switched to terminals’ (No.27 function) is valid, the running command channel is the
multifunction terminal control mode;
 ‘Command source selecting terminal 1’ (No. 28 function), ‘Command source selecting terminal 2’ (No. 29
function) and ‘Command source selecting terminal 3’ (No. 30 function). See Table 7-5.
 Note
The running command channel setting is limited by the LOCAL-ROMOTE selecting switch on the control panel. That is, when
you modify running command channel no matter in which mode: HMI operation or multi-function terminal control, the mode
must match the LOCAL-ROMOTE selecting switch; otherwise, the modification is invalid.

6.3.2 Setting Reference Frequency
For accelerating and decelerating the target operation frequency, and related restricted parameters, their setting
includes the following points:
1. Main frequency setting source selection: five setting channels are available;
2. Digital frequency setting;
3. Main frequency setting control, it is saved or restored upon power failure or shutdown;
4. Setting of the upper and lower thresholds of frequency, and maximum output frequency;
5. Parameter setting of adjusting main frequency setting.
The following methods are available for modifying the related parameters:
 Enter ‘Parameter Settings’ -> ‘Quick Setup’ screen on the HMI (see Figure 7-5 and Figure 7-6);
 Enter ‘Parameter Settings’ -> ‘Reference’ -> ‘Frequency Reference’ screen on the HMI (see Figure 7-19).
6.3.3 Setting Running Control Parameters Of The Motor
According to the application field and the load condition, select and adjust the running control parameter of the motor
properly:
1. Select the motor control mode;
2. Type the basic parameters on the nameplate of the load motor (rated power, rated current and so on) correctly;
3. Set the motor parameters such as stator and rotor resistance, leakage inductance, mutual inductance and so on.
Two modes are available: manual typing or automatic calculation by the inverter according to the basic parameters on
the nameplate;
4. Switch between the preset two sets of motor parameters;
5. Set the V/F curve;
6. Set ‘Auto/Manual torque boost’;
7. Select AVR function;
8. Set the slip compensation parameters;
9. Select the energy-saving running function.
The above-mentioned parameters can be modified through the following method:
Enter the ‘Parameter Settings’ -> ‘Motor’ -> ‘Motor 1’/‘Motor 2’ screen on the HMI (see Figure 7-8, Figure 7-12 and
Figure 7-13).
6.3.4 Setting Frequency Hopping Parameters
In order to keep the output frequency of the inverter away from the resonance frequency point of the mechanical
loads, you can set the frequency hopping parameters:
1. Skip frequency, there are most three frequency hopping points can be set.
2. Skip frequency range, the upper and lower ranges of the frequency hopping points can be set.
Enter the ‘Parameter Settings’ -> ‘Reference’ -> ‘Frequency Reference’ screen on the HMI (see Figure 7-19).
6.3.5 Setting Jog Parameters
If jog operation is required, adjust the following parameters according to needs:

1. Jog operation frequency;
2. Jog acceleration time, jog deceleration time;
3. Jog interval time.
 Enter ‘Parameter Settings’ -> ‘Quick Setup’ screen on the HMI (see Figure 7-5 and Figure 7-6);
 Enter the ‘Parameter Settings’ -> ‘Reference’ -> ‘Frequency Reference’ screen on the HMI (see Figure 7-19);

 Enter the ‘Parameter Settings’ -> ‘Control’ -> ‘Start/Stop Control’ screen on the HMI (see Figure 7-37).
After the jog parameters are set, perform the jog operation following the related procedures in 6.1.2 Operation Of
The Inverter.
6.3.6 Setting Parameters Of User Input And Output Ports
Set the user analog/digital IO parameters according to needs:

1. User DI terminal: function selection, logic status, filter time and so on;
2. User DO terminal: function selection, output delay, enabled status and so on;
3. User AI terminal: function selection, gain, zero drift rectification, filter time and so on;
4. User AO terminal: function selection, gain, zero drift rectification, filter time and so on.
Enter the ‘Parameter Settings’ -> ‘I/O’ -> ‘Digital Input’ / ‘Digital Output’ / ‘Analog Input’ / ‘Analog Output’ screen on the
HMI (see Figure 7-69, Figure 7-70, Figure 7-74, Figure 7-75, Figure 7-80, Figure-81 and Figure 7-87).
 Note
After setting the I/O parameters, you must press the ‘Confirm’ button on the lower part of the corresponding screen, or else, the
set parameter values cannot take effect.
6.3.7 Setting Speed Regulation Parameters
Before startup, you are required to set the speed regulation parameters, to ensure that the accelerating or
decelerating process is stable, and to meet the corresponding technological requirements.
1. Select the acceleration / deceleration mode: Direct line acceleration / deceleration or S curve acceleration /
deceleration can be selected;
2. Set the acceleration time and deceleration time;
3. When ‘S curve acceleration / deceleration’ is selected, you are required to set the startup / end time percentages.
 Enter the ‘Parameter Settings’ -> ‘Control’ -> ‘Start/Stop Control’ screen on the HMI (see Figure 7-37);
 Enter ‘Parameter Settings’ -> ‘Quick Setup’ screen on the HMI (see Figure 7-5 and Figure 7-6).
6.3.8 Setting Startup Parameters
Before startup, please ensure that the frequency setting and speed regulation parameters are completed, and set the
following parameters properly according to needs:
1. Operation direction control: including operation direction selection, selection of run reverse prevention; If switch is
required between run forward and run reverse, you also need to set ‘Run forward / reverse dead time’;
2. Startup mode selection: three startup modes are available. If the motor does not stop stably upon startup, you
should select ‘Brake first and then start from startup frequency’ or ‘Start on the fly’ mode;
3. Set the startup frequency and startup frequency holding time;
4. Set the pre-excitation time before startup and acceleration reasonably;
5. If the startup mode is set to ‘Brake first and then start from startup frequency’, please set the parameters such as
‘Startup DC braking current’, ‘Startup DC braking time’, ‘Startup DC braking waiting time’ and so on.
Most startup parameters can be set only in shutdown status. Before startup, please set proper startup parameters
correctly. After the parameter setting is completed, you can perform the startup operation following the related
procedures in 6.1.2 Operation Of The Inverter.

6.3.9 Setting Stop Parameters
The parameters related to stop operation are as follows:

1. Select stop mode: four stop modes are available;
2. If the stop mode is selected as ‘Decelerate to stop’, set the parameters properly such as ‘Deceleration time’,
‘Stopping speed’, ‘Stopping speed detecting mode’ and so on according to your needs;
3. If the stop mode is selected as ‘Deceleration to stop + DC braking’, set the parameters correctly such as ‘Stopping
DC braking start frequency’, ‘Stopping DC braking waiting time’, ‘Stopping DC braking current’, ‘Stopping DC braking
time’ and so on;
4. If the stop mode is selected as ‘Deceleration to stop + excitation braking’, set the parameters correctly such as
‘Excitation braking start frequency’, ‘Excitation braking current’, ‘Excitation braking time’ and so on;
Most stop parameters can be set only in shutdown status. Before startup, please set proper stop parameters correctly.
You can perform the stop operation following the related procedures in 6.1.2 Operation Of The Inverter if needed.

82 Chapter 7 Descriptions On Functions And Setting
7.1.1 System Information

Rated capacity: 0 ~ 65535kVA【2400】
Chapter 7 Descriptions On (F00.01)
Rated voltage: 1.00 ~ 20.00kV【10.00】 (F00.02)
Rated current: 0 ~ 999.9A【140.0】 (F00.03)
Function And Setting
The above are the inverter parameters, and the factory
This chapter introduces specific descriptions on functions default is set by the factory.
and setting of the inverter, including system configuration,
parameter setting, operation monitoring and fault diagnosis. 7.1.2 Password Settings
 Note The menu is used to set the operation authority of each type
To describe the various functions of the inverter specifically, the of personnel.
various functions corresponding to the HMI menus are grouped In the ‘System Configuration’ screen, clicking the Password
and coded. The function codes are in one-to-one correspondence
Settings button enters the ‘Password Settings’ screen.
to the HMI menus. Refer to Appendix 1 Function Code List for
index of the function codes. The parameter password has three levels, among which,
level 1 password has the highest authority.
In this section, the property descriptions of the function  Level 1 password is the administrator password, and
parameters are shown in the following figure. used by the factory;
YYYYYYYY：N1~ N2 H 【D】 (FXX.XX)  Level 2 password is used by the user technical engineer;
Function code  Level 3 password is used by the user technician.
Factory default
The user of high authority can reset the lower level
Setting value format:
H: hexadecimal
password; while the user of low authority cannot see or
None: decimal reset the higher level password.
Parameter range Taking resetting the password of user technicians as an
Parameter name example, click the input box behind Technician to enter
Taking ‘Rated capacity’ as an example, the illustration is the ‘Password Settings’ screen, as shown in Figure 7-2.
shown as follows:
Rated capacity: 0 ~ 65535kVA【2400】 (F00.01)

Function code
Factory default
Parameter range
Parameter name
7.1 System Configuration

Enter ‘System Configuration’ screen, as shown in
Figure 7-1.
Figure 7-2 ‘Password Settings’ screen
In the screen, retype eight digits on the right digit keyboard,

and click ENT to reset your password. You cannot see level
1 and 2 passwords here, because the user technician has
the lowest authority.
7.1.3 Parameter Initialization
In the ‘System Configuration’ screen, clicking the

Parameter Initialization button enters the ‘Parameter
Initialization’ screen, as shown in Figure 7-3.
Figure 7-1 ‘System Configuration’ screen

Chapter 7 Descriptions On Functions And Setting 83
7.1.6 Logout
In the ‘System Configuration’ screen, clicking the Logout

button enters the startup screen. You need to re-enter the
right password to enter the system again.
7.1.7 Control Buttons
On any screen, clicking the Control Buttons button enters

the system control screen.
7.2 Parameter Setting

Figure 7-3 ‘Parameter Initialization’ screen
Parameter initialization: 0 ~ 2【0】 (F00.00)

7.2.1 Quick Setup
0: No action
1: Reset to Factory Default
Restore factory setting of all parameters except for factory
parameters.
2: Reset to Factory Default except Motor Parameter
Restore factory setting of all parameters except for factory
and motor parameters.
7.1.4 System time
In the ‘System Configuration’ screen, click the System time

button, and enter the correct password, after that, you can
Figure 7-5 Quick setup 1
set the system time and date by pressing ‘+/-’ buttons for
adjustment. The system time is only used for displaying time
and recording faults and events.
 Note
The system time setting is not open to the user.
7.1.5 Language Settings
In the ‘System Configuration’ screen, clicking the Language

Settings button enters the ‘Language Settings’ screen, as
shown in Figure 7-4. Chinese and English are selectable.
Figure 7-6 Quick setup 2
For ease of use, the screen centralizes the uppermost

group of parameters upon normal operation of the inverter.
Refer to the specific introduction in 7.2.2 Motor and
7.2.3 Reference for detailed descriptions on parameter
setting.
Figure 7-4 ‘Language Settings’ screen

7.2.2 Motor The parameters of Motor 1 and Motor 2 are corresponding

to the function code F05 group and F06 group respectively.
The preset two sets of motor parameters can be switched
through this setting.
Auto Energy-saving Running: 0 ~ 1【0】 (F04.01)
0: No action
2: Action, used in the situation that the load is light and the
output voltage is automatically reduced, to achieve
energy-saving effect. It is available only in V/F operation
mode.
Clicking the Motor 1 button enters the setting screen of
‘Motor 1 Settings’ (as shown in Figure 7-8, Figure 7-12 and
Figure 7-7 Motor control parameter Figure 7-13). The setting method of ‘Motor 2 Settings’ is the
Motor Control Mode Selection: 0 ~ 2 same, and elided in the following.
(F04.00, unit’s place)
【0】
0: FOC Control without PG

That is, vector control operation mode without speed sensor,
used in the occasion having a high performance
variable-speed drive.
1: FOC Control with PG
That is, vector control operation mode with a speed sensor,
mainly used in the application occasion which has strict
requirement on control performance for high-precision
speed control.
2: V/F control without PG Figure 7-8 Setting screen 1 of ‘Motor 1 Settings’
Controlling the voltage/frequency ratio constantly with Set V/F Curve: 0 ~ 3【0】 (F05.00)
complete variable speed, especially applicable to the
occasion where an inverter drives several motors, to 0: Self Defined
improve the current speed-regulating system. 1: 2-order curve
 Note 2: 1.7-order curve

PG means photoelectric velocity measuring pulse encoder. 3: 1.2-order curve
You are recommended to use a coaxial rotation speed position Various V/F curves can be set to satisfy different
transmitter isolated from the motor shaft. The cable connection of requirements of load characteristics. According to the
the rotation speed position transmitter uses multi-core shielded
definition of F05.00, three fixed curves and a self-defined
cables, and one end of the shielded wire is to be grounded on the
control cabinet. curve are available for selection.
1. When the vector control mode is selected, please set the motor The 2-order falling torque characteristic is shown in curve 1
parameters correctly. in Figure 7-9.
2. When the vector control mode is selected, please set the The 1.7-order falling torque characteristic is shown in curve
parameters of the rotation speed regulator correctly, to ensure
good control performance in steady state and dynamic state. For 2 in Figure 7-9.
the parameter setting and regulation of the rotation speed regulator, The 1.2-order falling torque characteristic is shown in curve
please refer to the related usage description of F05/F06 parameter 3 in Figure 7-9.
group.
3. When ‘FOC Control with PG’ is selected, you must set the PG The above curves are applicable to variable-torque loads
encoder parameters (F07 group) correctly. such as fans and pumps. You can adjust the curve setting
4. When ‘V/F control’ is selected, you must set the dedicated according to the load characteristics to achieve the optimal
function parameters of V/F control correctly. energy-saving effect.
Motor Selection: 0 ~ 1【0】 (F04.00, ten’s place)
0: Motor 1
1: Motor 2

Output
Voltage%
voltage V
Vmax 100%
V3
V2
1
2
3
0 V1
Frequency Hz
F1 F2 F3 Fb
0 Fb Output V1 ~ V3: multi-section VF No.1 ~ No. 3 section
Vmax：Max. output voltage frequency Hz voltage percentage
Fb：basic operating frequency F1 ~ F3: multi-section VF No.1 ~ No. 3 section
frequency point
Figure 7-9 Falling torque curves
Fb: basic operating frequency of Motor 1
When Set V/F Curve (F05.00) is set to ‘0’, you can Figure 7-10 Common format of self-defined V/F curve
self-define the V/F curve via the following six parameters, as
Auto Torque Boost: 0 ~ 1【0】 (F05.07)
shown in Figure 7-10. Define the V/F curve by the method
of adding three points (V1, F1), (V2, F2), (V3, F3) to form a
0: No action
polygonal line, to satisfy special load characteristics.
1: Auto torque boost
The self-defined V/F curve is a straight line by default, as
To compensate the low-frequency torque characteristic, you
shown in curve 0 in Figure 7-9.
can boost the output voltage for compensation. Auto and
V/F Frequency 3: F05.03 ~ F05.10【0】 (F05.01)
manual modes are available for the torque boost:
V/F Voltage 3: F05.04 ~ 100%【0】 (F05.02)
Auto: The inverter confirms the output voltage, boosting
Take the max. output voltage as 100%, the same as the range and boosting cut-off frequency point automatically.
following. Manual: You can adjust F05.08 and F05.09 according to
V/F Frequency 2: F05.05 ~ F05.01【0】 (F05.03) your need.
V/F Voltage 2: F05.06 ~ F05.02【0】 (F05.04) Manual Torque Boost: 0.0 ~ 30.0%【0】 (F05.08)
V/F Frequency 1: 0 ~ F05.03【0】 (F05.05)
V/F Voltage 1: 0 ~ F05.04【0】 (F05.06) This parameter is with respect to Max Output Voltage
(F05.11). When it is set to ‘0’, Auto Torque Boost is
disabled; when it is set to others except ‘0’, Auto Torque
 Note
Boost is enabled, as shown in Vb in Figure 7-11. (Note: if
1. Only when Set V/F Curve (F05.00) is set to ‘0’, can the setting
the parameter is improperly set, the inverter may have an
of F05.01 ~ F05.06 be valid.
overload/over current fault.
2. The three setting points V1, V2, V3 of frequency in Figure 7-10
are in increasing order, and are all lower than the basic operating Output voltage
frequency (F05.10). You should set V/F Frequency 3 and V/F
Voltage 3 first, and set V/F Frequency 1 and V/F Voltage 1 at V max
last.
3. When the three setting points are above the basic operating
frequency, the output voltage and frequency will not change with
the V/F curve, and the inverter will enter flux weakening control.
Vb
fz f b Output
frequency
Vb: manual torque boost voltage
Vmax: Max. output voltage
fz: cut-off frequency of torque boost
fb: basic operating frequency
Figure 7-11 Torque boost
Torque Boost Cut-Off Point: 0.0 ~ 50.0%【0】 (F05.09)
This function defines the percentage of the cut-off frequency

of manual torque boost in the basic operating frequency

(F05.10), as shown in Figure 7-11 (fz). The cut-off frequency

is applicable to any V/F curve confirmed by F05.00.
Basic Operating Frequency: 1.00 ~ 120.00Hz
(F05.10)
【50.00】
The basic operating frequency is the min. frequency

corresponding to the highest voltage outputted by the
inverter, generally, it is the rated frequency of the motor, as
shown in Figure 7-11 (fb).
Max Output Voltage: 0.00 ~ 10.00kV【10.00】 (F05.11)
The max output voltage Vmax corresponds to the rated Figure 7-12 Setting screen 2 of ‘Motor 1 Settings’
voltage of the motor.
AVR Function: 0 ~ 2【1】 (F05.12)
0: No action
1: Action at all times
2: No action upon decelerating
AVR means auto voltage regulation.
When the input voltage differs from the rated value, you can
use this function to keep constant output voltage. Therefore,
AVR should take action generally, especially when the input
voltage is higher than the rated value.
Upon ‘Decelerate to stop’ situation, if AVR is set to ‘No Figure 7-13 Setting screen 3 of ‘Motor 1 Settings’
action’, the decelerating time is short, but the operating Figure 7-12 shows the screen of inputting motor parameters,
current is comparatively large; if AVR is set to ‘Action at all which are divided into ‘Basic Parameter’ and ‘Non Basic
times’, the motor decelerates stably, and the operating Parameter’. To ensure the control precision of motor
current is comparatively small, but the decelerating time operation, you must set the motor parameters correctly.
becomes longer.
For ‘Basic Parameter’, generally, you can input the following
Slip Compensation Gain: 0 ~ 300.0%【100.0】 (F05.13)
information according to the motor nameplate.
Motor Rated Power: 0 ~ 2400.0kW【1000.0】 (F05.16)
To improve the control precision of rotation speed, you can
Motor Rated Voltage: 1.00 ~ 10.00kV【10.00】 (F05.17)
adjust the slip compensation ratio coefficient.
Motor Rated Current: 0.0 ~ 1000.0A【72.0】 (F05.18)
The setting of Slip Compensation Gain is a percentage of
Motor Rated Frequency: 0.00 ~ 120.00Hz
motor rated slip. (F05.19)
【50.00】
Slip Compensation Limit: 0 ~ 250.0%【200.0】 (F05.14) Motor Rated Rotating Speed: 0 ~ 7200rpm
(F05.20)
【745】
Slip compensation limit amplitude. Motor PF: 0.001 ~ 1.000【0.830】 (F05.21)
F05.13 and F05.14 are both in respect to rated slip.
Compensation Time Constant: 0.1 ~ 25.0s【10.0】 (F05.15)  Note
The power grades of the asynchronized motor and the inverter
Slip compensation filter time constant. must be matched.
For ‘Non Basic Parameter’, input the following information:

Stator Resistance %R1: 0.00 ~ 50.00【0.92】 (F05.22)
Leakage Inductance %X: 0.00 ~ 100.00%【8.85】 (F05.23)
Rotator Resistance %R2: 0.00 ~ 50.00%【0.75】 (F05.24)
Mutual Inductance %Xm: 0.0 ~ 2000.0%【194.5】 (F05.25)
Zero Load Current Io: 0.0 ~ 140.0A【30.0】 (F05.26)
The specific definition of the above motor parameters is


jX1 1 R2 jX 21 ASR1-D: 0 ~ 65535【0】 (F05.31)

R1
ASR1 Output Filter: 0 ~ 8【0】 (F05.32)
I1 I2 ASR2-P: 0 ~ 65535【1000】 (F05.33)
1- S R ASR2-I: 0 ~ 65535【10】 (F05.34)
U1 2
S ASR2-D: 0 ~ 65535【0】 (F05.35)
I0 Xm ASR2 Output Filter: 0 ~ 8【0】 (F05.36)
ASR1/2 Switching Frequency: 0.00 ~ 120.00Hz
(F05.37)
【50.00】
Figure 7-14 Asynchronized motor steady state equivalent circuit
diagram The parameters of F05.29 ~ F05.37 are valid in vector
control mode.
R1, X11, R2, X21, Xm and Io in Figure 7-14 represent stator
resistance, stator leakage inductance, rotor resistance, rotor In vector control mode, through setting ‘Proportional Gain P’
leakage inductance, mutual inductance and zero load and ‘Integration Time I’, you can change the speed
current respectively. The function code F05.23 is the sum of response characteristic of vector control.
stator and rotor leakage inductance. 1. Adjustment of ‘Proportional Gain P’ and ‘Integration Time
F05.22 ~ F05.26 above are all percentages of the above I’ of the speed regulator (ASR).
asynchronized motor parameters. The calculating formulas Proportional

Instruction gain P is large
are as follows:
speed
1) Calculating formula of resistance (stator resistance or
Proportional
rotor resistance): gain P is small
R
%R = × 100 %
V /( 3 × I)
R: stator resistance, or the actual value of rotor resistance (a)

that is converted into the stator side;
V: rated voltage; Instruction Integration time is little.
I: rated current of the asynchronized motor speed
2) Calculating formula of inductance (leakage inductance or

Integration time is much.
mutual inductance):
X
%X =  100 %
V /( 3 I)
(b)
X: the sum of stator and rotor leakage inductances
(converted into the stator side) relative to the basic Figure 7-15 Relation between step response and PI parameters of
frequency, or the mutual inductance; the speed regulator (ASR)
V: rated voltage Increasing ‘Proportional Gain P’ quickens the dynamic

response of the system; however, if P is too large, surge will
I: rated current of the asynchronized motor
occur to the system easily.
 Note Decreasing ‘Integration Time I’ quickens the dynamic
1. You should type the ‘Basic Parameter’ of the motor by yourself. response of the system; however, if I is too little, the system
2. If you have known the exact value of ‘Non Basic Parameter’ of overshoot will be large and surge will occur to the system
the motor, you can type the values of F05.22 ~ F05.25 directly easily.
after calculating according to the above formulas.
Generally, first adjust ‘Proportional Gain P’: increase P on
3. After ‘Basic Parameter’ is typed and the input high voltage is
powered on, you can operate the Motor Parameter Calculation the condition that no surge occurs to the system; and then
button, and the inverter will calculate the values of ‘Non Basic adjust ‘Integration Time I’ to make the system have quick
Parameter’ (excluding ‘Zero Load Current’) automatically response and little overshoot.
according to the values of ‘Basic Parameter’ and the motor circuit
model. Figure 7-16 is the speed step response curve with
4. F05.26 is the zero load current of the asynchronized motor, well-selected P and I (the speed response curve can be
which can be directly typed. observed through analog output terminals, please refer to
F28 parameter group).
ASR1-P: 0 ~ 65535【1000】 (F05.29)
ASR1-I: 0 ~ 65535【20】 (F05.30)

Pulse Number Per Revolution of PG: 1 ~

Instruction (F07.00)
speed 10000【1024】
Set the value according to the pulse number per revolution

(PPR) of the selected pulse encoder (PG).
PG Rotating Direction: 0 ~ 1【0】 (F07.01)
Figure 7-16 Step response of good dynamic performance 0: A is leading B.
2. Adjustment of PI parameters in high/low speed operating 1: B is leading A.

occasion of the speed regulator (ASR) When the motor runs forward, A is leading B; When the
If the system has requirements of quick response on motor runs reversely, B is leading A. If the direction
high/low speed operation with loads, you can set ASR represented by the connection sequence of the inverter
Switching Frequency (F05.37). Generally, when the interface board and PG matches that of the inverter and the
system is operating at low frequency, if you want to increase motor, set the value to ‘0’ (forward), or else, set it to ‘1’
the dynamic response characteristic, you can increase (reverse).
‘Proportional Gain P’ and decrease ‘Integration Time I’ Changing the parameter adjusts the corresponding relation
relatively. ASR1 and ASR2 are the speed regulators of lower of the connection direction easily, with no need to
speed section and high speed section respectively. re-connect the cables.
3. The output of the speed regulator (ASR) passes through Set it according to pulse number per rotation (PPR) of the
the filter of first-order time lag to obtain the reference torque selected pulse encoder (PG).
current. F05.32 and F05.36 are the time constants of ASR1 PG Signal Filtering Times: 0 ~ 99【0】 (F07.02)
and ASR2 output filters respectively.
The values of 0 ~ 8 correspond to the filter time of 0 ~ The parameter is for factory debug.
28/10ms respectively.
 Note
ACR-P: 0 ~ 65535【750】 (F05.38)
Upon operation with speed sensor, you must set the parameters of
ACR-I: 0 ~ 65535【750】 (F05.39) F07.00 and F07.01 correctly. Or else, the motor cannot operate
normally.
F05.38 and F05.39 are the PI regulator parameters of
current loop. Increasing current loop Kp or decreasing I
quickens the dynamic response of the system torque; 7.2.3 Reference
Decreasing Kp or increasing I strengthens the stability of the
system.
 Note
In most occasions, there is no need of adjusting the PI parameters
of current loop. It is recommended to change this group of
parameters with caution.
Clicking the Encoder button on the ‘Motor’ screen shown in

Figure 7-7 enters the ‘Encoder Parameter Settings’ screen,
as shown in Figure 7-17.
Figure 7-18 ‘Reference’ screen
Figure 7-17 ‘Encoder Parameter Settings’ screen

2: Input via COM1 (Factory Debug)

3: Input via COM2
When ‘2’ or ‘3’ is selected, the frequency setting is changed
by the frequency setting command respectively sent by the
two serial ports configured in the inverter.
4: Analog input via terminal
Four inter-independent physical channels are available for
analog input: AI1, AI2, AI3 and AI4. AI1 ~ AI3 is 4mA ~ 20mA
current input signal, AI4 is -10V ~ +10V voltage input signal.
For AI4 voltage input signal, the following provisions are
given:
Figure 7-19 ‘Frequency Parameter Settings’ screen
0V ~ +10V: run forward; -10V ~ 0V: run reverse.
The ‘Reference’ screen shown in Figure 7-18 lists the
For the AI channel that is set as ‘Main frequency setting’,
access buttons for parameter setting screens related to
you are required to set the following parameters
frequency setting.
beforehand.
Clicking the Frequency Reference button enters the
1) Select AI channel function to No.1 function, that is ‘Main
‘Frequency Parameter Settings’ screen (see Figure 7-19).
frequency setting’, and configure the parameters of gain,
Set Main Frequency Source: 0 ~ 5【0】 (F08.00)
filter and zero drift reasonably. Refer to ‘Analog input
parameter setting’ for details (see Figure 7-80).
0: Touch-screen
2) Set the AI input curve relation according to needs. Refer
Upon power-on of the inverter, consider the value of Set
to ‘AI input curve parameter setting’ for details (see
Main Frequency (F08.01) as the current frequency setting
Figure 7-25).
of the inverter directly.
5: Internal preset input
In operating or stopping status of the inverter, operate the
Acceleration and Deceleration buttons on the ‘Operating This is the factory internally-preset frequency (50Hz).
Monitoring’ -> ‘Command monitoring’ screen on the Set Main Frequency: 0.00 ~ 120.00Hz【50.00】 (F08.01)
operation panel to adjust the current frequency setting in
real time. When the main frequency setting channel F08.00 is defined
as 0, 1, 2 or 3, this function parameter is the initial
1: UP/DOWN terminal
frequency setting of the inverter’s main frequency setting.
In the mode, upon power-on of the inverter, set the value of
Main Digital Frequency Control: 00 ~ 11H【0】 (F08.02)
Set Main Frequency (F08.01) as the current frequency
setting of the inverter directly. Through the function of
Only when F08.00 is 0, 1, 2 or 3, the setting is valid.
setting external control terminals, adjust the current
frequency setting of the inverter in operating or stopping Ten's place Unit's place
status of the inverter. 0: Setting of 'storing frequency
When selecting this setting mode, you are required to set upon power failure'
1: Setting of 'non-storing
the following parameters beforehand. frequency upon power failure'
1) Select the functions of two multifunction terminals among
0: Keep frequency upon stopping
X1 ~ X8 to ‘13’ and ‘14’, that is, ‘Frequency up command 1: Restore frequency to F08.01
(UP)’ and ‘Frequency down command (DOWN)’; upon stopping
2) Set Terminal UP acceleration rate (F18.09) and Figure 7-20 Setting of digital frequency control
Terminal Down deceleration rate (F18.10). For the
settings of the above two parameters, refer to ‘Digital value Unit’s place:
input parameter setting’ for details (see Figure 7-70). 0: Setting of ‘storing frequency upon power failure’
Table 7-1 External switch states and the inverter’s current When the inverter encounters a power failure and is
frequency setting powered on again, F08.01 will be automatically refreshed
according to the actual frequency (after adjustment) upon
Open/close state of
Open Close last power failure.
UP terminal
Open/close state of 1: Setting of ‘non-storing frequency upon power failure’
Open Close Open Close
DOWN terminal
When the inverter encounters a power failure and is
Inverter’s current
Keeped Decreased Increased Keeped powered on again, F08.01 keeps constant.
frequency setting
Ten’s place:

0: Setting of ‘keeping frequency upon stopping’

 Note
Upon stopping of the inverter, the frequency setting is the 1. Max output frequency, high frequency limit and low frequency
final modified value (after adjustment). limit must be set with caution according to the actual nameplate
1: Setting of ‘restoring frequency to F08.01 upon stopping’ parameters and operating condition requirements of the controlled
motor.
Upon stopping of the inverter, the frequency setting is
2. The limit range of upper frequency limit and lower frequency
automatically restored to F08.01. limit is invalid for jog operation.
Frequency Setting Ratio Selection: 0 ~ 2【0】 (F08.08) 3. Besides the limits of upper frequency limit and lower frequency
Ratio Adjustment Coefficient: 0.0 ~ 200.0%【100.0】 (F08.09) limit, the output frequency during operation of the inverter is also
limited by the startup frequency, stopping DC braking start
frequency, skip frequency and other parameter setting.
This function confirms the adjustment mode for setting
frequency. 4. The relation of max output frequency, upper frequency limit
and lower frequency limit is shown in Figure 7-21. Note the size
Set the frequency setting before and after adjustment to f3 order during setting.
and f4. The function of F08.08 has the following selections: 5. Upper frequency limit and lower frequency limit are used to
0: No effect limit the frequency value actually outputted to the motor. If the
frequency setting is higher than the upper frequency limit or lower
Not to adjust the frequency setting, that is, f4 = f3 than the lower frequency limit, the inverter will operate at the
frequency set correctly last time.
1: Adjust relative to Max Output Frequency (F08.10)
Frequency setting f4 = f3 + F08.10 × (F08.09 - 100%) Jog Operation Frequency: 0.10 ~ 30.00Hz【5.00】 (F08.13)
2: Adjust relative to current output frequency
Frequency setting f3 = f3 + f3 × (F08.09 - 100%) = f3 × It is the frequency setting during jog operation.
F08.09 Frequency Avoid Accel Time: 0.10 ~ 30.00Hz
(F08.13)
Max Output Frequency: MAX{50.00, F08.11} ~ 【5.00】
(F08.10)
120.00Hz【50.00】
Upper Frequency Limit: F08.12 ~ F08.10【50.00】 (F08.11)
Used to set the time of traversing Skip Bandwidth.
Lower Frequency Limit: 0.00 ~ F08.11【0.00】 (F08.12) Skip Center Frequency 1: 1.00 ~ 120.00Hz【1.00】 (F08.14)
Skip Bandwidth: 0.00 ~ 20.00Hz【0】 (F08.15)
The max output frequency is the highest output frequency Skip Center Frequency 2: 1.00 ~ 120.00Hz【1.00】 (F08.16)
allowed by the inverter. It is shown as Fmax in Figure 7-21. Skip Bandwidth: 0.00 ~ 20.00Hz【0】 (F08.17)
The upper frequency limit is the allowed highest operating Skip Center Frequency 3: 1.00 ~ 120.00Hz【1.00】 (F08.18)
frequency set by the user. It is shown as FH in Figure 7-21. Skip Bandwidth: 0.00 ~ 20.00Hz【0】 (F08.19)
The lower frequency limit is the allowed lowest operating

The function of F08.14 ~ F08.19 is set for that the output
frequency set by the user. It is shown as FL in Figure 7-21.
frequency of the inverter can evade the resonance
Fb in Figure 7-21 is the basic operating frequency, defined frequency point of the mechanical loads.
as the minimum value of the output frequency when the
The frequency setting of the inverter can skip in adjacent to
inverter outputs the highest voltage in V/F mode.
some frequency points according to the mode shown in
Output Figure 7-22. At most three skip ranges can be defined. The
voltage
skip range is the sum of upper and lower fluctuation ranges
Vmax of the center frequency (skip frequency).
Frequency
setting after
adjustment
Skip
Skip range 3
Output frequency 3
frequency
Skip
FL FH F b Fmax Skip range 2
frequency 2
Figure 7-21 Schematic diagram of frequency limit parameter
Skip
definition Skip range 1
frequency 1
Frequency setting
Figure 7-22 Schematic diagram of skip frequency and ranges
After the skip frequency parameters are set, even if the

frequency setting of the inverter is within the mechanical
resonance frequency band of the drive system, the output

frequency of the inverter will be automatically adjusted to Multi Frequency 7: F08.12 ~ F08.11【50.00】 (F10.06)
the outside of the mechanical resonance band, to avoid that Multi Frequency 8: F08.12 ~ F08.11【5.00】 (F10.07)
the inverter operates at resonance frequency. Multi Frequency 9: F08.12 ~ F08.11【10.00】 (F10.08)
Multi Frequency 10: F08.12 ~ F08.11【20.00】 (F10.09)
 Note
When using the skip function, please set the related parameters of
auto current limiting (F12.37 ~ F12.40) reasonably, to avoid an Multi Frequency 12: F08.12 ~ F08.11【40.00】 (F10.11)
output overcurrent fault. Multi Frequency 13: F08.12 ~ F08.11【45.00】 (F10.12)
Zero Speed Running Threshold: 0.00 ~ 20.00Hz Multi Frequency 15: F08.12 ~ F08.11【50.00】 (F10.14)
(F08.20)
【0】
Zero Speed Hysteresis: 0.00 ~ 20.00Hz【0】 (F08.21) These frequencies will be used in multi speed operation
mode and simplified PLC function operation mode. Please
When the operating frequency and frequency setting of the refer to the specific descriptions of multi-section speed
inverter are both less than the Zero Speed Running operation terminal function ‘1’, ‘2’, ‘3’, ‘4’ and simplified PLC
Threshold, the inverter will enter the zero frequency function (F11 group, see Figure 7-28) on the ‘Digital value
operating state and stop output with corresponding input parameter setting’ screen (see Figure 7-70).
indication. When the frequency setting is higher than or
equal to zero frequency operating threshold + zero
frequency hysteresis, the inverter will exit zero frequency
operating state and restore operating in ‘Start on the fly’
mode, as shown in Figure 7-23.
Figure 7-25 AI input curve parameter setting
Clicking the AI Input Curve Reference button shown in

Figure 7-18 enters the ‘AI input curve parameter setting’
Figure 7-23 Time sequence diagram of zero frequency screen, as shown in Figure 7-25.
Curve Selection: 0000 ~ 1111H【0000】 (F09.00)
Thousand's Hundred's Ten's Unit's

place place place place
AI1 curve selection
0: Curve 1
1: Curve 2
AI2 curve selection

0: Curve 1
1: Curve 2
AI3 curve selection

0: Curve 1
1: Curve 2
Figure 7-24 ‘Multi Frequency Parameter Settings’ screen
AI4 curve selection
Clicking the Multi Frequency Reference button shown in 0: Curve 1
1: Curve 2
Figure 7-18 enters the ‘Multi Frequency Parameter Settings’
screen, as shown in Figure 7-24. Figure 7-26 Frequency input curve selection
Multi Frequency 1: F08.12 ~ F08.11【5.00】 (F10.00) The analog input AI1 ~ AI4 can be used as different channel
Multi Frequency 2: F08.12 ~ F08.11【10.00】 (F10.01) input. For the function selection of analog input channel,
Multi Frequency 3: F08.12 ~ F08.11【20.00】 (F10.02) refer to ‘Analog input parameter setting’ (see Figure 7-80).
Multi Frequency 4: F08.12 ~ F08.11【30.00】 (F10.03) You can set the curve transformation relation between the
Multi Frequency 5: F08.12 ~ F08.11【40.00】 (F10.04) analog input signal, which is handled through filter, gain and
Multi frequency 6: F08.12 ~ F08.11【45.00】 (F10.05) zero drift, and actual input physical quantity. You can preset

two different curves: curve 1 is defined by F09.01 ~ F09.08;

Corresponding input value
curve 2 is defined by F09.09 ~ F09.16. The two curves can
both realize positive and negative effect characteristics F09.04
independently, and two turning points can be set for either

of them. Take curve 1 as an example to describe AI curve F09.06
setting, as shown in Figure 7-27.
F09.08
Curve 1 Min Input: 0.0% ~ F09.07【0】 (F09.01)
F09.02 Input
Actual Value Corresponded to Curve 1 Min Input: value
(F09.02)
0.0 ~ 100.0%【0】 F09.01 F09.07 F09.05 F09.03
Curve 1 Max Input: F09.05 ~ 100.0%【100.0】 (F09.03)
Actual Value Corresponded to Curve 1 Max Input:
(F09.04)
0.0 ~ 100.0%【100.0】
Curve 1 Turning Point 2 Input: F09.07 ~ F09.03
(F09.05)
【100.0】
Curve 1 Turning Point 2 Input Value: 0.0 ~ 100.0%
(F09.06)
【100.0】
Curve 1 Turning Point 1 Input: F09.01 ~ F09.05【0】 (F09.07)
Figure 7-27 Schematic diagram of AI curve setting
Curve 1 Turning Point 1 Input Value: 0.0 ~ 100.0%
(F09.08)
【0】 Clicking the Simplified PLC Function Ref button shown in
Figure 7-18 enters the ‘Simplified PLC function parameter
As for curve 1, F09.01, F09.03, F09.05, F09.07 are input setting’ screen, as shown in Figure 7-28.
analog signals, taking the analog channel full range input as
100% (Upon voltage input, it corresponds to +10V or -10V;
upon current input, it corresponds to 20mA.)
F09.02, F09.04, F09.06, F09.08 are the actual physical
quantity input corresponding to the above analog signals.
For frequency input value, its basic value is Max Output
Frequency (F08.10); for torque input value, its basic value
is rated torque.
 Note
1. If you make the turning point 2 input setting in the curve the
same as the max. input (F09.05 = F09.03), it will be internally
imperative that F09.06 be equal to F09.04, that is, turning point 2 Figure 7-28 Simplified PLC function parameter setting
setting is invalid. If turning point 2 input is the same as turning
point 1 input (F09.05 = F09.07), it will be internally imperative Running Mode Selection: 0000 ~ 1123H【0000】 (F11.00)
that F09.08 be equal to F09.06, that is, turning point 1 setting is
invalid. If turning point 1 input is the same as the min. input
Thousand's
Unit's place
Ten's place
Hundred's
(F09.07 = F09.01), it will be internally imperative that F09.02 be Running mode selection of
place
place
equal to F09.08, that is, the min. input setting is invalid. simplified PLC
0: No action
2. F09.01 ~ F09.08 only set the section for which the input voltage 1: Stop after single circulation
is larger than 0. When the AI channel is voltage input (range: -10V 2: Keep final value after single
~ +10V), the curve section for which the input is smaller than 0 is circulation
centrosymmetric with that for which the input is larger than 0 3: Continuous circulation
about the origin. Restart mode selection upon PLC
3. Curve 2 parameter setting can be done in the same way. stopping running
0: Start running from phase 1
1: Continue running at the phase
frequency upon stopping (or fault)
2: Continue running at the running
State parameter storage selection
upon power failure
0: No storage
1: Store phase and frequency of
the moment of power failure
Unit selection of phase time
0: s
1: m
Figure 7-29 Running mode selection of simplified PLC function

Unit’s place: running mode selection of simplified PLC 1: Continue running at the phase frequency upon stopping
0: No action (or fault)
The running mode of simple PLC function is invalid. The inverter stops during operation (caused by a stop
command or a fault), if so, it will record the running time of
1: Stop after single circulation
current phase automatically. After restart-up, the inverter
As shown in Figure 7-30, the inverter stops automatically enters the phase automatically and continues operation of
after completing a circulation, and needs a running rest time at the frequency defined in the phase, as shown in
command for startup. Figure 7-33.
f 14
f3 Stop signal
a14 a15
a3
d4 Output
f2 f4 f 13 f 15 frequency Hz f1
f 1 a2 a1 d2
PLC d5 a13
operationa 1
d15
... f3 ...
d13 f2 a3
a5 f5
a2
Phase 1 Rest time of phase 2 time t
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 ~ T12 T13 T14 T15 Running time

of phase 2
a1: accelerating time in phase 1 a2: accelerating time in phase 2
RUN a3: accelerating time in phase 3 d2: decelerating time in phase 2
command f1: phase 1 frequency f2: phase 2 frequency
f3: phase 3 frequency
Figure 7-30 ‘Stop after single circulation’ mode of simplified PLC
Figure 7-33 Startup mode 1 of simplified PLC
2: Keep final value after single circulation
2: Continue running at the running frequency upon stopping
As shown in Figure 7-31, the inverter keeps the running
(or fault)
frequency and direction of last phase automatically after
completing a circulation. The inverter stops during operation (caused by a stop
f 14
command or a fault), if so, it will not only record the running
f3
d4
a 14 d 15 time of current phase, but also record the running frequency
a3 f 15
f2
PLC f1 a2
f4
f5
f 13
of the stop moment automatically. After restart-up, the
d5 a 13
operation a 1 inverter first recovers the running frequency of the stop
a5 d 13
moment, and then continues operation of rest phase, as

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 ~ T12 T13 T14 T15
Stop signal
RUN Output
command frequency Hz f1
a1 d2
Figure 7-31 ‘Keep final value after single circulation’ mode of ...
a2 d2 a 3 f3 ...
simplified PLC f2
3: Continuous circulation
Phase 1 time t
Rest time of phase 2
As shown in Figure 7-32, the inverter starts next circulation Running time
automatically after completing a circulation till receiving a of phase 2
a1: accelerating time in phase 1 a2: accelerating time in phase 2
stop command. a3: accelerating time in phase 3 d2: decelerating time in phase 2
f1: phase 1 frequency f2: phase 2 frequency
f3: phase 3 frequency
f 15 f 15
f2 f2
Figure 7-34 Startup mode 2 of simplified PLC
f14 f 14
f1 f1 f1
a1
 Note
f3 f3 The difference between mode 1 and 2 is that: mode 2 records the
running frequency of the stop moment, and the inverter continues
operation at this frequency after restart-up, but mode 1 does not.
First circulation Second circulation
RUN
command
Hundred’s place: State parameter storage selection upon
power failure
Figure 7-32 ‘Continuous circulation’ mode of simplified PLC
0: No storage
Ten’s place: restart mode selection upon PLC stopping
Upon a power failure, the inverter will not record the
running
operation state. After power-on and restart-up, the inverter
0: Start running from phase 1 will start operation from phase 1.
The inverter stops during operation (caused by a stop 1: Store phase and frequency of the moment of power
command, a fault or a power failure). After restart-up, it will failure
operate from phase 1.

Upon a power failure, the inverter will record the operation The simplified PLC function can realize closed loop
state, including phase, running frequency and running time operation in certain phase. The closed loop input channel
of the moment of power failure. After power-on, the inverter can be multi-section closed loop input i or decided by
will operate according to the restart mode upon PLC function code F17.01; the feedback channel is confirmed by
stopping running defined by ten’s place. Feedback channel selection (F17.02). When the input
Thousand’s place: unit selection of phase time channel is decided by the function code F17.01, you can
switch the closed loop input channel to multi-section closed
0: s
loop input value through the multi-section closed loop input
The running time of each phase is timed by seconds. selecting terminals. Refer to the descriptions of ‘Digital
1: m value input parameter setting’ (see Figure 7-70) and
The running time of each phase is timed by minutes. Multi-section closed loop input i (F17.19 ~ F17.33) for
details.
The unit is valid only for the phase time T1 ~ T15 of
simplified PLC function operation. Ten’s place: running direction selection
0: Run forward
 Note
It is mandatory that the running direction of the phase is ‘run
1. When a certain period of running time of the simplified PLC
function is set to 0, the period is invalid. forward’, not affected by the running command.
2. Through terminals, you can perform controls on the simplified 1: Run reverse
PLC function process, such as pause, invalidation, clearing
It is mandatory that the running direction of the phase is ‘run
records and so on.
reverse’, not affected by the running command.
In the speed operation mode of simplified PLC function, you 2: Confirmed by running command
can set at most 15 running phases, and the frequency Step 1 Running Time: 0 ~ 6500.0【20】
setting and running time of each phase can be respectively
set through two function parameters. The following takes Step 1 running time includes the time of accelerating or
phase i parameters as an example (i = 1 ~ 15). decelerating from last-phase frequency to this-phase
Step 1 Configuration: 00 ~ 323H【00】 F11.01 frequency.
Hundred’s place: multi-section accelerating/decelerating
Hundred's Ten's Unit's time setting
place place place
0: multi-section acceleration/deceleration time 1
0: Multi-section frequency i (F10.00)
1: Decided by function code F08.00 1: multi-section acceleration/deceleration time 2
2: Multi-section close loop input i
3: Decided by function code F17.01
2: multi-section acceleration/deceleration time 3
0: Run forward 3: multi-section acceleration/deceleration time 4
1: Run reverse
2: Confirmed by running command
7.2.4 Control
0: Multi-section acceleration/decelaration time 1
Figure 7-35 Step 1 (1 ~ 15) setting of simplified PLC function
Unit’s place: frequency setting

For example: when ‘i’ is equal to 3, phase 3 frequency is
multi-section frequency 3. See F10.00 ~ F10.14 for the
definitions of multi-section frequency.
1: Decided by Set Main Frequency Source (function code
F08.00)
2: Multi-section closed loop input i Figure 7-36 Control parameter setting screen
For example: when ‘i’ is equal to 2, phase 2 frequency is

multi-section closed loop input 2. See F17.19 ~ F17.33 for
the definitions of multi-section closed loop input (as for
‘Closed loop control parameter setting’, see Figure 7-53).
3: Decided by Closed loop input channel selection
(function code F17.01)

This function is applicable when the running command

channel is selected as ‘Control via control cabinet’, and it is
invalid to other channels.
0: Run forward
1: Run reverse
Motor Startup Mode: 0 ~ 2【0】 (F12.03)
0: Start from startup frequency

The inverter starts up following the set Startup Frequency
(F12.04) and Startup Frequency Holding Time (F12.05).
1: Brake then start from startup freq.
Figure 7-37 Start/stop control parameter setting 1
The inverter has DC brake first (see F12.06 ~ F12.08) and
The ‘Control’ screen shown in Figure 7-36 lists the access
then starts following mode 0.
buttons for parameter setting screens related to Start/Stop
Control, Closed Loop Control, Flux Control, System 2: Start on the fly
Bypass Settings, Output Switch Settings, Belt Conveyer The inverter autotracks the rotation speed and direction of
Control and Static Torque Pre-control. the motor, and then starts up the rotating motor smoothly
Clicking the Start/Stop Control button enters the ‘Start/stop without impact.
control parameter setting’ screen, as shown in Figure 7-37,  Note
Figure 7-41 and Figure 7-46.
1. ‘Brake then start from startup freq.’ is applicable to little inertia
Set Control Master: 0 ~ 3【0】 (F12.00) load whose motor runs forward or reversely upon stop state of the
inverter. For high-speed running and large inertia load, it is not
0: Control Cabinet suitable to use start mode 1. You must set the parameters related to
startup DC braking properly, and ensure that the braking is
It belongs to local control mode, in response to the virtual completed and the motor stops stably, after that, accelerate to start
buttons on the HMI control panel and the Startup and Stop up the load.
buttons on the ‘Operation Monitoring’ -> ‘Operation Control’ 2. ‘Start on the fly’ is applicable to large inertia load whose motor
screen. runs forward or reversely upon stop state of the inverter.
3. The startup performance of ‘Start on the fly’ is related to the
 Note motor parameters. Please set the related motor parameters (F05 or
If you need to select ‘Control via control cabinet’ mode, please F06 group) correctly.
first set the LOCAL-REMOTE selecting switch on the control
panel to ‘LOCAL’. Binding CMD Channel to Frequency Setting
(F12.02)
Channel: 0000 ~ 6666H【0000】
The rest three channels belong to remote control mode:
1: Multi function terminal The function defines the binding combinations between four
kinds of running command channels and six kinds of
Use external control terminals FWD, REV, three-line running
frequency input channels, facilitating realizing synchronized
control, JOG run forward, JOG run reverse, remote startup,
switch, as shown in Figure 7-38. The definition of frequency
remote stop and remote jog to perform startup and stop.
input channel shown in Figure 7-38 is the same as that of
Refer to ‘Digital value input parameter setting’.
Set Main Frequency Source (F08.00). See the function
2: Control via COM1 setting description for details.
Sending start/stop command through the COM1
communication port that is only for factory debug.
3: Control via COM2
Sending start/stop command through the COM2
communication port.
 Note
If you need to select mode 1 ~ 3, please first set the
LOCAL-REMOTE selecting switch on the control panel to
‘REMOTE’.
Rotational Direction: 0 ~ 1【0】 (F12.01)

Startup DC Braking Current: 0.0 ~ 150.0%【100.0】 (F12.06)

Thousand's
Unit's place
Ten's place
Hundred's
DC Braking Time before Starting (s): 0.00 ~
place
place
Frequency input channel selection in (F12.07)
'Control via control cabinet' mode 600.00s【60.00】
0: No binding Interval Time between DC Braking and Starting:
1: Input via touch-screen (F12.08)
0.00 ~ 600.00s【5.00】
2: Input via multi function terminal
3: Input via COM1
4: Input via COM2 F12.06 ~ F12.08 are valid only when Startup Running
Mode is selected as ‘Brake then start from startup freq.’, as
Frequency input channel selection in
'Control via multi function terminal' mode The setting of startup DC braking current is its percentage in
0 ~ 6: the same as the above the motor rated current. When the startup DC braking time
Frequency input channel selection in is 0.0s, there is no DC braking process.
'Control via COM1' mode
0 ~ 6: the same as the above  Note
Frequency input channel selection in 1. You must set the startup DC braking current and holding time
'Control via COM2' mode properly, and ensure that the braking is completed and the motor
0 ~ 6: the same as the above stops stably, after that, accelerate to start up the motor, or else, an
output overcurrent impact or power unit bus voltage overcurrent
Figure 7-38 Binding running command to frequency input channel may occur.
2. If the startup DC braking waiting time (that is, the time from
 Note
completing braking to the phase of ‘Start from startup frequency’)
The main frequency setting input channel may be affected by the is set to be too short, a comparatively large current impact may
following four points: occur to the output.
1. Multifunction input terminal is set to ‘Main frequency setting
switching to AI’ terminal (No. 26 function); Output

2. Parameter of Binding CMD Channel to Frequency Setting frequency
Channel (F12.02);
3. Multifunction input terminal is set to ‘Main frequency setting
source selection 1/2/3’ (No. 23 ~ No. 25 functions), see Table 7-5
for details; Time
4. Parameter of Set Main Frequency Source (F08.00). Output DC braking

voltage value
The priority is: point 1 > point 2 > point 3 > point 4, when F12.02
(valid value)
is not 0, point 3 and 4 are both invalid.
DC DC braking Time
braking waiting time
Startup Frequency: 0.00 ~ 30.00Hz【1.00】 (F12.04)
time
Startup Frequency Holding Time: 0.00 ~ 10.00s
(F12.05) Running
【0】 command
Figure 7-40 Description of ‘Brake then start from startup freq.’

Startup frequency is the initial frequency when the inverter
starts up. It is shown as fs in Figure 7-39. Startup frequency Phase Shift Transformer Output Voltage
(F12.36)
holding time is the holding time for running at the startup Selection: 0 ~ 2【0】
frequency during startup of the inverter. It is shown as t1 in

Figure 7-39. You can set the above parameters properly according to the
connection condition of the phase-shifting transformer tap,
Frequency Hz to ensure the sampling precision of the input voltage.
0: corresponding phase-shifting transformer tap position is 0
fmax 1: corresponding phase-shifting transformer tap position is
-5%
2: corresponding phase-shifting transformer tap position is
+5%
fs If you find the power unit inlet cable voltage is low, please
connect the phase-shifting transformer tap to -5% position,
Time
and adjust F12.36 to 1, see Table 7-2 for details.
t1
Figure 7-39 Schematic diagram of startup frequency and time

Table 7-2 Setting F12.36 parameter

Phase-shifting
Phenomenon F12.36
transformer tap position
Power unit inlet cable
0 0
voltage is normal
-5% 1
voltage is low
+5% 2
voltage is high
 Note
The phase-shifting transformer has three tap positions for
selection: +5%, 0, -5%. Improper setting of F12.36 will cause
imprecise sampling of the input voltage, thus mistakenly Motor Stop Mode: 0 ~ 3【0】 (F12.09)
generating a fault of input voltage high limit and other faults.
0: Ramp to stop
Auto Current Limiting level: 20.0 ~ 200.0%【100.0】 (F12.38)
After the inverter receives the stop command, it will reduce
the output frequency gradually according to the decelerating
The auto current limiting function is used to control the load
time, and stop after the frequency is reduced to the value
current in real time and limit it automatically below the set
lower than the stop speed.
Auto Current Limiting level (F12.38), to avoid fault trip
caused by current overshoot. The function is suitable 1: Coast to stop
especially for the loads with large inertia or sharp change. After the inverter receives the stop command, it will stop
Auto Current Limiting level (F12.38) defines the current output immediately. The load will coast to stop following its
threshold of the auto current limiting action. The setting mechanical inertia.
range is its percentage in the load motor rated current. 2: Ramp to stop + DC braking
Upon auto current limiting action, the output frequency may After the inverter receives the stop command, it will reduce
be changed. Therefore, the auto current limiting function is the output frequency gradually according to the decelerating
not suitable for the occasion in which the output frequency time, and begin DC braking when the frequency reaches the
is required to be stable upon constant-speed operation. stopping DC braking start frequency.
When auto current limiting is enabled, the inverter load Refer to the definitions of F12.10 ~ F12.13 for the function
capacity may be affected owing to the comparatively low related to stopping DC braking.
setting of the current limiting level. 3: Ramp to stop + braking excitation
The Bottom Fan ON Temperature Threshold:
(F12.39) After the inverter receives the stop command, it will reduce
40.0 ~ 100.0°C【40.0】
the output frequency gradually according to the decelerating
Hysteresis Temperature: 5.0 ~ 30.0°C【10.0】 (F12.40)
time, and begin excitation braking when the frequency
reaches the stopping excitation braking start frequency.
The Bottom Fan ON Temperature Threshold is used to
set the startup temperature of transformer bottom fan for the Refer to the definitions of F12.21, F12.23 and F12.24 for the
inverter that has bottom fans on its transformer; Hysteresis function related to stopping excitation braking.
Temperature is used to set the temperature of stopping  Note
rotation after the bottom fan starts up (Temperature of
1. When ‘Coast to stop’ is selected, for the load with large inertia,
stopping rotation = The Bottom Fan ON Temperature the stop time of the motor may be very long. When restart-up is
Threshold - Hysteresis Temperature). needed, please ensure that the motor has stably stopped. If not,
please use the mode of ‘Brake first and then start’ or ‘Start on the
fly’ to start the motor.
2. If the decelerating time is too short, or the decelerating extent is
too large, the motor may enter electricity-generating state and feed
energy to the inverter, thus causing pumping of the power unit bus
voltage. As for the condition, the inverter has the functions of
deceleration and overvoltage autoregulation. Through prolonging
the decelerating time properly, the inverter can maintain the power
unit bus voltage at a safe level. Therefore, the actual decelerating
time of the motor may be longer than the self-defined decelerating
time.

Stopping DC Braking Start Freq: 1.00 ~ 50.00Hz 1: prohibiting ‘run reverse’

(F12.10)
【50.00】
 Note
Stopping DC Braking Waiting: 0.00 ~ 600.00s【5.00】 (F12.11)
Stopping DC Braking Current: 0.0 ~ 150.0%【100.0】 (F12.12) The function is valid for all running command channels.
Stopping DC Braking Time: 0.00 ~ 600.00s【60.00】 (F12.13)
Forward / Reverse Rotation Dead Time: 0.00 ~
(F12.16)
360.00s【0.00】
Stopping braking waiting time: the interval from the moment
when the running frequency reaches the braking startup
It is the transition time for waiting at zero output frequency
frequency (F12.10) to the moment when the DC braking
during the process of transition of the inverter from running
quantity starts to be added, during the process of
forward to running reversely or from running reversely to
decelerating to stop.
running forward. It is shown as t1 in Figure 7-43.
During the braking waiting time, the inverter has no output. Output frequency
The time setting can prevent current overshoot effectively
for large power motor when the braking is started.
The setting of stopping DC braking current is its percentage
in the motor rated current. When the stopping DC braking Time
time is 0.0s, there is no DC braking process.

t1
Output
frequency
Figure 7-43 Run forward / reverse dead time
Stopping Speed: 0.00 ~ 120.00Hz【0.10】 (F12.18)
Stopping DC braking
start frequency Set the detected value of stopping speed upon stopping,
which is valid when the stopping mode is ‘Ramp to stop’.
Output See the function code F12.19 for the detecting mode.
Stopping DC braking
voltage waiting time
(valid value)  Note
DC braking quantity
The stopping speed is valid only when F12.09 is equal to 0.
Stopping DC
braking time Stopping Speed Detecting Mode: 0 ~ 1【0】 (F12.19)
Running
command 0: speed setting
Figure 7-42 Schematic diagram of decelerate to stop + DC braking Only this detecting mode is available in V/F control mode.
Non-stopping on Instantaneous Power Failure 1: detected value of speed
(F12.14)
Selection: 0 ~ 1【0】 Stopping Speed Delay Time: 0.00 ~ 10.00s【0.05】 (F12.20)
0: No action When the motor speed reaches the stopping speed upon
1: Action, keep output upon power failure deceleration of the motor, the inverter will stop after the
When the inverter generates alarms such as power failure, stopping speed delay time. As shown in Figure 7-44, td is
under voltage and so on, the inverter output will continue to the stopping speed delay time.
track the rotation speed of the induction motor, and the Detected value of speed
inverter keeps the DC bus voltage of all power units larger
than the shutdown point of DC bus under voltage. If the
Stopping
above-mentioned faults recover, and the bus voltage of the speed
power unit of the inverter is higher than (or equal to) 714V, 0 Time
meanwhile, the output frequency is not less than 5Hz, the Running td
inverter recovers normal operation; if the above-mentioned command
faults do not recover, and the bus voltage of the power unit
Running state
of the inverter is less than 714V, or the output frequency is
less than 5Hz, the inverter will perform corresponding
Figure 7-44 Detecting time sequence of stopping speed
protection function (shutdown upon a fault).
Reverse Rotation Prevention Selection: 0 ~ 1  Note
(F12.15)
【0】
The stopping speed delay time is invalid for V/F control mode,
and the ‘Stopping speed detecting mode’ must be set to ‘detected
0: allowing ‘run reverse’ value of speed’ (F12.09 = 1).

Excitation Braking Start Frequency: 1.00 ~ begins and the speed reaches the setting, and when the
(F12.21)
50.00Hz【50.00】 deceleration begins and the speed reaches the setting, the
Excitation Braking Current: 0.0 ~ 100.0%【100.0】 (F12.23) speed setting will form an S curve, so that the acceleration
Excitation Braking Time: 0.00 ~ 600.00s【60.00】 (F12.24) and deceleration actions are smooth with less impact.
The setting of stopping excitation braking current is its

percentage in the motor rated current. When the stopping
excitation braking time is 0.0s, there is no excitation braking
process.
Output
frequency
Stopping excitation
braking start frequency Figure 7-48 S curve acceleration / deceleration
2: Auto acceleration / deceleration

Output
voltage You only need to set the frequency setting, and the inverter
(valid value) Excitation will accelerate or decelerate to the target frequency
braking quantity
automatically in shortest time.
Stopping excitation For accelerating process: the auto current limiting function is
braking time
forced to be enabled (but the auto current limiting level is
Running still limited by F12.38), and the inverter realizes the fastest
command
acceleration under the precondition that overcurrent does
Figure 7-45 Schematic diagram of decelerate to stop + excitation not occur to the output.
braking
For decelerating process: the inverter realizes the fastest
deceleration under the precondition that overvoltage does
not occur to the power unit bus voltage.
Acceleration Time: 0.1 ~ 3600.0s【60.0】 (F12.27)
Deceleration Time: 0.1 ~ 3600.0s【60.0】 (F12.28)
Acceleration time is the required time for the inverter to

accelerate from zero output frequency to Max Output
Frequency (F08.10). Deceleration time is the required time
for the inverter to decelerate from Max Output Frequency
(F08.10) to zero output frequency.
 Note
1. Based on the above definitions of acceleration time and
Acceleration / Deceleration Mode: 0 ~ 2【0】 (F12.25) deceleration time, you need to convert the time according to needs
and then set the above parameters.
0: Direct line acceleration/deceleration 2. The actual accelerating and decelerating time may be prolonged
The output frequency increases or decreases following the owing to effect by internal current limit and voltage limit
functions of the inverter.
constant slop, as shown in Figure 7-47.
Jog Acceleration Time: 0.0 ~ 3600.0s【60.0】 (F12.33)

Frequency
Frequency Jog Deceleration Time: 0.0 ~ 3600.0s【60.0】 (F12.34)
setting Jog interval time: 1.0 ~ 100.0s【10.0】 (F12.35)
As shown in Figure 7-49, t1 and t3 are the jog acceleration

Time time and jog deceleration time of actual operation; t2 is the
Acceleration time Deceleration time
jog time; t4 is Jog Interval Time (F12.35); f1 is Jog
Figure 7-47 Direct line acceleration/deceleration Operation Frequency (F08.13).
1: S curve acceleration / deceleration The definitions of F12.33 and F12.34 are similar to those of
The output frequency increases or decreases following the F12.27 and F12.28, therefore, the jog acceleration time t1 of
S curve, as shown in Figure 7-49. When the acceleration actual operation is conformed according to the following

formula. The jog deceleration time t3 of actual operation can Frequency

be conformed in the same way.
t1 = F 08. 13×F 12.33 F12.30 F12.31

F 08.10
F12.29 F12.32
Time
t1 t2
Figure 7-50 Description of acceleration/deceleration startup time and

end time
Figure 7-49 Description of jog operation parameters
Jog Interval Time (F12.35) is the interval time required for

waiting from the moment when the last jog command is
cancelled to the moment when the next jog command takes
effect.
The inverter will not respond to the jog command during the
jog interval time. If the jog command persists all the time,
Figure 7-51 Flux control parameter setting
the inverter will begin to execute the jog command after the
interval time; the jog command after the jog interval time will Clicking the Flux Control button on the ‘Control’ screen
be immediately executed. shown in Figure 7-36 enters the ‘Flux control parameter
setting’ screen, as shown in Figure 7-51.
 Note
Pre-excitation Time: 0.0 ~ 10.0s【0】 (F15.00)
1. The jog operation takes the ‘Start from startup frequency’ mode
for startup. When the jog deceleration time is 0, the stop mode is
‘Coast to stop’, or else, the stop mode is ‘Ramp to stop’. The pre-excitation is used to build a magnetic field before
the asynchronized motor starts up. You can set the shortest
2. The jog control can be performed through the touch screen of
the control panel, multifunction terminals and COM1 (factory pre-excitation time through pre-excitation time (F15.00). In
debug)/COM2 communication port. V/F mode, the actual pre-excitation time is the same as set
time; in vector mode, the actual pre-excitation time is related
S Curve Acceleration Startup Time: 10.0 ~ to the building speed of the magnetic field. In both V/F mode
(F12.29)
50.0%【20.0】 and vector mode, the actual pre-excitation time is controlled
S Curve Acceleration End Time: 10.0 ~ 80.0% by ‘pre-excitation command terminal’ (No. 40 function of the
(F12.30)
【20.0】
multifunction terminal). See ‘Digital value input parameter
S Curve Deceleration Startup Time: 10.0 ~
(F12.31) setting’ for details (Figure 7-70).
50.0%【20.0】
Pre-excitation Current: 0.0 ~ 200.0%【100.0】 (F15.01)
S Curve Deceleration End Time: 10.0 ~ 80.0%
(F12.32) Field Weakening Control Coefficient: 0.0 ~
【20.0】 (F15.02)
200.0%【100.0】
Min Flux Reference Value: 1.0 ~ 80.0%【10.0】 (F15.03)
F12.29 ~ F12.32 are valid only when the acceleration /
deceleration mode is selected as ‘S Curve Acceleration /
The setting of ‘Pre-excitation Current’ is a percentage
Deceleration’ (F12.25 = 1) and F12.29 + F12.30 ≤ 100%,
relative to motor rated current.
F12.31 + F12.32 ≤ 100%, as shown in Figure 7-50.
The function codes F15.02 and F15.03 are valid for the
In Figure 7-50, t1 is the time of zero frequency accelerating
vector control mode with PG.
to target frequency; t2 is the time of target frequency
decelerating to zero frequency. ‘Field Weakening Control Coefficient’ is used to modify the
field weakening curve in field weakening area. The larger
the value is, the steadier the field weakening curve is.
‘Min Flux Reference Value’ is the minimum flux value upon
field weakening.

Clicking the Closed Loop Control button on the ‘Control’ screen shown in Figure 7-36 enters the ‘Closed loop control
parameter setting’ screen, as shown in Figure 7-52 and Figure 7-53.
Figure 7-52 Closed loop control parameter setting 1 Figure 7-53 Closed loop control parameter setting 2
The process closed loop control system of the inverter is in the format of analog closed loop. The schematic diagram of closed
loop operation is shown in Figure 7-54. In the figure, Kp: Proportional gain; Ki: Integration gain.
Kp*Δ
Close loop (F17.10) + Close loop
Regulation of +
Close loop Δ Deviation limit regulation output
reference input
reference input (F17.14) characteristic
(F17.06, F17.08) - +
(F17.15) ∑Ki*Δ
(F17.11)
Regulation of
feedback value
(F17.07, F17.09) Close loop feedback value
Figure 7-54 Schematic diagram of external process closed loop control
After the system is confirmed, the basic procedures for setting closed loop parameters are as follows:
1) Ensure the closed loop input and feedback channels (F17.01, F17.02);
2) Set the relation between closed loop input and feedback for the analog closed loop (F17.06 ~ F17.09);
3) Confirm the ‘Closed loop regulation characteristic’. If the relation between input and required motor rotation speed is
reversed, set the ‘Closed loop regulation characteristic’ to ‘Negative effect’ (F17.15 = 1);
4) Set the functions of ‘Integration regulation selection’ and ‘Closed loop preset frequency’ (F17.16 ~ F17.18);
5) Adjust the closed loop filter time, sampling cycle, deviation limit and gain coefficient (F17.10 ~ F17.14).
Closed Loop Function Selection: 0 ~ 1【0】 (F17.00) Feedback Channel Selection: 0 ~ 3【1】 (F17.02)
0: The closed loop operation control is disabled. 0: Analog input via AI1
1: The closed loop operation control is enabled. 1: Analog input via AI2
Input Channel Selection: 0 ~ 4【1】 (F17.01) 2: Analog input via AI3
3: Analog voltage input via AI4
0: Digital input, taking the value of F17.05
The input range:
1: Analog input via AI1
AI4 input property: -10V ~ +10V voltage input;
AI1, AI2, AI3 input property: 4mA ~ 20mA current input.
Input Channel Filter Constant: 0.01 ~ 50.00s【0.50】 (F17.03)
4: Analog voltage input via AI4 Feedback Channel Filter Constant: 0.01 ~ 50.00s
(F17.04)
AI4 input property is: -10 ~ 10V voltage input; 【0.50】
AI1, AI2, AI3 input property is: 4 ~ 20mA current input.

Generally, some disturbance is added to the external input
 Note signals and feedback signals. Set the filter time constants
Only when the selecting terminals 1/2/3/4 of ‘Multi-section closed F17.03 and F17.04 to filter the wave in the channel. The
loop input’ are all set to 0, can the input channel selection by longer the filter time is, the stronger the immunity capacity is;
F17.01 be valid. Or else, the closed loop input is the selecting
the shorter the filter time is, the quicker the response is, but
result of the above four terminals.
the immunity capacity becomes weaker.

 Note Regulated value

The ‘Input channel filter constant’ (F17.03) is valid only when the 100%
input channel is AI1 ~ AI4. It is invalid for direct digital input
(F17.01 = 0) or multi-section closed loop input.
60%
Digital Setting For Reference Input: -10.00 ~ 46.6%
(F17.05)
+10.00V【0】
You can type the digital input value directly. -10.00V is 25% 50% Analog input value
maximum reference of reverse rotation, +10.00V is 0% 80% 100%

(6V)
maximum reference of forward rotation.
(1)
Min reference input: 0.0% ~ (F17.08)【0.0】 (F17.06)
Min Reference Corresponding to feedback: 0.0 ~ (2)
(F17.07)
100.0%【0.0】
Max reference input: (F17.06) ~ 100.0%【100.0】 (F17.08)
-100%
Max Reference Corresponding to feedback: 0.0 ~
(F17.09)
100%【100.0】
Figure 7-55 Schematic diagram of input value regulation curve
Through F17.06 ~ F17.09, define the relation between the Proportional Gain: 0.000 ~ 50.000【2.000】 (F17.10)
input value and corresponding expected feedback value. Integration Gain: 0.000 ~ 50.000【0.100】 (F17.11)
F17.06 and F17.08 can regulate the input value, and the Sampling Period: 0.01 ~ 50.00s【0.50】 (F17.12)
regulation relation is shown in Figure 7-55.
The larger the proportional gain Kp is, the quicker the
When the analog input is 6V:
response is, but too large Kp will cause surge easily.
1. If F17.06 is equal to 0%, and F17.08 is equal to 100%,
Only regulating the proportional gain Kp cannot eliminate
the converted value after regulation is 60%.
the deviation completely. You can use the integration gain Ki,
2. If F17.06 is equal to 25%, and F17.08 is equal to 100%,
thus eliminating the residual deviation. The larger the Ki is,
the converted value after regulation is 46.6%.
the quicker the response to the changing deviation is, but
 Note too large Ki will cause surge easily.
1. In Figure 7-55, the calibration on the transverse axis 0% ~ ‘Sampling Period’ T is the sampling cycle of feedback value.
100% corresponds to the analog input value -10V ~ 10V: the The closed loop regulator operates once in each sampling
analog input value 10V corresponds to 100%; -10V corresponds cycle. The longer the sampling cycle is, the slower the
to 0%; 6V corresponds to 80%.
response is.
2. If the input property is analog current input, because the input
current range is 4mA ~ 20mA, the calibration range on the Output Filter Time: 0.01 ~ 10.00s【0.05】 (F17.13)
transverse axis is 50% ~ 100%.
‘Output Filter Time’ is the filter time of closed loop output
F17.07 and F17.09 can regulate the feedback value, and value (frequency). The longer the output filter time is, the
the regulation relation is similar to that of input value. slower the output response is.
The definition of input value regulation and feedback value Deviation Limit: 0.0 ~ 20.0%【2.0】 (F17.14)
regulation is that the input value and the feedback value use
a unified value internally. The allowed maximum deviation value of the system output
value compared to the closed loop input value is shown in
Figure 7-56. When the feedback value is within the range,
the closed loop regulator stops regulation. Proper setting of
the function is helpful for the precision and stability of the
system output.
The setting of ‘Deviation Limit’ is a percentage relative to
input value.

Feedback value After the closed loop operation is started, the inverter first
Deviation limit accelerates the frequency to the ‘Closed loop preset
Input
frequency’ (F17.17) according to the acceleration time, and
value
then it keeps operating at the frequency point for some time
(F17.18), after that, it operates following the closed loop
characteristic.
Time
Output frequency Output
frequency
Preset frequency
Time
Figure 7-56 Schematic diagram of deviation limit Time T

Closed Loop Regulation Character: 0 ~ 1【0】 (F17.15) Preset frequency
holding time
0: Positive effect
Figure 7-58 Schematic diagram of closed loop preset frequency
Selected when the input value is increased, and the motor operation
rotation speed is required to be increased.
 Note
1: Negative effect
If the function of ‘Closed loop preset frequency’ is not needed, set
Selected when the input value is increased, and the motor both the preset frequency and the holding time to 0.
rotation speed is required to be decreased.
In actual control system, to achieve the control requirement, Multi-section Closed Loop Input i (i =
(F17.19 ~ F17.33)
when the input value is increased, the motor rotation speed 1 ~ 15): -10.00V ~ +10.00V【0.00】
is required to be increased. This closed loop characteristic

is positive effect characteristic. As opposite to it, when the Among the closed loop input channels, besides the three
input value is increased, the motor rotation speed is channels defined by F17.01, the voltage value of
required to be decreased. This closed loop characteristic is multi-section closed loop input defined by F17.19 ~ F17.33
negative effect characteristic. can also be used as the closed loop input.
The voltage selection of multi-section closed loop input 1 ~
Rotation speed
Positive effect 15 can be flexibly switched through the external terminals.
See Table 7-7. The closed loop section of simplified PLC
function can also be used together. See the description of
Negative F11 group of function code.
effect
 Note
The priority of multi-section closed loop input control is higher
Close loop input than that of the input channel defined by F17.01.
Figure 7-57 Schematic diagram of closed loop regulation

Closed Loop Output Invert Selection: 0 ~ 1【0】 (F17.34)
characteristic
Integration Regulation Selection: 0 ~ 1【0】 (F17.16) 0: The closed loop output is negative, and the inverter
operates at zero output frequency.
0: When the frequency reaches the high or low limit, stop
1: The closed loop output is negative, and the inverter runs
the integration regulation.
reversely. However, if the selection of ‘Run reverse
1: When the frequency reaches the high or low limit, prevention’ is selected as prohibiting ‘run reverse’, the
continue the integration regulation. inverter will operate at zero output frequency.
For the system requiring quick response, it is recommended Closed Loop Feedback Loss Detection Value:
(F17.35)
to cancel continuing the integration regulation. 0.0 ~ 100.0%【50.0】
Closed Loop Preset Frequency: 0.00 ~ 120.00Hz Closed Loop Feedback Loss Detection Time:
(F17.17) (F17.36)
【0.00】 0.0 ~ 20.0s【1.0】
Preset Frequency Holding Time: 0.0 ~ 3600.0s【0.0】 (F17.18)
‘Closed Loop Feedback Loss Detection Value’ takes the
The function can make the closed loop regulation enter maximum feedback value (after regulation by F17.09, 10V is
steady phase quickly. 100%) as basic valve. In the detection time, the closed loop
feedback absolute value keeps lower than the detection

value. The inverter takes action according to the ‘Selection

of closed loop feedback loss fault type’ set by the user
(Figure 7-68).
Figure 7-60 Output switch settings
Clicking the Output Switch Settings button on the ‘Control’

screen shown in Figure 7-36 enters the ‘Output Switch
Figure 7-59 System-bypass settings Settings’ screen, as shown in Figure 7-60.
Clicking the System Bypass Settings button on the You can set whether to enable the soft start function.
‘Control’ screen shown in Figure 7-36 enters the Soft Start Eanable: 0 ~ 1【0】 (F00.05) BIT2 Place
‘System-bypass settings’ screen, as shown in Figure 7-59.
You can set whether to enable the system automatic bypass BIT2: Soft Start Enable
function. 0: Disabled
System-bypass Components Configuration: (F00.05) BIT0 1: Enabled
0 ~1【0】 place
For the soft start function, refer to Appendix 4 Descriptions
(F00.05) BIT1
System-bypass Enable: 0 ~ 1【0】 On Multi-Split Soft Startup.
place
Output Switch Enable: 0 ~ 1【0】 (F00.05) BIT3 Place
BIT0: System-bypass components configuration
BIT3: Output Switch Enable
0: Not configured
0: Disabled
1: Configured
1: Enabled
BIT1: System-bypass enable
For the output switch function, refer to Appendix 5
0: Disabled
Descriptions On Output Switch.
1: Enabled
System automatic bypass kit configuration

Goal: Realizing software compatibility for inverters with and
without system automatic bypass.
Effect: If system automatic bypass is not configured, the
inverter will not detect ‘output breaker not closing’ fault.
System automatic bypass enabling

Goal: When the inverter has system automatic bypass, the
function can satisfy the user’s need of using or not using the
system automatic bypass.
Effect: If enabled, the inverter can switch to system Figure 7-61 Belt conveyer control parameter settings
automatic bypass upon severe fault during operation; if
Clicking the Belt Conveyer Control button on the ‘Control’
disabled, the inverter will not switch to system automatic
screen shown in Figure 7-36 enters the ‘System-bypass
bypass upon any working condition.
settings’ screen, as shown in Figure 7-61.
For the system automatic bypass function, refer to Control Mode: 0 ~ 3【1】 (F13.00)
Appendix 3 Descriptions On System Automatic Bypass.
0: Comm Debug (factory debug)
1: Main-Slave Control
2: Synchronized Control

Control Step: 0 ~ 65535【192】 (F13.04)

Control Period: 2 ~ 100ms【4】 (F13.05)
Average Current Kp: 0 ~ 65535【4096】 (F13.06)
Average Current Ki: 0 ~ 65535【4096】 (F13.07)
Average Current Kc: 0 ~ 65535【0】 (F13.08)
Average Current Dead-zone: 0 ~ 100%【1】 (F13.02)
Parallel-comm Start-stop CMD Holding
(F13.12)
Time: 1 ~ 2000ms【500】
Pre-tensioning Frequency: 0 ~ 50Hz【5】 (F13.10)
Pre-tensioning Time: 0 ~ 65535s【20】 (F13.09)
Control Step: minimum step of frequency adjustment during Figure 7-62 Static Torque Preliminary Control Settings
each control period, 1 indicates 0.0001Hz.
In lift system, when the motor needs relatively-large startup
Control Period: control period of Average Current. torque upon startup, the parameter can be enabled.
Average Current: realizing balance of output torque and Static Torque Preliminary Control
(F12.49)
output power among multiple inverters. Through setting Enable: 0 ~ 1【0】
Average Current gain Kp, integrity coefficient Ki and
desaturation coefficient Kc, the response speed of Average 0: Disabled
Current can be adjusted. For the using method of the 1: Enabled
parameters, refer to P, I setting of ASR in 7.2.2 Motor. Kc
Static Torque Valve: 0 ~ 500%【100】 (F12.50)
is a desaturation coefficient.
Average Current Dead-zone: if the difference between the It is compensation valve of at static torque, displayed in
system average current and the inverter current (the percentage. The range is 0 ~ 500%, the minimum scale is
difference is called Average Current Dead-zone) is relatively 0.1%, and the default valve is 100%. The valve of this
small, the Average Current will not be adjusted. function code needs to be set according to actual load
Pre-tensioning Frequency: first start the motor slowly to low condition.
frequency (Pre-tensioning Frequency), the belt will be driven Static Torque Preliminary Control
(F12.51)
to start slowly, and the energy stored in the belt will be Ending Frequency: 0 ~ 10【5】
released slowly, so that the tension wave formed during the
startup process of the belt is very small, and barely causes The static torque preliminary control functions only upon
damage to the belt. startup. When the output frequency reaches ‘Static Torque
Pre-tensioning Time: the time that the system operates at Preliminary Control Ending Frequency’, the static torque
Pre-tensioning Frequency. preliminary control function will exit. The range of this
function code is 0 ~ 10Hz, the minimum scale is 1Hz, and
Loop Control Mode: 0 ~ 1【0】 (F13.01)
the default valve is 5Hz. The valve of this function code
needs to be set according to actual load condition.
0: PI Control
Static Torque Compensation Mode: 0 ~ 2
1: Step Control (F12.52)
【0】
Frequency Setting Mode for Parallel-comm:
(F13.11)
0 ~ 1【0】
0: Only compensate electric driving torque. In general, the
compensation mode is selected to 0 for main shaft;
0: Master-Slave
1: Compensate electric driving torque and braking torque. In
1: Average-Value
general, the compensation mode is selected to 1 for
For the belt conveyer control function, refer to Appendix 6 auxiliary shaft;
Descriptions On Belt Conveyer Control.
2: Reserved
Braking Release Mode: 0 ~ 1【0】 (F12.53)
0: Depending on the braking release relay time. After

pre-excitation ends and a delay of ‘braking release relay
time’, the central control system will be given a braking
release signal through external terminals.
1: Depending on the output current. After pre-excitation
ends, the output current will be detected. When output
current reaches rated current, the central control system will

be given a braking release signal through external If a minor fault F1 occurs during the operation process, the
terminals. system is allowed to continue running, at this point, the
running frequency is set by this function code:
7.2.5 Protection 0: Running at current setting of frequency
1: Running at the frequency set via Main frequency digital
setting (function code F08.01)
2: Running at Upper frequency limit (F08.11)
3: Running at Lower frequency limit (F08.12)
4: Running at Continuous Running Frequency Setting at
Alarm (F29.04)
Continuous Running Frequency Setting at
(F29.04)
Alarm: 0.0 ~ 100.0%【100.0】
When F29.03 is equal to 4, the basic value is the running

frequency when a minor fault occurs.
Figure 7-63 ‘Protection’ screen Motor Under Load Protection Detection Level:
(F29.05)
0.0 ~ 100.0%【100.0】
The ‘Protection’ screen shown in Figure 7-63 lists the
Motor Under Load Protection Detection Time:
access buttons for parameter setting screens related to fault (F29.06)
0.0 ~ 3600.0s【600.0】
handling method, protection threshold setting, fault mask
property and so on.
F29.05 and F29.06 are used to set the judging conditions
Clicking the Protection Parameter Settings button enters for motor under load protection. If the torque current of the
the ‘Protection Parameter Settings’ screen, as shown in inverter is lower than F29.05, and the holding time exceeds
Figure 7-64 and Figure 7-65. F29.06, the inverter will report ‘motor under load protection’.
Note: The function of motor under load protection is invalid
in V/F mode.
Motor Abnormal Speed Detection Level: 0.0 ~
(F29.07)
100.0%【20.0】
Motor Abnormal Speed Detection Time: 0.0 ~
(F29.08)
3600.0s【600.0】

for motor abnormal speed. When the inverter is in
constant-speed running status, if it detects that the actual
motor speed exceeds ‘speed setting ± (F29.07)’, and the
Figure 7-64 Protection parameter settings 1 holding time exceeds F29.08, the inverter will report ‘motor
speed is abnormal’.
PG Feedback Signal Abnormal Detection Time:
(F29.12)
0.0 ~ 10.0s【2.0】
In the vector control mode with PG, if the inverter does not
detect the PG feedback signal during the set time (F29.12),
the inverter will report ‘PG feedback signal is abnormal’.
Input Phase Imbalance Judgment Coefficient k:
(F29.18)
0 ~ 100.0%【90.0】
Output Phase Imbalance Judgment Coefficient
(F29.19)
k: 0 ~ 100.0%【90.0】
Figure 7-65 Protection parameter settings 2 The virtual value of 3-phase input or output line voltage:
Continuous Running Frequency Selection Va_rms, Vb_rms, Vc_rms

(F29.03)
at Alarm: 0 ~ 4【0】 The method for judging input or output imbalance is:
Any line voltage Vx_rms < (Va_rms + Vb_rms + Vc_rms) × k/3
The value of k is set by F29.18 and F29.19.

Max allowed RPM: 0% ~ 130.0%【120.0】 (F29.09) Parallel-com Average-current Imbalance

(F29.24)
Motor Over Speed Warning Detection Time: 0.0 Fault Threshold: 0 ~ 100%【20】
(F29.10)
~ 3600.0s【600.0】 Parallel-com Average-current Imbalance
(F29.25)
Motor Over Speed Protection Detection Time: Fault Confirm Time: 0 ~ 600s【5】
(F29.11)
0.0 ~ 3600.0s【600.0】
It is valid under parallel control mode. F29.24 is used to set
F29.09 ~ F29.11 are used to set the judging conditions for threshold of Parallel-com Average-current Imbalance
motor over speed warning/protection. Fault, which is a percentage related to motor rated current.
Max allowed RPM = F29.09 × rotation speed corresponding F29.25 is used to set the confirm time of Parallel-com
to the maximum output frequency of the inverter Average-current Imbalance Fault. When the imbalance
degree exceeds the threshold and the maintaining time
Motor over speed warning detection value = 95% × Max
exceeds the confirm time, the fault is reported.
allowed RPM
Motor over speed protection detection value = 100% × Max
allowed RPM
If the rotation speed exceeds the detection value, and the
holding time exceeds the detection time, the inverter will
report corresponding warning or protection.
Motor Over Current Warning Detection Level:
(F29.13)
100.0 ~ 250.0%【110.0】
Motor Over Current Protection Detection
(F29.14)
Level: 100.0% ~ 250.0%【125.0】
Motor Over Current Protection Detection Time:
(F29.15)
0.0 ~ 3600.0s【600.0】
Figure 7-66 System fault mask setting
F29.13 ~ F29.15 are used to set the judging conditions for
motor over current warning/protection. The basic value of
the detection level is the motor rated current.
Motor Overload Detection Level: 20.0 ~ 200.0%
(F29.16)
【120.0】
Motor Overload Detection Time: 0.0 ~ 3600.0s
(F29.17)
【600.0】

for motor overload. The basic value of the detection level is
the motor rated current.
Phase Shift Transformer Over Temperature
(F29.20) Figure 7-67 Power unit fault mask setting
Warning: 60.0 ~ 160.0°C【110.0】
Phase Shift Transformer Over Temperature Clicking the System Fault Mask Word and Power Unit
(F29.21)
protection: 80.0 ~ 180.0°C【130.0】 Fault Mask Word buttons on the ‘Protection’ screen shown
in Figure 7-63 enters the corresponding fault mask setting
F29.20 and F29.21 are used to set the temperature screen, as shown in Figure 7-66 and Figure 7-67.
thresholds for over temperature warning/protection of the
You can enable or mask some system faults and power unit
phase-shifting transformer.
faults. After the fault is masked, the inverter will not handle
Parallel-com Average-current Imbalance
(F29.22) the fault type. The maskable system faults include:
Alarm Threshold: 0 ~ 100%【20】
Parallel-com Average-current Imbalance
1. Input voltage high
(F29.23)
Alarm Confirm Time: 0 ~ 600s【5】 2. Input over voltage
3. Input voltage low
It is valid under parallel control mode. F29.22 is used to set
4. Input phase imbalance
threshold of Parallel-com Average-current Imbalance
Alarm, which is a percentage related to motor rated current. 5. Inverter overload warning
F29.23 is used to set the confirm time of Parallel-com 6. Output grounded
Average-current Imbalance Alarm. When the imbalance 7. Motor underload protection
degree exceeds the threshold and the maintaining time
8: Motor speed abnormal
exceeds the confirm time, the alarm is reported.

9: Motor over speed warning

10. Motor overload
11. Closed loop feedback signal loss
12. Average current imbalance alarm
13. Average current imbalance fault
The maskable power unit faults include:
1: Power unit bypass contactor failure
2: Power unit IGBT over temperature warning
3: Power unit DC over voltage warning
4: Power unit bypass optical fiber failure Figure 7-70 Digital input setting
 Note The ‘I/O’ screen shown in Figure 7-69 lists the access
After the contents on the screen have been set, you must press the buttons for parameter setting screens related to analog
Confirm button to confirm the settings. input and output ports, digital input and output ports.
Clicking the Digital Input button enters the ‘Digital input
parameter setting’ screen, as shown in Figure 7-70.
Set X1 function: 0 ~ 54【44】 (F18.00)
Set X2 function: 0 ~ 54【45】 (F18.01)
Set X3 function: 0 ~ 54【46】 (F18.02)
Set X4 function: 0 ~ 54【0】 (F18.03)
Set X5 function: 0 ~ 54【0】 (F18.04)
Set X6 function: 0 ~ 54【47】 (F18.05)
Set X7 function: 0 ~ 54【48】 (F18.06)
Set X8 function: 0 ~ 54【0】 (F18.07)
The inverter has eight multifunction digital input terminals

Figure 7-68 Fault handling method
X1 ~ X8. Their functions are rich, and you can select them
Clicking the Fault Handling Method button on the conveniently according to needs. That is, you can define the
‘Protection’ screen shown in Figure 7-63 enters the ‘Fault functions of X1 ~ X8 respectively through setting the values
Handling Method’ setting screen, as shown in Figure 7-68. of F18.00 ~ F18.07. See Table 7-3 for the setting and
You can set the fault type of some faults, that is, change its functions.
handing method. After the selection is completed, press the
Table 7-3 Function list of multifunction input terminals
Confirm button to complete the setting.
Setting Corresponding function Setting Corresponding function
Multi-section frequency
7.2.6 I/O 0 No function 1
terminal 1 (K1)
Multi-section frequency Multi-section frequency
2 3
terminal 2 (K2) terminal 3 (K3)
Multi-section frequency System bypass fault
4 5
terminal 4 (K4) input
External fault normally External fault normally
6 7
open input close input
External jog operation
External reset (RESET)
8 9 (run forward) control
input
input
External jog operation
10 (run reverse) control 11 Emergency stop
input
Coast to stop input Frequency increasing
12 13
Figure 7-69 I/O screen (FRS) command (UP)
Running command of
Frequency decreasing
14 15 stopping simplified PLC
command (DOWN)
function temporarily

Setting Corresponding function Setting Corresponding function K4 K3 K2 K1 Frequency setting

Acceleration and 0 0 1 0 Multi-section frequency 2
16 deceleration prohibition 17 3-line running control 0 0 1 1 Multi-section frequency 3
command 0 1 0 0 Multi-section frequency 4
External cut-off External cut-off 0 1 0 1 Multi-section frequency 5
18 normally open contact 19 normally close contact 0 1 1 0 Multi-section frequency 6
input input 0 1 1 1 Multi-section frequency 7
Stop DC braking input 1 0 0 0 Multi-section frequency 8
20 21 Closed loop prohibition
command
1 0 0 1 Multi-section frequency 9
Simplified PLC function Main frequency setting
22 23 1 0 1 0 Multi-section frequency 10
prohibition source selection 1
Main frequency setting Main frequency setting
source selection 2 source selection 3
Main frequency setting Command switched to
switched to AI terminals
Command source Command source
28 29 Note: ‘Multi-section frequency 1 ~ 15’ in the table are defined by
selection 1 selection 2
F10.00 ~ F10.14
Command source Multi-section closed
30 31
selection 3 loop input terminal 1
Multi-section closed Multi-section closed These frequencies will be used in the multi-section speed
32 33
loop input terminal 2 loop input terminal 3 operation and simplified PLC function operation. Taking the
Multi-section closed External stop multi-section speed operation as an example, the
34 35
loop input terminal 4 command descriptions are as follows (refer to 7.2.3 Reference for
Inverter operation details):
36 37 Run forward prohibition
prohibition
The definitions of the control terminals X1, X2, X3 and X4
Open/closed loop
38 Run reverse prohibition 39 are as follows: on the condition of ‘F18.00 = 1, F18.01 = 2,
switch terminal
Pre-excitation Motor 1 and 2 switch F18.02 = 3; F18.03 = 4’, terminals X1 ~ X4 are used to
40 41 realize multi-section speed operation, as shown in
command terminal terminal
42 FWD 43 REV Figure 7-71.
44 Remote startup 45 Remote stop
Output 15-speed
46 Remote jog 47 Switching-on operation frequency
Memory clearance
48 Switching-off operation 49 upon stop of simplified
PLC function
Feedback signal of
Feedback signal of
50 51 faulty bypass output Ordinary
faulty bypass breaker
breaker running 1-speed
Multi-section Multi-section frequency
acceleration / acceleration / Running
52 53 command Time
deceleration time deceleration time
setting terminal 1 setting terminal 2 K1
Frequency conversion Working frequency to K2
54 55
to working frequency frequency conversion
K3
Pre-excitation cabinet
56 57 Reserved K4
protection
58 Reserved 59 Reserved Figure 7-71 Schematic diagram of multi-section speed operation
60 Reserved 5: System bypass fault input
If the inverter system is configured with an external
For the functions listed in Table 7-3, the introduction is as
integrated bypass device, fault signal can be inputted from
follows:
the terminal. After the inverter receives the fault signal, it will
1 ~ 4: Multi-section frequency terminal report the fault information of ‘system bypass fault’ and stop
Through selecting the combination of these function running, and the input high voltage circuit breaker will trip.
terminals, you can define the running curves of up to 6, 7: External fault normally open/close input
15-section speed.
Through the terminal, the fault signal of external device can
Table 7-4 Selection list of multi-section speed running be inputted, facilitating the inverter monitoring the faults of
K4 K3 K2 K1 Frequency setting external device. After the inverter receives the fault signal of
0 0 0 0 Ordinary running frequency external device, it will display the alarm of external fault and

stop running. The fault signal can be inputted through two During the operating process of the inverter, after receiving
input modes: normally open or normally close. the external cut-off signal, the inverter stops output and
8: External reset (RESET) input enters zero frequency standby state. Once the external
cut-off signal is cleared, the inverter will start on the fly
When a fault occurs to the inverter, you can reset the fault
automatically and restore operating.
through the terminal.
Two external cut-off input modes are available: normally
9, 10: External jog operation (run forward/reverse) control
open contact and normally close contact.
input
The terminals are used for jog operation control in control  Note
terminal mode. The jog operation frequency, jog interval The difference between this function and function 6 ~ 7 is that: the
time and jog acceleration & decelerating time are defined by external cut-off will not cause alarm output of the inverter, after
the cut-off signal is cleared, the inverter will restore operating.
F08.13, F12.33 ~ F12.35.
Set Running Mode must be set to non-zero at the same 20: Stop DC braking input command
time. This function only sets jog operation direction.
Use the control terminal to conduct DC braking on the motor
11: Emergency stop that is in stop process, to realize emergency power-off of
When the terminal function is enabled, the inverter performs the motor. The DC braking start frequency, braking waiting
stop operation in the mode of making the motor stop at the time, braking current and braking time are defined by
quickest speed, as specified below: F12.10 ~ F12.13. For the actual DC braking time, take the
 In V/F control mode, the inverter stops in ‘Decelerate to larger one between the time defined by Stopping DC
stop’ mode. Braking Time (F12.13) and the effective holding time of the
control terminal.
 In vector control mode, the inverter stops in ‘excitation
braking’ mode. 21: Closed loop prohibition
12: Coast to stop input (FRS) It is used to realize flexible switch between external process
closed loop operation and lower level of operation mode.
When the terminal function is enabled, the inverter stops
The priority of the operation modes are: jog operation >
output immediately, and the motor coasts to stop.
external process closed loop operation > simplified PLC
13, 14: Frequency increasing command (UP)/Frequency
function operation > multi-section speed operation >
decreasing command (DOWN)
ordinary operation.
The frequency is increased or decreased through the
Only upon external process closed loop operation (F17.00 =
control terminals instead of remote control via the operation
1) can the switch between external process closed loop
panel. When Set Main Frequency Source (F08.00) is
operation and lower level of operation mode be realized.
equal to 0, the function is valid. The acceleration and
When lower level of operation mode is switched to, the
deceleration rates are defined by Terminal UP
start/stop control, direction, acceleration and deceleration
Acceleration Rate (F18.09) and Terminal Down
time comply with the setting of the corresponding operation
Deceleration Rate (F18.10).
mode.
15: Running command of stopping simplified PLC function
22: Simplified PLC function prohibition
temporarily
It is used to realize flexible switch between simplified PLC
The terminal function is used to stop the simplified PLC
function operation and lower level of operation mode.
function process temporarily. When the terminal function is
enabled, the inverter will enter zero frequency standby state, Only upon simplified PLC function operation (Simplified
and the simplified PLC function operation will not be timed; PLC Function Operation Mode Selection F11.00 unit’s
after the terminal function is disabled, the inverter will start place ≠ 0) can the switch between simplified PLC function
on the fly automatically, and continue the simplified PLC operation and lower level of operation mode be realized.
function operation. When lower level of operation mode is switched to, the
16: Acceleration and deceleration prohibition command start/stop control, direction, acceleration and deceleration
time comply with the setting of the corresponding operation
The terminal function is used to keep the motor free of the
mode.
affect of external signals (excluding stop command), and to
maintain the fan running at current rotation speed. 23 ~ 25: Main frequency setting source selection 1/2/3
17: 3-line running control Through the state combination of frequency input channel
selecting terminals 1, 2, 3, you can realize switchover
Refer to the function introduction of the running mode 3, 4
among frequency input channels, as given in Table 7-5.
(3-line running mode 1, 2) in Set Running Mode (F18.08).
18, 19: External cut-off normally open/close contact input

Table 7-5 Main frequency setting source terminal selection Table 7-7 Multi-section closed loop input selection
Main frequency Main frequency Main frequency Multi- Multi- Multi-
Multi-
setting source setting source setting source Main frequency section section section
section Multi-section closed
selecting selecting selecting setting source closed closed closed
closed loop loop input selection
terminal 3 terminal 2 terminal 1 loop loop loop
terminal 1
Main frequency terminal 4 terminal 3 terminal 2
0 0 0 setting digital Closed loop input is
input (F08.01) 0 0 0 0 determined by
Input via touch F17.01
0 0 1
screen Multi-section closed
0 0 0 1
Input via loop input 1
0 1 0 UP/DOWN Multi-section closed
0 0 1 0
terminal loop input 2
Input via COM1 Multi-section closed
0 1 1 0 0 1 1
(factory debug) loop input 3
1 0 0 Input via COM2 Multi-section closed
0 1 0 0
Input via loop input 4
1 0 1
analog AI Multi-section closed
0 1 0 1
Internal preset loop input 5
1 1 0
input Multi-section closed
0 1 1 0
1 1 1 Invalid loop input 6
Multi-section closed
0 1 1 1
26: Main frequency setting switched to AI loop input 7
When the terminal function is enabled, the main frequency 1 0 0 0
loop input 8
setting channel is forced to be switched to AI input. As for
which route of AI, it depends on the setting of AI function 1 0 0 1
loop input 9
(F27 group), as shown in Figure 7-80 and Figure 7-81. After Multi-section closed
1 0 1 0
the terminal function is disabled, the frequency input loop input 10
channel is restored. Multi-section closed
1 0 1 1
loop input 11
27: Command switched to terminals
When the terminal function is enabled, the running 1 1 0 0
loop input 12
command channel is forced to be switched to terminal Multi-section closed
1 1 0 1
running command channel. After the terminal function is loop input 13
disabled, the running command channel is restored. Multi-section closed
1 1 1 0
loop input 14
28 ~ 30: Command source selection 1/2/3
Table 7-6 Running command terminal selection 1 1 1 1
loop input 15
Running Running Running Note: ‘Multi-section closed loop input 1 ~ 15’ in the table are
command command command defined by F17.19 ~ F17.33
Selecting result of
channel channel channel
command source
selecting selecting selecting 35: External stop command
terminal 3 terminal 2 terminal 1
The command is valid for all running command channels.
Control via control
0 0 1 When the function terminal is valid, the inverter will stop
cabinet
Control via multifunction
according to the setting of Stop Mode (F12.09).
0 1 0
terminal 36: Inverter operation prohibition
0 1 1 Control via COM1
When the function terminal is valid, the inverter in operation
1 0 0 Control via COM2
will coast to stop, and the inverter in stop mode will be
Other combinations Determined by F12.00
prohibited from startup. The function is used in the occasion
requiring security interaction.
31 ~ 34: Multi-section closed loop input terminal 1/2/3/4
37: Run forward prohibition
When the terminal function is enabled in the operating
process of ‘run forward’, the inverter will coast to stop. If the
function is enabled first, and then the inverter runs forward,
the inverter will enter zero frequency operation. ‘Run
reverse’ will not be affected by the function.

38: Run reverse prohibition Table 7-8 2-line control mode 1

Opposite to function 37, see the description of function 37. FWD terminal input REV terminal input Running command
40: Pre-excitation command terminal 0 0 Stop
0 1 Run reverse
When the terminal function is enabled, the motor
1 0 Run forward
pre-excitation will be started till the terminal function is
1 1 Stop
disabled.
41: Motor 1 and 2 switch terminal 2: 2-line control mode 2 (any two terminals in X1 ~ X8)
When the terminal function is enabled, the switch control of Table 7-9 2-line control mode 2
the two motors can be realized. FWD terminal input REV terminal input Running command
42 ~ 43: FWD/ REV 0 0 Stop
0 1 Stop
Run forward/reverse control terminal. Refer to the function
1 0 Run forward
introduction of various running modes in Set Running
1 1 Run reverse
Mode (F18.08).
44 ~ 46: Remote startup/stop/jog 3: 3-line control mode 1 (any three terminals in X1 ~ X8)
Dedicated terminal for remote startup/stop, which is valid Table 7-10 3-line control mode 1
when Set Running Mode (F18.08) is equal to 0.
3-line operation FWD REV
Running
47: Switching-on operation control terminal terminal terminal
command
input input input
Command terminal for switching-on operation of input high
0 X X Stop
voltage circuit breaker, which is valid when the
1 ↑ ↑ Keep origin
LOCAL-REMOTE selecting switch on the control panel is
1 ↑ X Run forward
set to ‘REMOTE’. Its function is the same as that of the
1 X ↑ Run reverse
PRECHARGE/SWITCH-ON button on the control panel.
Note:
48: Switching-off operation
X means no affect, ↑means positive skip, ↓ means negative
Command terminal for switching-off operation of input high skip
voltage circuit breaker, which is not affected by the state of
the LOCAL-REMOTE selecting switch on the control panel. 4: 3-line control mode 2 (any three terminals in X1 ~ X8)
49: Memory clearance upon stop of simplified PLC function Table 7-11 3-line control mode 2
In stop state of the simplified PLC function operation mode, 3-line operation FWD REV
Running
when the function terminal is enabled, the memory of PLC control terminal terminal terminal
command
operating phase, time, frequency and other information will input input input
0 X X Stop
be cleared upon stop of PLC. Please refer to the function
1 ↑ 1 Run reverse
introduction of F11 group (see Figure 7-28).
1 ↑ 0 Run forward
Set Running Mode: 0 ~ 4【0】 (F18.08)
Note:
↑means positive skip, ↓ means negative skip
The parameter defines five different modes of controlling the
inverter operation via external terminals.
50: Feedback signal of faulty bypass breaker
 Note Connecting point of bypass breaker feedback signal, used
FWD terminal input is defined by FXX; REV terminal input is for judging system state and detecting bypass fault. Refer to
defined by Fxx; three-line operation control terminal input is Appendix 3 Descriptions On System Automatic Bypass for
defined by FXX.
specific application.
0: Control via remote terminal 51: Feedback signal of faulty bypass output breaker
The multifunction terminals 44 ~ 46 can be used to Connecting point of output breaker feedback signal, used
complete the start/stop control of the inverter. The difference for judging system state and output breaker open fault.
between the mode and the following 1 ~ 3 modes is that the Refer to Appendix 3 Descriptions On System Automatic
mode does not need the state combination of the terminals, Bypass for specific application.
and single terminal controls single start/stop operation. 52 ~ 53: Multi-section acceleration / deceleration time
1: 2-line control mode 1 (any two terminals in X1 ~ X8) setting terminal 1 / 2
Used for selecting acceleration / deceleration time during
multi-section operation process (select one group from four
groups)

Table 7-12 Selecting acceleration / deceleration time In the switch system of frequency conversion - working
Terminal 1 Terminal 2 frequency, command input of switching working frequency
Running command
input input to frequency conversion.
Selecting the first group
0 0  Note
acceleration / deceleration time
Selecting the second group Refer to Appendix 5 Descriptions On Output Switch for specific
0 1
acceleration / deceleration time application of frequency conversion - working frequency and
Selecting the third group working frequency - frequency conversion functions.
1 0
acceleration / deceleration time
Selecting the fourth group 56: Pre-excitation cabinet protection
1 1
acceleration / deceleration time It is valid under synchronous machine control mode, and it
is inputted as fault signal of pre-excitation cabinet. When the
Clicking Parameter Settings -> Reference -> Multi
pre-excitation cabinet has a fault, the fault will be inputted to
Frequency Reference -> Next Page enters ‘Multi
the inverter by the signal.
Frequency Parameter Settings’ screen, as shown in
Terminal UP Acceleration Rate: 0.01 ~
Figure 7-41. (F18.09)
99.99Hz/s【1.00】
Terminal DOWN Deceleration Rate: 0.01 ~
(F18.10)
99.99Hz/s【1.00】
The function code defines the changing rate of the

frequency setting through UP/DOWN terminal.
External Terminal Filter Time: 0.0 ~ 500.0ms
(F18.11)
【10.0】
The function code sets the filter time of external input

terminal detection. When the input terminal state is changed,
and if it still keeps unchanged after the set filter time, the
change of the terminal state is considered valid, or else, the
Figure 7-72 ‘Multi Frequency Parameter Settings’ screen
terminal state will remain last state, thus reducing the
Multi Frequency Acceleration Time 1: 0.1 ~
(F12.41) misoperation caused by interference effectively.
3600.0s【60.0】
Input Terminal Enabled State: 000 ~ FFH
Multi Frequency Deceleration Time 1: 0.1 ~ (F18.12)
(F12.42) 【000】
3600.0s【60.0】
Multi Frequency Acceleration Time 2: 0.1 ~
(F12.43)
3600.0s【60.0】 Ten's Unit's
place place
Multi Frequency Deceleration Time 2: 0.1 ~
(F12.44)
3600.0s【60.0】
BIT0: positive and negative logic definition of X1
Multi Frequency Acceleration Time 3: 0.1 ~ BIT1: positive and negative logic definition of X2
(F12.45)
3600.0s【60.0】 BIT2: positive and negative logic definition of X3
(F12.46)
3600.0s【60.0】 BIT0: positive and negative logic definition of X5
Multi Frequency Acceleration Time 4: 0.1 ~ BIT1: positive and negative logic definition of X6
(F12.47) BIT2: positive and negative logic definition of X7
3600.0s【60.0】
(F12.48) Figure 7-73 Terminal positive and negative logic setting
3600.0s【60.0】
The function code defined the positive and negative logic of
 Note input terminal.
Refer to F12.27 for the definition of accelerating time, and refer to Positive logic: the connection between Xi terminals and
F12.28 for the definition of decelerating time. corresponding common terminals is valid, and the
disconnection is invalid;
54: Frequency conversion to working frequency
Negative logic: the connection between Xi terminals and
In the switch system of frequency conversion - working corresponding common terminals is invalid, and the
frequency, command input of switching frequency disconnection is valid.
conversion to working frequency.
When BIT is set to 0, it means positive logic; When BIT is
55: Working frequency to frequency conversion set to 1, it means negative logic.

Setting Corresponding function Setting Corresponding function

18 Remote control 19 Local control
20 RUN indicator 21 CHARGING indicator
22 ALARM indicator 23 FAULT indicator
Soft start bypass Soft start output
24 25
closing command opening command
26 Severe fault 27 Minor fault
Faulty bypass closing Output breaker closing
28 29
command command
Working in frequency Working in automatic
30 31
conversion bypass
Severe fault of belt Minor fault of belt
32 33
parallel system parallel system
Figure 7-74 Digital Output Parameter Settings 1
Closing bypass contact
from frequency
34 Brake release signal 35
conversion to working
frequency
Opening output contact Opening bypass
from frequency contact from working
36 37
conversion to working frequency to frequency
frequency conversion
Closing output contact
from working frequency Control command of
38 39
to frequency excitation cabinet
conversion
Allowing manual
40 Inverter ready signal 41
closing signal
Figure 7-75 Digital Output Parameter Settings 2 42 ~ 50 Reserved
Clicking the Digital Output button on the ‘I/O’ screen shown Note: For function number 20 ~ 23, it is recommended to use
transistor output. The signals without special desacription are all
in Figure 7-69 enters the ‘Digital Output Parameter Settings’
level signals
screen, as shown in Figure 7-74 and Figure 7-75.
Relay Output Yi (i = 1 ~ 8): 0 ~ 35【0】 (F19.00 ~ F19.07)
The function introduction is as follows:
0: Signal in inverter operation (RUN)
The functions of Y1 ~ Y8 relay output terminals and Y11 ~
Y18 transistor output terminals are selectable, as given in When the inverter is in operating state, the indication signal
Table 7-13. It is allowed to select the same function is outputted.
repeatedly for different output terminals. 1: Frequency arrived signal (FAR)
Table 7-13 Fucntion selection list of output terminals Refer to the function description of Frequency Reached
Setting Corresponding function Setting Corresponding function (FAR) Detection Width (F19.25).
Signal in inverter Frequency arrived 2: Frequency level detection signal (FDT1)
0 1
operation (RUN) signal (FAR)
Refer to the function description of F19.26 ~ F19.28.
Frequency level Frequency level
2 3
detection signal (FDT1) detection signal (FDT2) 3: Frequency level detection signal (FDT2)
Overload detection Refer to the function description of F19.29 ~ F19.31.
4 5 Reserved
signal (OL)
4: Overload detection signal (OL)
Stop upon external Frequency high limit
6 7
fault (EXT) (FHL) Inverter overload indication signal, used for overload
Frequency low limit Inverter running at zero warning.
8 9
(FLL) speed
5: Reserved.
Indication for Indication for
completing operation in completing circulation 6: Stop upon external fault (EXT)
10 11
simplified PLC function of simplified PLC When the inverter has external faults, the indication signal is
phase function outputted.
Ready for inverter
12 Inverter alarm 13 7: Frequency high limit (FHL)
operation (RDY)
Power unit in bypass When the frequency setting is not lower than (≥) ‘Frequency
14 Inverter fault 15
operation high limit’, and the running frequency reaches the frequency
Indication terminal of high limit, the indication signal is outputted.
16 17 Flux detection signal
motor 1 and 2
8: Frequency low limit (FLL)

When the frequency setting is not larger than (≤) ‘Frequency State indication of CHARGING indicator on the control panel
low limit’, and the running frequency reaches the frequency 22: ALARM indicating signal
low limit, the indication signal is outputted.
Alarm indication state
9: Inverter running at zero speed
23: FAULT indicator
When the inverter is in zero frequency standby state, the
State indication of FAULT indicator on the control panel
indication signal is outputted.
24: Soft start bypass closing command
10: Indication for completing operation in simplified PLC
function phase Soft startup function, output signal of switching to bypass
command (500ms pulse signal)
After the operation in current phase of simplified PLC
function is completed, the indication signal is outputted Refer to Appendix 5 Descriptions On Multi-Split Soft
(single pulse signal, width: 500ms). Startup for specific application.
11: Indication for completing circulation of simplified PLC 25: Soft start output opening command
function Soft startup function, output signal of inverter output breaker
After the simplified PLC function completes an operating opening. (500ms pulse signal)
circulation, the indication signal is outputted (single pulse Refer to Appendix 5 Descriptions On Multi-Split Soft
signal, width: 500ms). Startup for specific application.
12: Inverter alarm 26: Severe fault
When the inverter has an alarm, the indication signal is Output signal of inverter severe fault (F2). High level signal
outputted. 27: Minor fault
13: Ready for inverter operation (RDY) Output signal of inverter minor fault (F1). High level signal
If the signal output is valid, it means the inverter has no 28: Faulty bypass closing command
faults, the input high voltage circuit breaker closes, the
Output signal of switching to system bypass command upon
‘inverter running prohibition’ terminal is invalid, and the
inverter fault (500ms pulse signal)
inverter can receive the startup command.
29: Output breaker closing command
14: Inverter fault
When the system automatic bypass function is enabled,
When the inverter has a fault, the indication signal is
after power-on and self-test are completed, the ‘output
outputted.
breaker closing command’ is sent to close the output
15: Power unit in bypass operation breaker. (500ms pulse signal)
When the inverter has a power unit fault and is transferred 30: Working in frequency conversion
to the power unit bypass operation mode, the indication
Output signal of frequency-conversion working state when
signal is outputted.
the system automatic bypass function is enabled
16: Indication terminal of motor 1 and 2
31: Working in automatic bypass
The corresponding indication signal is outputted according
Output signal of bypass working state when the system
to the selected motor: OFF state means motor 1; ON state
automatic bypass function is enabled
means motor 2.
32: Severe fault of belt parallel system
17: Flux detection signal
Output signal of severe fault occurring to belt conveyer
When the flux detected value exceeds the Flux Detected
parallel system, refer to Appendix 6 Descriptions On Belt
Value (F19.32), the indication signal is outputted.
Conveyor Control for specific application.
18: Remote control
33: Minor fault of belt parallel system
When the LOCAL-REMOTE selecting switch is set to
Output signal of minor fault occurring to belt conveyer
‘REMOTE’, the indication signal is outputted.
parallel system, refer to Appendix 6 Descriptions On Belt
19: Local control Conveyor Control for specific application.
When the LOCAL-REMOTE selecting switch is set to 34: Brake release signal
‘LOCAL’, the indication signal is outputted.
Signal of controlling release of brake device in lift control
20: RUN indicator system. (500ms pulse signal)
State indication of RUN indicator on the control panel 35: Closing bypass contact from frequency conversion to
21: CHARGING indicating signal working frequency
It is pulse signal during pre-charging process, and is level
signal after charging ends.

Closing signal of control bypass contactor in switch system
Thousand's place
Hundred's place
between frequency conversion and working frequency
Unit's place
Ten's place
(500ms pulse signal)
36: Opening output contact from frequency conversion to
working frequency BIT0: positive and negative logic definition of Y1
BIT1: positive and negative logic definition of Y2
Opening signal of control output contactor in switch system BIT2: positive and negative logic definition of Y3
between frequency conversion and working frequency BIT3: positive and negative logic definition of Y4
(500ms pulse signal) BIT0: positive and negative logic definition of Y5
37: Opening bypass contact from working frequency to BIT1: positive and negative logic definition of Y6
frequency conversion BIT3: positive and negative logic definition of Y8
Opening signal of control bypass contactor in switch system
(500ms pulse signal) BIT2: positive and negative logic definition of Y13
38: Closing output contact from working frequency to
frequency conversion BIT0: positive and negative logic definition of Y15
Closing signal of control output contactor in switch system BIT2: positive and negative logic definition of Y17
(500ms pulse signal) Figure 7-77 Output terminal enabled status setting
39: Control command of excitation cabinet The function code defined the positive and negative logic of
When controlled by synchronous machine, used for starting output terminal. Positive logic: when the software outputs
up and stopping excitation cabinet control signal, the output relay terminal is high level; when
40: Inverter ready signal the software cancels control signal, the output relay terminal
is low level. Negative logic: the relay output level is
When the inverter is powered on, passes self-detect, and
opposite.
enabling pre-charging, this signal is outputted.
When BIT is set to 0, it means positive logic; When BIT is
41: Allowing manual closing signal
set to 1, it means negative logic.
Signal that the inverter outputs closing command, related to Transistor Yi Output (i = 11 ~ 18): 0 ~ 35
closing pulse width. In manual closing mode, when the (F19.08 ~ F19.15)
【0】
signal is outputted, you can perform manual closing.
Relay I Output Delay (i=1 ~ 8): 0.1 ~ For the function selection, see Table 7-13 and the
(F19.17 ~ F19.24)
10.0s【0.1】 description for details.
Frequency Reached Detection Width:
This function code describes output delay of the functions (F19.25)
0.00 ~ 120.00Hz【2.50】
defined by relay Y1 ~ Y8.
The parameter is the complementary definition of No.1
function (FAR) in Table 7-13. As shown in Figure 7-78, when
the output frequency of the inverter is within the positive and
negative detection width of the frequency setting, FAR
outputs a pulse signal.
Output
Frequency Detection
setting width
Figure 7-76 Schematic diagram of relay output delay Time

Y
Output Terminal Enabled Status: 0000 ~
(F19.16)
FFFFH【0000】 Time
Figure 7-78 Schematic diagram of frequency reached signal output
FDT1 Detection Mode: 0 ~ 1【0】 (F19.26)

FDT1 Level: 0.00 ~ 120.00Hz【50.00】 (F19.27)
FDT1 Delay: 0.00 ~ 120.00Hz【1.00】 (F19.28)
FDT2 Detection Mode: 0 ~ 1【0】 (F19.29)

FDT2 Level: 0.00 ~ 120.00Hz【50.00】 (F19.30)

FDT2 Delay: 0.00 ~ 120.00Hz【1.00】 (F19.31)
F19.26 ~ F19.28 are the complementary definition of No.2

function (FDT1) in Table 7-11. F19.29 ~ F19.31 are the
complementary definition of No.3 (FDT2) function in Table
7-11. The usage of them is the same. The following takes
F19.26 ~ F19.28 as an example to introduce the usage.
First set FDT1 Detection Mode (F19.26) to confirm the
source of frequency setting:
0: speed setting (frequency command after acceleration and
deceleration) Figure 7-81 Analog Input Parameter Settings 2
1: speed detected value Clicking the Analog Input button on the ‘I/O’ screen shown
When the output frequency exceeds the frequency setting in Figure 7-69 enters the ‘Analog Input Parameter Settings’
(FDT1 level), an indication signal is being outputted till the screen, as shown in Figure 7-80 and Figure 7-81.
output frequency reduces to a certain frequency (FDT1 level Transducer Output Type: 000 ~ 111H【000】 (F27.00)
- FDT1 delay) lower than the FDT1 level, as shown in
Figure 7-79. Set the parameter according to the output type of analog
input channel transducer U1 ~ U3 configured inside the
Output frequency
inverter; the analog input channel transducer of standard
inverter is voltage output.
FDT1 level FDT1 delay
Note: this parameter means signal type from the transducer
output to the analog IO board.
Time
Hundred's Ten's Unit's
Y
place place place
Time
AI1 transducer output type
Figure 7-79 Schematic diagram of frequency level detection 0: -10V ~ 10V
1: 4mA ~ 20mA
Flux Detected Value: 10.0 ~ 100.0%【100.0】 (F19.32)
AI2 transducer output type
0: -10V ~ 10V
Used together with NO.17 function of digital output terminal. 1: 4mA ~ 20mA
The parameter is a percentage related to motor rated flux. AI3 transducer output type
0: -10V ~ 10V
1: 4mA ~ 20mA
Figure 7-82 Selection of transducer output type
Unit’s place: AI1

0: Voltage output
1: Current output
Ten’s place: AI2
0: Voltage output
1: Current output
Hundred’s place: AI3
Figure 7-80 Analog Input Parameter Settings 1
0: Voltage output
1: Current output
AI4 is the differential voltage input. Only the transducer of
voltage output type can be connected with the front end.
(F27.01, F27.06,
Set AIi (i=1 ~ 4) Function: 0 ~ 4【0】
F27.11, F27.16)
0: No function
1: Main frequency setting input

When selecting the function, use it together with F08.00 AI input inner value(V)
function code. When it is used as voltage input, the polarity
10
of analog input affects the running direction of the inverter:
when the analog input is positive, the inverter runs forward,
otherwise, the inverter runs reversely. AI1 ~ AI3 receive 4mA
~ 20mA current signal, and the corresponding inside voltage -10 0 10
is 0 ~ 10V; AI4 receives -10V ~ +10V voltage signal, and the External analog
corresponding inside voltage is -10V ~ +10V voltage signal. input value (V)
F27.02 = -50.0%
The maximum value of analog input (10V/20mA)
corresponds to the maximum output frequency (F08.10) of
the inverter. -10
2 ~ 4: Reversed Figure 7-84 Rectification mode of ‘Lower than zero drift, so it is equal
AIi (i = 1 ~ 4) Zero Drift Rectification: (F27.02, F27.07, to zero drift’
-100.0% ~ 100.0%【0.0】 F27.12, F27.17)
AIi (i = 1 ~ 4) Input Gain: -10.00 ~ 10.00 AI input inner value(V)
(F27.03, F27.08,
【1.00】 F27.13, F27.18) 10
AIi (i = 1 ~ 4) Filter Time: 0.01 ~ 10.00s (F27.04, F27.09,
【1.00】 F27.14, F27.19)
The analog input zero drift takes the maximum input as -10 0 10
100% (10V or 20mA), and uses percentage as unit to set External analog
input value (V)
the upper and lower translation value of analog input.
Taking voltage input as an example, the regulation relation
F27.02 = -50.0%
between before and after regulation via zero drift and gain is
-10
as follows:
Figure 7-85 Rectification mode of ‘Higher than zero drift, so it is
AI input value = input gain × analog input value + zero drift
equal to zero drift’
rectification × 10V
AIi (i = 1 ~ 4) Filter Time is the channel filter time constant, AI input inner value(V)
performing filter handling over the input signal. The longer 10
the filter time is, the stronger the immunity is, but the
response gets slower; the shorter the filter time is, the
quicker the response is, but the immunity gets weaker.
AIi (i = 1 ~ 4) Zero Drift Rectification (F27.05, F27.10, -10 10
Mode: 0 ~ 3【0】 F27.15, F27.20) 0 External analog
input value (V)
F27.02 = -50.0%
0: Taking zero drift as center
1: Lower than zero drift, so it is equal to zero drift
-10
2: Higher than zero drift, so it is equal to zero drift
Figure 7-86 Rectification mode of ‘Taking zero drift as center and
3: Taking zero drift as center and taking the absolute value
taking the absolute value’
Taking AI1 as an example, the definitions of four values are
respectively shown in Figure 7-83 ~ Figure 7-86.  Note
The function codes of input gain and zero drift rectification affect
AI input inner value(V)
the analog input in real time during the modification process.
10
-10 0 10
External analog
input value (V)
F27.02 = -50.0%
-10
Figure 7-83 Rectification mode of taking zero drift as center

(F28.01, F28.05,
Set AOi (i = 1 ~ 4) function: 0 ~ 20【0】
F28.09, F28.13)
0: Output frequency (0 ~ max. output frequency)

1: Frequency setting (0 ~ max. output frequency)
2: Frequency setting after acceleration and deceleration (0 ~
max. output frequency)
3: Rotation speed of the motor (0 ~ max. rotation speed)
4: Output current (0 ~ two times as large as the rated
current of the inverter)
5: Output current (0 ~ two times as large as the rated
Figure 7-87 Analog Output Parameter Settings
current of the motor)
Clicking the Analog Output button on the ‘I/O’ screen
6: Output torque (0 ~ three times as large as the rated
shown in Figure 7-69 enters the ‘Analog Output Parameter
torque of the motor)
Settings’ screen, as shown in Figure 7-87.
7: Output torque current (0 ~ three times as large as the
Transducer Input Type: 0000 ~ 1111H【0000】 (F28.00)
rated torque of the motor)
Set the parameter according to the output type of analog 8: Output voltage (0 ~ 1.2 times as large as the rated
output channel transducer U5 ~ U8 configured inside the voltage of the inverter)
inverter; the analog output channel transducer of standard 9: AI1 (0 ~ max. analog input)
inverter is current output. 10: AI2 (0 ~ max. analog input)
Note: this parameter means signal type from the analog IO 11: AI3 (0 ~ max. analog input)
board to the transducer input.
12: AI4 (analog differential input 0 ~ 10V)
Thousand's Hundred's Ten's Unit's 13: Output power (0 ~ two times as large as the rated power
place place place place
of the motor)
AO1 transducer input type 14 ~ 20: Reserved
0: 0 ~ 10V
1: 0 ~ 20mA  Note
AO2 transducer input type 1. When the corresponding functions of AO output are all of
0: 0 ~ 10V single polarity, the absolute value of indication value
1: 0 ~ 20mA corresponding to min. output is smallest; the absolute value of
indication value corresponding to max. output is largest.
AO3 transducer input type
0: 0 ~ 10V 2. The AO output of the machine is DC current signal. You must
1: 0 ~ 20mA select the current-type ammeter.
AO4 transducer input type
0: 0 ~ 10V (F28.02, F28.06,
AOi (i = 1 ~ 4) Filter Time: 0.0 ~ 20.0s【0.1】
1: 0 ~ 20mA F28.10, F28.14)
(F28.03, F28.07,
Figure 7-88 Selection of analog output type AOi (i = 1 ~ 4) Gain: 0.0% ~ 200.0%【100.0】
F28.11, F28.15)
Unit’s place: AO1 selection AOi (i = 1 ~ 4) Zero Drift Rectification: (F28.04, F28.08,
0: Voltage output -100.0% ~ 100.0%【0】 F28.12, F28.16)
1: Current output
AO output filter is used to set the AO analog output filter
Ten’s place: AO2 selection time constant. The longer the filter time is, the slower the
0: Voltage output analog output response is; the shorter the filter time is, the
1: Current output quicker the analog output response is.
Hundred’s place: AO3 selection If you need to change the display range or correct the
ammeter error, you can realize it through regulating the
0: Voltage output
output gain.
1: Current output
The analog output zero drift takes the max. output as 100%
Thousand’s place: AO4 selection (10V or 20mA), and uses percentage as unit to set the
0: Voltage output upper and lower translation value of analog output.
1: Current output Taking output voltage as an example, the regulation relation
between before and after regulation is as follows:

AO output value = output gain × value before regulation +

zero drift rectification × 10V
Taking AO1 as an example, the relation curve between
analog output and gain is shown in Figure 7-89. The relation
curve between analog output and zero drift rectification is
Value after regulation (V)

10
F28.03 = 200%
F28.03 = 100%
-10 -5 5 10 Figure 7-92 COM1 Communication Parameter Settings

0 Value before The ‘Communication parameter’ screen shown in
regulation (V)
Figure 7-91 lists the access buttons for parameter setting
screens related to serial communication port COM1 and
COM2.
-10
Local Parameter is used to set local address and local
Figure 7-89 Relation curve between analog output and gain response relay time.
External Serial Communication function is reserved for
Value after regulation (V)
factory debug.
10
F28.04 = 50% COM1 is for factory debug. COM2 is for the user to use.
F28.04 = 0
Clicking the COM1 Communication button enters the
5
‘COM1 Communication Parameter Settings’ screen, as
-10 5 10 shown in Figure 7-92. The setting method of COM2
0 Value before Communication is the same, and elided in the following.
regulation (V)
Set Protocol: 0 ~ 1【0】 (F30.02)
0: MODBUS
-10
1: Reserved
Figure 7-90 Relation curve between analog output and zero drift
Baud Rate Selection: 0 ~ 6【4】 (F30.03)
rectification
0: 9600BPS
7.2.7 Communication
1: 19200BPS
2: 38400BPS
3: 57600BPS
4: 115200BPS
5: 125000BPS
6: 230400BPS
Data Format Selection: 0 ~ 5【0】 (F30.04)
0: 1-8-2-N format, RTU

1: 1-8-1-E format, RTU
2: 1-8-1-O format, RTU
Figure 7-91 Communication parameter
3: 1-7-2-N format, ASCII
4: 1-7-1-E format, ASCII
5: 1-7-1-O format, ASCII
Communication Overtime Detected
(F30.06)
Time: 0.0 ~ 1000.0s【0.0】
When the communication signal of the serial port

disappears, and the holding time exceeds the setting of the

function code, the inverter is judged to have a

7.3 Operation Monitoring
communication fault.
When the setting is 0, the inverter will not detect the
communication signal of the serial port, that is, the function 7.3.1 Inverter Status
is invalid.
1) Input and output status
7.2.8 User-Defined
Figure 7-95 Input status
Figure 7-93 User-defined parameter setting 1
Figure 7-96 Output status
The screens are used to monitor the input and output status
Figure 7-94 User-defined parameter setting 2
of the inverter, including voltage, current and frequency. The
Figure 7-93 and Figure 7-94 are the setting screens of status indicators in lower part of the screens are defined as
‘User-defined parameter’. You can send user-defined follows:
analog value (such as motor temperature, fan shaft and so  Run: the inverter is running
on) to the inverter through the communication mode (refer
 Run reverse: the inverter output runs reversely
to function codes F16.00 ~ F16.07). Figure 7-93 is the
display and monitoring screen of corresponding analog  Zero speed: the inverter is in zero frequency standby
input value. Figure 7-94 is used to set enabling or masking status
operations as for various user-defined faults and alarms of  Acceleration: the inverter is running in accelerating status
user-defined analog value (refer to function codes F16.08,  Deceleration: the inverter is running in decelerating status
F16.09).
 Constant speed: the inverter is running at constant speed
 Note  In pre-excitation: the inverter is in pre-excitation
The threshold setting of user-defined faults and alarms, and the  Adjustment: the inverter is in self-adjusting control of
comparative logic are to be completed externally (such as in the
motor parameters
selected PLC). The setting in Figure 7-92 only enables or masks
corresponding faults and warnings. After the setting, please press  Frequency conversion: output signal of automatic bypass
the Confirm button to confirm it. function in frequency conversion mode
 Current limited: the output current of the inverter is
7.2.9 Service subject to overcurrent limit
 Over voltage: the power unit bus voltage of the inverter
Service parameters are not open to the user. has overvoltage

 Torque amplitude limiting: the output torque amplitude of The screen shows the sampled values of AI channel after
the inverter is limited gain, filter and zero drift regulation.
 Speed amplitude limiting: the output speed amplitude of AO Output: 0.0% ~ 100.0%【0】 (F01.36 ~ F01.39)
the inverter is limited
The screen shows the real-time output value of four AO
 Fault: the inverter has a fault (minor fault or severe fault)
channels in percentage format. The basic value is 10V or
 Speed control: the inverter is in speed control mode
20mA.
 Power unit bypass: the inverter is in power unit bypass
The status indicators in the lower part of the screen indicate
operation mode
the current status of multifunction input digital terminals X1
 Phase locked: the inverter outputs the signal when it ~ X8, multifunction output terminals Y1 ~ Y8 and Y11 ~ Y18.
completes phase lock of the output and the grid.
4) Command monitoring
 Sys-bypass: output signal of automatic bypass function in
bypass mode
2) Temperature monitoring
The screen shows the cabinet temperature and A/B/C
3-phase temperature of the phase-shifting transformer.
Figure 7-99 Command monitoring
The screen shows the Control Master (F01.48), Speed

Control Mode (F01.49), Main Frequency Source (F01.00),
Main Frequency (F01.01), Set Frequency (F01.03),
Frequency CMD (F01.04), and the percentages of Close
Figure 7-97 Temperature monitoring Loop Input (F01.40), Close Loop Feedback (F01.41),
3) I/O status monitoring Close Loop Tolerance (F01.42) and Close Loop Output
(F01.43).
Main Frequency is the directly-obtained frequency through
the user-selected frequency channel; Set Frequency is final
frequency after adjustment, if not adjusted, the Set
Frequency is the same as the Main Frequency; Frequency
CMD is actual input frequency that controls current output
frequency during actual operation.
Close Loop Input, Close Loop Feedback, and Close Loop
Output are all percentages related to full-range.
 Note
The Control Master and Main Frequency Source can be
Figure 7-98 I/O status monitoring modified through various modes (touch screen, terminals and
communication mode). The final modificated result is displayed in
AI Input: -10.00 ~ 10.00V【0】 (F01.28 ~ F01.31) the corresponding item of the screen.
The screen shows the analog values sampled by the AI

channel in real time. 7.3.2 Motor Status
If it is current signal input, 0 ~ 10V is displayed here
The screen shows the motor running status parameters,
corresponding to 4mA ~ 20mA;
including Torque Current (F02.00), Excitation Current
If it is voltage signal input, actual valve is displayed here (F02.01), Output Torque (F02.02), Torque Input (F02.07),
corresponding to -10.00V ~ +10.00V. Motor Output Power (F02.03), Motor Estimated
Regulated AI Input: -10.00 ~ 10.00V【0】 (F01.32 ~ F01.35) Frequency (F02.04), Motor Actual Frequency (F02.05),
Motor Speed (F02.08) and so on.

High Voltage CB Switching Mode after precharging can

be selected as ‘Auto’ or ‘Manual’:
 When ‘Auto’ is selected, after the precharging and all
self-test operations are completed, the inverter will cut off
the precharging auxiliary winding loop, and close the
input high voltage circuit breaker automatically. The
closing signal output pulse width is 500ms by default.
 When ‘Manual’ is selected, after the precharging and all
self-test operations are completed, the inverter will cut off
the precharging auxiliary winding loop, and the MAIN
POWER indicator will turn off, waiting the user to close
Figure 7-100 Motor status the input high voltage circuit breaker through external
switching device. You should complete the switching-on
7.3.3 Power Unit Status operation in set period (5s by default), to avoid input
current impact. You can use 41# function of the
The screen shows the input voltage of each power unit of multi-function output terminal to complete manual
the inverter, the current value of bus voltage (F03.00 ~ closing.
F03.95), and the bypass status of the power unit (F01.54 ~
 For ‘Auto’ or ‘Manual’ closing mode, the pulse width of
F01.56, if configured with bypass options).
output closing signal can be set by factory parameters.
In ‘Auto’ or ‘Manual’ mode, after the input high voltage circuit
breaker is successfully switched on, the MAIN POWER
indicator and CHARGING indicator on the control panel will
be on.
7.3.5 Energy Saving Calculation
Figure 7-101 Power unit status
7.3.4 Running Control
Figure 7-103 Energy saving calculation

Total Power on Time: 0 ~ 65535*65535
(F01.50 ~ F01.51)
(hour)【0】
The screen shows the total time that the inverter is powered
on with high voltage from the delivery time to now.
Total Energy-saving Running Time: 0 ~
(F01.52)
65535 (hour)【0】
Figure 7-102 Running control Actual Electricity Consumption: 0 ~
(F01.53)
65535 (10,000 kWh)【0】
The screen is used to display the start/stop status. When
the running command channel is selected as ‘Control via
Total Energy-saving Running Time is the total time that the
control cabinet’, you can perform start/stop control through
inverter is in operating status.
the Start Motor, Stop Motor, Jog, Jog Direction buttons
on the screen. F01.52 and F01.53 are used together to add up the actual
electricity consumption (F01.53) of the inverter within a
The buttons of Clear Fault and High Voltage CB
certain time (F01.52), facilitating energy-saving calculation.
Switching Mode after precharging are not affected by the
selection of running command channel.

The Clear time to 0 button is used to clear F01.52 and

7.4 Event Log
F01.53.
Unit Electricity Fee: 0 ~ 655.36 (RMB)【0】 The event log screen is used to display and record faults,
alarms and related events during operation.
You can type the value according to actual condition.
Reference Electricity Consumption:【0】
You can type the data of reference electricity consumption

within the time (F01.52) before the inverter is installed.
Saved Electricity Consumption: 【0】
Saved Electricity Expense: 【0】
The inverter will calculate the saved electricity consumption

and saved electricity expense automatically according to the
above parameters. The calculating format is as follows:
Saved electricity consumption = Reference electricity
Figure 7-104 Event Log
consumption - Actual electricity consumption
Refer to Chapter 8 Fault Descriptions And Handling for the
Saved electricity expense = Unit electricity fee × Saved
fault & alarm contents and troubleshooting methods.
electricity consumption
The event names displayed by the inverter and their
descriptions are given in Table 7-14.
Table 7-14 Event names and descriptions
Event names Event descriptions Note
The remote command channel (multifunction terminals,
Affected by the selection of command
Remote switching-on COM2 communictaion) sends the precharging/switching-on
channel
operation command
Remote switching-off COM2 communictaion) sends the precharging/switching-off Valid for any command channel
operation command
Affected by the selection of command
Remote startup COM1 and COM2 communictaion) sends the startup
channel
command
The remote command channel (multifunction terminals, Affected by the selection of command
Remote stop
COM1 and COM2 communictaion) sends the stop command channel
The remote command channel (multifunction terminals, Affected by the selection of command
Remote jog
COM1 communictaion) sends the jog command channel
Clear faults Operation of clearing faults Valid for any command channel
Operating the PRECHARGE/SWITCH-ON button on the Affected by the selection of command
Local precharging
control panel channel
The local command channel (control via control cabinet) Affected by the selection of command
Local startup
sends the startup command channel
Local stop
sends the stop command channel
Local jog
sends the jog command channel
The switching-on feedback signal of input high voltage CB is If ‘High voltage CB close’ and ‘High
High voltage CB close
in ON state voltage CB open’ are both displayed at the
The switching-on feedback signal of input high voltage CB is same time, it indicates that the feedback
High voltage CB open
in OFF state and the input voltage is lower than 1kV signal of high voltage CB is faulty
The bus voltage of at least one power unit is lower than
Power unit bus voltage low /
800V
Power unit bus voltage
The bus voltages of all power units are larger than 800V /
recovery
Power unit self detection The precharging and self-test operations of the power unit
/
completion are completed
Non-stopping process upon The inverter is in non-stopping process upon instantaneous Valid when ‘Non-stopping upon
instantaneous power failure power failure instantaneous power failure’ is enabled

Chapter 8 Fault Descriptions And Handling 125
Chapter 8 Fault Descriptions And Handling
This chapter introduces the classification and handling method of the inverter faults, and gives detailed descriptions
on the maintenance method of various kinds of faults.
Before seeking the factory service, please follow the content in this chapter to perform self-check, and record detailed
fault phenomena. When factory service is needed, please call customer service hotline: 4008876510.
8.1 Descriptions Of Alarms And Faults

All arisen faults of the inverter are divided into seven kinds as follows:
1. Input side fault 2. Output side fault 3. Motor side fault 4. Inverter system fault
5. Configuration fault 6. Communication fault 7. Power unit fault
The internal monitoring unit of the inverter classifies all information into three kinds: respectively alarm (A), minor fault
(F1) and severe fault (F2).
Alarm
Alarm: information needing attention of the maintenance personnel, including input under voltage alarm, transformer
overheat alarm and so on (see Table 8-1 for details). The handling method of alarms is as follows:
1. The inverter keeps operating upon alarms.
2. The alarm relay takes action, the control panel displays the alarm.
3. The alarm information is recorded and can be queried through the local touch screen.
4. After the alarm disappears, the alarm relay and the alarm indicator are automatically reset.
5. Some alarms can be enabled by the user, and their protection action points are open to the user, you can set them
according to actual needs.
Alarm requires people’s attention, but not necessary interference.
Minor fault (F1)

Minor fault: the information needing repair of the maintenance personnel, such as encoder signal loss, power unit
bypass fault and so on (see Table 8-1 for details). In this case, the inverter allows physical hardware damage, but
operates without some functions or with reduced performance. The handling method of minor faults is as follows:
1. The inverter can operate without some functions or with reduced performance upon minor faults.
2. The fault relay takes action, the control panel displays the fault, and the FAULT indicator blinks (red).
3. The fault information is recorded and can be queried through the local touch screen.
4. The fault cannot be automatically reset, after the fault disappears, press the RESET button on the control panel to
reset the fault.
Any faults involving physical hardware damage such as component damage must be handled in power-off state.
5. Some minor faults can be enabled by the user, and their protection action points are open to the user, you can set
them according to actual needs.
Severe fault (F2)

Severe fault: the information needing repair of the maintenance personnel, such as transformer overheat protection,
output over current, power unit fault and so on. In this case, the inverter cannot operate. The system fault will prohibit
the inverter output. The power unit fault will prohibit IGBT output of the power unit (see Table 8-1 for details). The
handling method of severe faults is as follows:
1. The IGBT output is blocked and the inverter stops output upon severe faults.
2. The fault relay takes action, the control panel displays the fault, and the FAULT indicator turns on (red).
3. The fault information is recorded and can be queried through the local touch screen.

126 Chapter 8 Fault Descriptions And Handling
4. The fault cannot be automatically reset, after the fault disappears, press the RESET button on the control panel to
reset the fault.
Any faults involving physical hardware damage such as component damage must be handled in power-off state.
5. Some severe faults can be enabled by the user, and their protection action points are open to the user, you can set
them according to actual needs.
6. After the severe fault occurs, the shutdown mode is ‘free shutdown’ or ‘decelerate to shutdown’.
8.2 Fault Handling

The faults, alarms of the inverter and their handling methods are given in Figure 8-1.
Table 8-1 Faults, alarms and their handling methods
User enabling User selecting
Fault Fault × Unselectable
Fault name ■ Yes Handling methods
source type ● Default
□ No
○ Selectable
1. Check the input voltage, adjust the tap position of the
Input voltage phase-shifting transformer, and reduce the input voltage
■ A ×
high of the inverter properly
2. Seek factory service
Input over A ● phase-shifting transformer, and reduce the input voltage
■
voltage of the inverter properly
F2 ○ 2. Seek factory service
Input voltage phase-shifting transformer, and reduce the input voltage
□ F2 ×
high limit of the inverter properly
phase-shifting transformer, and increase the input
A ● voltage of the inverter properly
Input voltage 2. Check if the connection screws of the 3-phase inlet
■
low cables are loosened
3. Check if the secondary side of the phase-shifting
F2 ○ transformer is short-circuited
1. Check if the high voltage input circuit breaker is open
Input
2. Check if the connection screws of the 3-phase inlet
side fault
Input voltage cables are loosened
□ F2 ●
low limit 3. Check if the secondary side of the phase-shifting
transformer is short-circuited
1. Check if the high voltage input circuit breaker is open
A ● 2. Check if the connection screws of the 3-phase inlet
Input phase cables are loosened
■
imbalance 3. Check if the secondary side of the phase-shifting
F2 ○ transformer is short-circuited
1. Check if the phase-shifting transformer is
Input over short-circuited
□ F2 ×
current 2. Check the power unit and the cable insulation
1. Check the phase sequence of the inverter input cable
Input phase
□ F1 ● 2. Check the cable connection of the voltage mutual
reverse
inductor
Input under 1. Check the input voltage and frequency of the inverter
□ A ×
frequency 2. Seek factory service
Input over 1. Check the input voltage and frequency of the inverter
□ A ×
frequency 2. Seek factory service


□ No
○ Selectable
1. Set the inverter or motor parameters correctly
2. Check if any loads are increased or decreased in a
sudden, check if motor stalling happens
Output over
□ F2 × 3. Check the power unit and the cable insulation
current
4. Check the motor or the output cable insulation, check
if the three phases are all grounded (such as the
grounding knife-blade status)
Inverter 1. Decrease the loads
overload ■ A × 2. Check if the power grid voltage is too low
warning 3. Set the inverter or motor parameters correctly
1. Decrease the loads
Output
Inverter 2. Check if the power grid voltage is too low
side fault
overload □ F2 × 3. Set the inverter or motor parameters correctly
protection 4. Check if the connection between the analog IO board
or the main control board and the backboard is loosened
Output phase A ● 1. Check the installation and wiring
□
imbalance F2 ○ 2. Check the motor and its cables
Output phase 1. Check the installation and wiring
□ F2 ●
loss 2. Check if the motor winding is broken
1. Check the installation and wiring
A ●
Output 2. Check if the motor insulation is broken
■
grounded 4. Check if the three phases are all grounded (such as
F2 ○
the grounding knife-blade status)
A ● 1. Check the working condition of the loads
Under load
■ 2. Set the parameters of underload protection function
protection F2 ○
correctly
Rotating 1. Check if the cable connection of the encoder is
speed ■ A × normal
abnormal 2. Seek factory service
1. Check if the cable connection of the encoder is
Over speed normal
■ A ×
alarm 2. Check if the motor operating speed is too high
Overspeed normal
□ F2 ×
protection 2. Check if the motor operating speed is too high
F1 ○
PG fault □ normal
Motor F2 ● 2. Check if the encoder operates normally
side fault 1. Check if the motor operates normally, the loads are
Motor over too heavy
current □ A × 2. Set the inverter or motor parameters correctly
warning 3. Set the motor overcurrent protection coefficient
correctly
1. Check if the motor operates normally, the loads are
Motor over too heavy
current □ F2 × 2. Set the inverter or motor parameters correctly
protection 3. Set the motor overcurrent protection coefficient
correctly
Motor over 1. Check if the overload occurs
■ A ×
load 2. Set the inverter or motor parameters correctly
1. Check the cable connection between the inverter
Run reverse
□ F2 × output and the motor
fault
2. Check the cable connection of the encoder
User-defined Check if PLC sends user-defined fault flag bit to the
■ A ×
alarm 1 main controller


□ No
○ Selectable
■ A ×
■ A ×
■ A ×
■ A ×
■ A ×
■ A ×
■ A ×
Motor User-defined Check if PLC sends user-defined fault flag bit to the
■ F2 ×
side fault fault 1 main controller
■ F2 ×
fault 2 main controller
■ F2 ×
■ F2 ×
■ F2 ×
■ F2 ×
■ F2 ×
■ F2 ×
1. Reduce the ambient temperature
2. Clean the dust filter of the transformer cabinet
3. Replace the cooling fans of phase-shifting transformer
Phase shift
or Seek factory service
transformer
□ A × 4. Decrease the loads
overheat
5. Set the overtemperature pre-alarm point correctly
warning
6. Check if the connection between the analog IO board
1. Reduce the ambient temperature
2. Clean the dust filter of the transformer cabinet
3. Replace the cooling fans of phase-shifting transformer
Phase shift
Inverter or Seek factory service
transformer
system □ F2 × 4. Decrease the loads
overheat
fault 5. Set overtemperature protection point correctly
protection
1. Check the cooling fan and its cable
Cooling fan
□ F1 ● 2. Check the operating status of the cooling fans
overheat fault
1. Check that the cell fiber is normally connected
Check if the connection between the auxiliary board and
Soft startup
the backboard is loosened
pre-charging □ F1 ×
3. Check if the digital IO board and the digital IO
failure
conversion board is poorly connected
Seek factory service


□ No
○ Selectable
1. Confirm if the ambient temperature is too high
Ambient over
□ A × or the main control board and the backboard is loosened
temperature
4. Clean the dust filter of the power unit cabinet
High voltage 1. Check if the high voltage input of the control power is
sampling circuit normal
□ F1 ×
fault in control 2. Check if the high voltage power supply contactor of
power supply the control power operates normally
Low voltage 1. Check if the low voltage input of the control power is
sampling circuit normal
□ F1 ×
fault in control 2. Check if the low voltage power supply contactor of the
power supply control power operates normally
1. Check if the primary power input is normal
AC/DC power 2. Check cable connection between the fault signal
□ A ×
supply failure output of the primary power monitoring system and the
main control system
1. Check if the connection between the auxiliary power
board and the backboard is loosened
5V power
□ A × 2. Check if the control power supply is normal
failure
3. Check if the auxiliary power board 1 is normal
4. Check if the DCDC1 fault signal is normal
1. Check if the connection between the auxiliary power
board and the backboard is loosened
DCDC 1
□ F2 × 2. Check if the control power supply is normal
failure
Inverter 1. Check if the cable connection between the auxiliary
system power board 2 and the primary power is loosened
DCDC 2
fault □ F1 × 2. Check if the control power supply is normal
failure
Door of power 1. Close the door of the power unit cabinet
cabinet
□ F2 ×
opened 2. Seek factory service
proctection
Door of 1. Close the door of the transformer cabinet
transformer
cabinet □ F2 ×
opened
proctection
Emergency 1. Confirm if the EPO button is pressed
□ F2 ×
power off 2. Seek factory service
Emergency
□ F2 × Check the reason why the EPO terminal takes action
stop
Check the reason why the external fault terminal takes
External fault □ F2 ×
action
Start-on-fly
□ F2 × Press the RESET button to restart the inverter
failure
Switching-off 1. Check if the cable connection is normal
□ A ×
failure 2. Seek factory service
1. Check if the cable connection is normal
Switching-on
□ A × 2. Check if the high voltage input is normal
failure
1. Check if the cable connection of PT100 fault signal
PT100 open
□ F1 × transmission is loosened
circuit fault


□ No
○ Selectable
Precharging 1. Check if the precharging circuit breaker is closed
CB
□ F1 ×
disconnection 2. Seek factory service
fault
Excitation
1. Check if the excitation cabinet woeks normally.
cabinet □ F2 ×
protection
Phase lock
switchover □ F2 × Seek factory service
failure
Bottom fan 1. Check if the bottom fan breaker can operate normally
□ F1 ×
breaker fault 2. Seek factory service
1. Check if the bottom fan contactor can operate
Bottom fan
□ F1 × normally
contactor fault
Output 1.Check the output breaker is closed or not
breaker □ F2 ×
disconnection
Automatic
Inverter
bypass
system □ F2 × Seek factory service
abnormally
fault
closed
Automatic 1.Check if the bypass breaker can operate normally
□ F2 ×
bypass fault 2. Seek factory service
Control 1. Check if the control contactor can operate normally
contactor □ F1 ×
abnormal
Bypass is Check if the inverter is operating in bypass operation
□ F1 ×
working process
Precharging
□ F2 × Seek factory service
loop over load
Bypass
options □ F2 × Seek factory service
abnormal
System 1. Check if the bypass contactor can operate normally.
bypass □ F1 × (frequency conversion – working frequency switchover)
contactor fault 2. Seek factory service
1. Check if the output contactor can operate normally.
System output
□ F1 × (frequency conversion – working frequency switchover)
contactor fault
Power on the main control system again. If the fault
EEPROM fault □ F1 ×
happens again, Seek factory service
Dual RAM Power on the main control system again. If the fault
□ F2 ×
fault happens again, Seek factory service
Power up
self-detection □ F2 ×
Configura- happens again, Seek factory service
failure
tion fault

FPGA fault □ F2 ×
Current 1. Check if the connection between the analog IO board
detecting and the backboard is loosened
□ F2 ×
circuit
abnormal


□ No
○ Selectable
System 1. Check if the bypass contactor is faulty
□ F2 ×
bypass fault 2. Look for the system fault information
Closed loop F1 ○
feedback
■ Seek factory service
signal loss F2 ●
fault
Power unit
bypass
□ F1 × Check if the bypass function code is correctly set
configuration
fault
Multi point 1. Check if the number of faulty power units exceeds the
fault in bypass □ F2 × max. allowed number of bypass power units
process 2. Check if multiple faults occur to the power units
Model of
system set □ F2 × Seek factory service
incorrect
Model of
power unit set □ F2 × Seek factory service
Configura- failure
tion fault 1. Check if the communication cable is normally
connected
HMI communica-
□ F1 × 2. Check if the communication board and the backboard
tion failure
is reliably connected
CAN (for IO 1. Check if the communication board and the backboard
management) is reliably connected
□ F2 ×
communication 2. Check if the digital IO board and the backboard is
failure reliably connected
1. Check if the communication cable is normally
COM1 connected
communication □ A × 2. Check if the communication board and the backboard
failure is reliably connected
1. Check if the communication cable is normally
COM2 connected
communication □ A × 2. Check if the communication board and the backboard
failure is reliably connected
Power unit
Remove the fault according to the possible causes one
input under □ F1 ×
by one
voltage
Power unit DC 1. Prolong the decelerating time properly

over voltage ■ A × 2. Check if the power grid voltage is normal
Power warning 3. Seek factory service
unit (1 ~ 1. Prolong the decelerating time properly
Power unit DC
24) fault □ F2 × 2. Check if the power grid voltage is normal
over voltage
Power unit DC 1. Prolong the decelerating time properly
capacitor over □ F2 × 2. Check if the power grid voltage is normal
voltage 3. Seek factory service
Bus voltage
equalization □ F2 × Seek factory service
resistor open


□ No
○ Selectable
1. Check the heat dissipation condition and the cooling
Inverter side
fan status
IGBT over
■ A × 2. Check the ventilation of the air inelt and outlet
temperature
3. Check the overload condition
warning
1. Check the heat dissipation condition and the cooling
Inverter side fan status
IGBT over □ F2 × 2. Check the ventilation of the air inelt and outlet
temperature 3. Check the overload condition
1. Check if the output is short-circuited
Inverter side
2. Set the inverter or motor parameters correctly
IGBT over □ F2 ×
3. Check the motor side cable and motor connection
current
terminals
Power unit fuse 1. Check the fuse status
□ F2 ×
blown 2. Seek factory service
1. Check if the fiber connection between the main
Power unit optic control system and the power unit is normal
□ F2 ×
fiber fault 2. Check if the fiber of the power unit is damaged
Power unit
communication □ F2 ×
failure
1. Check if the connection between the main control
Bypass optic fiber
system and the bypass fiber of the power unit is normal
communication ■ F1 ×
2. Check if the bypass fiber of the power unit is damaged
failure
Power 3. Seek factory service
unit (1 ~ 1. Check if the connection between the main control
Bypass
24) fault ■ F1 × system and the bypass fiber of the power unit is normal
contactor failure
Inverter side
IGBT failure
Rectifier side
IGBT over
current
protection
Rectifier side
IGBT over
□ A × Seek factory service
temperature
warning
Rectifier side
IGBT over
temperature
protection
Power unit input
voltage unstable
Power unit input
voltage phase □ F1 × Seek factory service
reverse
Power unit input
phase loss
Power unit input
over current
Power unit
wrong model


□ No
○ Selectable
Parallel 1.Check the parallel communication link
operation □ A ×
handing failure
Parallel
operation
□ A × Check the parallel set of the inverters is consistent or not
information is
not consistent
Parallel
operation start □ F2 × Reset the information to make them consistent
on failure
Parallel 1.Remove the handing failure reasons
communication □ F2 ×
Parallel 2. Seek factory service
fault
operation
X machine high Close the high voltage input of the X machine without
fault □ F2 ×
voltage open switching
CAN parallel
communication
point fault of X
machine
Parallel equal
current
■ A × Seek factory service
imbalance
alarm
Parallel equal
current ■ F2 × Seek factory service
imbalance fault
 Note
1. Please select the setting related to fault protection functions with caution, or it may enlarge the accident range, and cause
personal injury and property loss.
2. When the inverter encounters faults such as Input voltage high limit, Input voltage low limit, Power unit DC voltage
equalization resistor open, Door of transformer cabinet opened and Bypass abnormal close, the input circuit breaker will be open
accordingly.

134 Chapter 9 Service And Maintenance
Chapter 9 Service And Maintenance
This chapter introduces the service and maintenance of the inverter, including safety, daily maintenance, periodical
check and maintenance, replacing main components and the warranty of the inverter.
During the long-term operation, the inverter system needs periodical service and maintenance. Effective service and
maintenance can reduce the inverter fault risk and provide longer service life. Maintenance and check are effective
methods for preventing accidental faults from happening, which can be divided into daily maintenance and periodical
check. After the inverter is just installed, you should shorten the check period and check the inverter in details to
avoid initial faults. After the operating time gets longer, you need to check if characteristic deterioration and other
problems occur to the components.
If the inverter is transported for a long distance, before using it, you should perform the routine checks: if the
components are intact, if the screws are fixed.
During normal operating period, you should clean the dust inside the inverter periodically, and check if the screws are
loosened.
If the inverter is not to be used for a long time, it is recommended to apply voltage to the inverter for at least half a
hour every half a year during the storage period, to avoid failure of electrical components inside the inverter.
9.1 Safety
Danger
1. For the inverter or power unit whose storage time exceeds six months or above, before applying voltage to them, you should
ramp up the voltage slowly through a voltage regulator to supply power to each power unit respectively, and check if the power
unit is intact, or the risks of electric shock and explosion subsist.
2. Hazardous high voltage exists during the operation of the inverter, misoperation may cause severe personal injury!
3. During a period of time after the power is cut off, the inverter still carries hazardous high voltage inside.
4. Only authorized, qualified and professional personnel who have received the trainings, such as high voltage knowledge,
inverter major and so on, can maintain the inverter.
5. Before performing any operation, the maintenance personnel must remove all metal objects such as watch, ring and so on.
During operation, use clothing and tools complying with the insulation requirements, or an electric shock may happen.
Note
Before checking and maintaining the inverter, you must confirm the following items first, or a risk of electric shock subsists.
1. Open all external power supply, wait twelve minutes, and then you can open the cabinet door. After checking the electricity and
the grounding, you can maintain and check the device.
2. Before the following three items are not completely confirmed, do not contact with the main circuit terminals and any other
component inside the power unit directly or through metal tools.
1) Cut off the power supply of the power unit reliably, and wait at least twelve minutes.
2) After all LED indicators on the panel of the power unit turn off, then you can open the panel of the power unit.
3) Use a DC voltmeter to measure the voltage between main circuit terminals (+) and (-) of the power unit, and the voltage is
below 36Vdc.
9.2 Daily Maintenance

For daily service and maintenance, visually inspect the following items, and repair it immediately if any item is
abnormal.
1. Confirm the installation environment, see Table 1-2 to make sure that the temperature and humidity are normal, the
installation environment is free of dust, special gases and peculiar smell.
2. Make sure that the inverter and the cooling fans have no abnormal noise or vibration.

Chapter 9 Service And Maintenance 135
9.3 Periodical Check And Maintenance

The preparing procedures for maintenance and check are shown in Figure 9-1.
The power Wait at Check and then

10kV high Low voltage
units stop least discharge the
voltage input mains input
generating twelve electricity of the
cutoff closed
waveform minutes inverter
Figure 9-1 Preparing procedures
Items to be carried out

 Make sure that the cabinets (transformer cabinet, power unit cabinet and control cabinet) are clean inside.
 Make sure that the dust filter is clean.
 Make sure that the circuit parts (resistance, transformer and so on) have no color change or distortion, and the
capacitor does not leak liquid.
 Make sure that the wiring cables (high voltage and low voltage cable set) have no color change or corrosion
owing to heat.
 Make sure that the structure fixing parts (bolts, nuts and screws) are not loosened.
 Note
Before checking the main circuit part of the inverter, you must cut off the 10kV input, wait at least twelve minutes and check its
electricity to ensure safety.
Emphasis on inspection tour

1. The cleanness of the main circuit part and control circuit part
Clean the inverter according to its status. When cleaning it, you must cut off the input high voltage power. After
making sure that the main circuit has no voltages, you can remove the dust inside the inverter through suction or
blowing. In principle, you should start from the top and finish on the bottom (The dust and metal chipping fall from the
top. If you check from the bottom, you cannot find and remove the falling objects from the top).
 Note
If the compressing air pressure is too large, it may damage the components and wiring of the single board. The adhering objects
which cannot be removed by blowing should be wiped by a cloth.
2. The cabinet and structure parts

1) Cooling fans
It is recommended to inspect the cooling fans once a week.
Make sure that the air volume is normal, the fan noise does not add up. Check if the fan fixing bolts are loosened.
Especially after the cooling fan is removed and installed again, if you forget to screw down the bolts, it may damage
the bearing and blades owing to vibration.
2) Dust filter
The dust filter must be checked and replaced periodically. The interval for checking and replacing it is related to the
environmental conditions of the inverter. In general environmental conditions, the dust filter must be cleaned or
replaced once every two months. In dusty and other harsh environment, you need to clean and replace the dust filter
more frequently, also in the newly-built buildings. If you do not replace the dust filter in time, it may cause system
overheat and shutdown.
The dust filter can be cleaned in neutral wash solution and reused after water-washing and drying. Refer to 9.4.2
Replacing Dust Filter for the replacing method.
3) Main circuit components, all parts inside the cabinets
Check that no dust accumulates inside the cabinet, and the capacitor and soft start resistance have no color change,
heat, abnormal noise, peculiar smell or damage.
Check that the wiring has no disconnected cable, the fixation is not loosened, and there is no damage.

9.4 Replacing Main Components

This section introduces the replacing methods for the main components of the inverter, including the power unit, dust
filter and the fuses.
 Note
When you need to maintain or replace other important components but not the above-mentioned components, please contact
Emerson customer service personnel.
9.4.1 Replacing Power Unit
If the power unit is damaged, it is recommended to replace it directly. The replacing procedures for different models
are the same. Taking 800kVA 6kV as an example, the replacing procedures are as follows:
1. Open the front door of the power unit cabinet, remove the cables connected in front of the power unit, including two
communication fibers, three input cables, and two cascade-connected cables.
 Note
The power unit with bypass function has three communication fibers that all should be removed.
2. Remove and carry out the power unit from the cabinet by using fixture or two persons, as shown in figure 9-2.
400kVA～800kVA 6kV and 500kVA～1250kVA 10kV
1000kVA～3200kVA 6kV and 1600kVA～5000kVA 10kV
Figure 9-2 Removing the power unit

3. Install the new power unit into the system according to the reverse procedures, for specific method, refer to
Installing power units in 2.5.2 Installation And Fixation.
 Note
1. During the removing process of the power unit, note to save the relevant fasteners and accessories
2. The weight of the power unit is larger than 25kg; please operate it by two persons to avoid injury by a crash.
9.4.2 Replacing Dust Filter
The dust filter is located on the door of the cabinet, before replacing it, please shut down and power off the inverter.
The procedures for replacing the dust filter are as follows:
1. Unscrew the fixing screws of the dust filter, push the dust filter mask upwards to make the back hook of the dust
filter mask away from the door hole, and remove the dust filter between the door and the dust filter mask, as shown in
Figure 9-3.
2. Install the new dust filter, install the dust filter mask on the door according to the reverse procedures, and screw
down the fixing screws.
3. Clear the removed dust filter carefully, and dry it for reuse.
Figure 9-3 Replacing dust filter
The transformer cabinet has six dust filters in total on its front and rear doors; the power unit cabinet has nine dust
filters in total only on its front door.
 Note
To ensure equipment and personal safety, before replacing the dust filter, you must shut down and power off the inverter.
9.4.3 Replacing fuses
The inverter has two fuses (FU1, FU2) corresponding to the MAIN POWER indicator. They are all located in the fuse
box of the control cabinet, as shown in Figure 9-4.

FU1
FU2
Figure 9-4 Fuse positions
When replacing the fuses, please use the fuses of the same model. See Table 9-1 for their models and specifications.
Table 9-1 Fuse model specification
Name Number Specification
FU1, FU2 one piece for each 690Vac-2A-Φ10mm × 38mm
9.4.4 Replacing Fan
The lifetime of the fan is closely related to its using environment and maintenance status. The fan used together with
the inverter is a mute long-lifetime backward-inclined centrifugal fan. Its MTBF (mean time between failures) is 50000
hours. You can self-define the interval for replacing the fan according to the fan running time and working condition.
The procedures for replacing the fan are as follows:
1. Before replacing the fan, first ensure that all power supply of the inverter has been cut off. For detailed procedures,
refer to 3.1 Notes.
2. After the fan stops running completely, remove the fan power box cover on the right of the fan shell, as shown in
Figure 9-5.

Figure 9-5 Removing fan power box cover
3. Remove the fan power cable and the fan temperature cable in the fan power box, and then remove the binding tie
which fixes the cable.
4. Remove ten M6 × 16 screws on the top of the fan shell, life the two handles on the top of the fan shell, and remove
the old fan together with the top plate of fan shell from the inverter, as shown in Figure 9-6.
Figure 9-6 Removing the top plate of fan shell and the fan
5. Remove eight M10 screws from the top plate of fan shell, and then remove the old fan. Install the prepared fan of
the same type, as shown in Figure 9-7.

Figure 9-7 Replacing fan
6. Restore the replaced fan according to the reverse procedures.
 Note
For single-fan, you must connect cables following the fan terminal sequence shown in Figure 2-27; for double-fan, you must
connect cables following the fan terminal sequence shown in Figure 2-31, otherwise, it may cause reverse rotation of the fan.
9.5 Warranty Of The Inverter

When the following conditions occur to the inverter, the company will provide warranty service:
1. The warranty range is confined to the inverter only.
2. Warranty period is 12 months (The start time of warranty period is the delivery date of the product), within which
period Emerson Network Power conducts free maintenance and repairing to the inverter that has any fault or damage
under normal operation conditions. Above 12 months, a reasonable expense will be charged.
3. Even within 12 months, maintenance will also be charged in the following situations:
 Damages incurred to the inverter due to misoperations, which are not in compliance with the User Manual;
 Damages incurred to the inverter due to fire, flood, abnormal voltage, etc;
 Damages incurred to the inverter due to the improper use of inverter functions.
4. The service fee will be charged according to the actual costs. If there is any contract, the contract prevails.

Appendix 1 Function Code List 141
Appendix 1 Function Code List
The function parameters of the inverter is grouped by function, including F00 ~ F19, F27 ~ F30 and F63 ~ F64, 26
groups in total. Each function group comprises several function codes.
The function codes are presented in the mode of ‘group number of function code + function code number’. FX.YZ
appeared in the manual means No. YZ function code in Group X. For example, ‘F12.08’ means No. 8 function code in
Group 12.
The structure of the function code list is described in Table 1.
Table 1 Structure description of the function code list
SN Name Description
1 Function code Group No. and SN of the function code
2 Name Full name of the function parameter
3 Setting range Setting range of the function parameter
4 Min. unit Minimum unit of the function parameter value
5 Default Default value of the function parameter
Changeability property of the function parameter (changeable or not as well as the change
conditions):
6 Changeability ‘○’: changeable in stop and running state of the inverter.
‘×’: not changeable in running state of the inverter.
‘*’: not changeable, because the parameter is a measured value
Operation level:
7 Password level
1: Administrator; 2: Engineer; 3: Technician
Note:
1. The parameters are classfied into the decimal system and hex system. When in the hex system, every bit of the parameter
has independent meaning, and some bits can be set from 0 to F.
2. The ”Default” is the parameter value after the parameter is restored to the factory setting. However, the measured values will
not be restored
Table 2 Function code list

Function Min. Change Password Corresponding
Name Setting range Default
code unit -ability level chapter
0~2
0: No action
Parameter
F00.00 1: Restore factory setting 1 0 × 2 7.1.3
initialization
2: Restore factory setting except
motor
Rated
F00.01 0 ~ 65535kVA 1kVA 2400 * 3 7.1.1
capacity
F00.02 Rated voltage 1.00 ~ 20.00kV 0.01kV 10.00 * 3 7.1.1
F00.03 Rated current 0 ~ 999.9A 0.1A 140.0 * 3 7.1.1
0 ~ FFFFH
BIT 0: Run
0: Invalid; 1: Run
BIT 1: Stop
0: Invalid; 1: Stop
BIT 2: Reserved
Running BIT 3: Jog
F00.04 control word 1 0: Invalid; 1: Jog operation 1 0 ○ 2 7.1.1
of the inverter BIT 4: Selection of jog run forward
or reverse
0: jog run forward; 1: jog run
reverse
BIT 5: Reserved
BIT 6: Fault reset
0: not restore; 1: Fault reset

142 Appendix 1 Function Code List

BIT 7: UP key
0: UP key is invalid;
1: UP key is valid
BIT8: DOWN key
0: DOWN key is invalid
1: DOWN key is valid
BIT 9: High voltage CB switching
Running
mode after precharging
F00.04 control word 1 1 0 ○ 2 7.1.1
0: Auto; 1: Manual
of the inverter
BIT 10: Clear energy-saving
running time to 0
0: No action; 1: Clear time to 0
BIT 11: motor parameter caculation
0: No calculation
1: motor parameter caculation
BIT12 ~ BIT15: Reserved
0 ~ FFFFH
BIT0: system bypass assembly
configuration
System 0: not configured; 1: configured
F00.05 bypass BIT1: system bypass enabling 1 0 X 2 7.2.4
configuration 0: disabled; 1: enabled
BIT2: soft startup enabling
0: disabled; 1: enabled
BIT3 ~ BIT15: reserved
0 ~ FFFFH
BIT0: configuration status of
system bypass assembly
0: not configured; 1: configured
BIT 1: enabling status of system
bypass
0: disabled; 1: enabled
BIT 2: working in frequency
conversion
0: invalid; 1: working in frequency
conversion
BIT3: working in system bypass
0: invalid; 1: working in bypass
BIT4: command of closing output
System
F00.06 breaker 1 0 * 2 Appendix 3
bypass status
0: invalid; 1: closed
BIT5: feedback signal of output
breaker
0: open; 1: closed
BIT6: command of switching to
system bypass
0: invalid; 1: closed
BIT7: feedback signal of system
bypass breaker
0: open; 1: closed
BIT8: phase lock success
0: phase lock is not succeeded; 1:
phase lock is succeeded
BIT9 ~ 15: reserved

Corres
Function Min. Change Password
Name Setting range Default -ponding
code unit -ability level
chapter
0~6
0: digital input 1: Input via
touch-screen
1: digital input 1: Terminal
Main frequency UP/DOWN input
F01.00 1 0 * 3 7.3.1
setting channel 2: Input via COM1 (factory debug)
3: Input via COM2
6: Disabled
Main frequency
F01.01 -120.00 ~ 120.00Hz 0.01Hz 0 * 3 7.3.1
setting
F01.02 Reserved 0 ~ 65535 1 0 * 3 /
F01.03 Frequency setting -120.00 ~ 120.00Hz 0.01Hz 0 * 3 7.3.1
Frequency
command (output
F01.04 frequency after -120.00 ~ 120.00Hz 0.01Hz 0 * 3 7.3.1
acceleration and
deceleration)
F01.05 Output frequency -120.00 ~ 120.00Hz 0.01Hz 0 * 3 7.3.1
F01.06 UV output voltage 0 ~ 20.00kV 0.01kV 0 * 3 7.3.1
F01.07 VW output voltage 0 ~ 20.00kV 0.01kV 0 * 3 7.3.1
F01.08 WU output voltage 0 ~ 20.00kV 0.01kV 0 * 3 7.3.1
U-phase output
F01.09 0.0 ~ 3Ie 0.1A 0 * 3 7.3.1
current
V-phase output
F01.10 0.0 ~ 3Ie 0.1A 0 * 3 7.3.1
current
W-phase output
F01.11 0.0 ~ 3Ie 0.1A 0 * 3 7.3.1
current
F01.12 Output power factor 0.01 ~ 1.00 0.01 0.75 * 3 7.3.1
F01.13 Reserved 0 ~ 65535 1 0 * 3 /
F01.14 Reserved 0 ~ 65535 1 0 * 3 /
F01.15 Input frequency 0.00 ~ 120.00Hz 0.01Hz 0 * 3 7.3.1
F01.16 L1L2 input voltage 0 ~ 20.00kV 0.01kV 0 * 3 7.3.1
L1-phase input
F01.19 0.0 ~ 3Ie 0.1A 0 * 3 7.3.1
current
L2-phase input
F01.20 0.0 ~ 3Ie 0.1A 0 * 3 7.3.1
current
L3-phase input
F01.21 0.0 ~ 3Ie 0.1A 0 * 3 7.3.1
current
F01.22 Input power factor 0.01 ~ 1.00 0.01 0.75 * 3 7.3.1
0 ~ FFFFH
BIT0: Run-1/Stop-0
BIT1: Run reverse-1/Run forward-0
BIT2: Run at zero speed
BIT3: In accelerating
BIT4: In decelerating
BIT5: Run at constant speed
Inverter running BIT6: In pre-excitation
F01.23 1 0 * 3 7.3.1
status 1 BIT7: In adjustment
BIT8: Overcurrent limiting
BIT9: DC overvoltage limiting
BIT10: Torque amplitude limiting
BIT11: Speed amplitude limiting
BIT12: Inverter fault
BIT13: Speed control
BIT14: Torque control

Corres
chapter
BIT15: Reserved
Inverter running
F01.23 BIT2 ~ 15: set to 1 when conditions 1 0 * 3 7.3.1
status 1
are met
0 ~ FFFFH
BIT0: Remote switching-on
BIT1: Remote switching-off
BIT2: Remote startup
BIT3: Remote stop
BIT4: Remote jog
BIT5: Reserved
BIT6: Local precharging
BIT7: Local startup
Inverter running
F01.24 BIT8: Local stop 1 0 * 3 7.3.1
status 2
BIT9: Local jog
BIT10: Fault reset
BIT11: High voltage CB close
BIT12: High voltage CB open
BIT13: Power unit bus voltage low
BIT14: Power unit bus voltage
recovery
BIT15: Power unit self detection
completion
0 ~ FFFFH
BIT0: Main controller self-test
completion
BIT1: Parameter initializing
completion
BIT2: Jog
Inverter running
F01.25 BIT3: Local 1 0 * 3 7.3.1
status 3
BIT4: Remote
BIT5: Bypass running status of
inverter
0: Normal running
1: Bypass running
BIT6 ~ 15: Reserved
0 ~ FFH
BIT0 ~ BIT7: Open/close state of
F01.26 DI terminal state 1 0 * 3 7.3.1
X1 ~ X8 input terminals
0: Open; 1: Close
0 ~ FFFFH
BIT0 ~ 7: Open/close state of Y1 ~
Y8 relay output terminals
F01.27 DO terminal state BIT8 ~ 15: Open/close state of 1 0 * 3 7.3.1
Y11 ~ Y18 transistor output
terminals
0: Open; 1: Close
F01.28 AI1 input voltage -10.00 ~ 10.00V 0.01V 0 * 3 7.3.1
Regulated AI1 input
F01.32 -10.00 ~ 10.00V 0.01V 0 * 3 7.3.1
voltage
Regulated AI2 input
F01.33 -10.00 ~ 10.00V 0.01V 0 * 3 7.3.1
voltage
Regulated AI3 input
F01.34 -10.00 ~ 10.00V 0.01V 0 * 3 7.3.1
voltage
Regulated AI4 input
F01.35 -10.00 ~ 10.00V 0.01V 0 * 3 7.3.1
voltage
F01.36 AO1 output 0.0% ~ 100.0% (of full range) 0.1% 0 * 3 7.3.1

Corres
chapter
F01.40 Closed loop input -100.0% ~ 100.0% (of full range) 0.1% 0 * 3 7.3.1
Closed loop
F01.41 -100.0% ~ 100.0% (of full range) 0.1% 0 * 3 7.3.1
feedback
Closed loop
F01.42 -100.0% ~ 100.0% (of full range) 0.1% 0 * 3 7.3.1
tolerance
F01.43 Closed loop output -100.0% ~ 100.0% (of full range) 0.1% 0 * 3 7.3.1
F01.44 Cabinet temperature -200.0 ~ 200.0°C 0.1°C 0 * 3 7.3.1
Phase shift
F01.45 transformer phase A -200.0 ~ 200.0°C 0.1°C 0 * 3 7.3.1
temperature
Phase shift
F01.46 transformer phase B -200.0 ~ 200.0°C 0.1°C 0 * 3 7.3.1
temperature
Phase shift
F01.47 transformer phase C -200.0 ~ 200.0°C 0.1°C 0 * 3 7.3.1
temperature
0~4
0: Control via control cabinet
(touch screen and control panel)
1: Control via multi function
Running command
F01.48 terminal 1 0 * 3 7.3.1
channel
2: Control via COM1 (factory
debug)
3: Control via COM2
4: Disabled
0~5
0: Common; 1: Jog
Speed running 2: Multi section speed 7.3.1
F01.49 1 0 * 3
mode 3: PID closed loop
4: Simplified PLC
5: Parameter self-adjustment
Total power on time
F01.50 0 ~ 65535 hours 1 hour 0 * 3 7.3.5
low position
Total power on time
F01.51 0 ~ 65535 × 65536 hours 0 * 3 7.3.5
high position
Total energy-saving
F01.52 0 ~ 65535 hours 1 hour 0 * 3 7.3.5
running time
Actual electricity 10,000
F01.53 0 ~ 65535 (10,000 kWh) 0 * 3 7.3.5
consumption kWh
0 ~ FFFFH
BIT0 ~ 9: Status display of A1 ~
Power unit bypass A10 power units
F01.54 1 0 * 3 7.3.3
status 1 BIT10 ~ 15: Reserved
0: Power unit is not bypassed
1: Power unit is bypassed
0 ~ FFFFH
BIT0 ~ 9: Status display of B1 ~
Power unit bypass B10 power units
F01.55 1 0 * 3 7.3.3

Corres
chapter
0 ~ FFFFH
BIT0 ~ 9: Status display of C1 ~
Power unit bypass C10 power units
F01.56 1 0 * 3 7.3.3
0 ~ FFFFH
Inverter running BIT0: Non-stopping process upon
F01.57 1 0 * 3 7.3.3
status 4 instantaneous power failure
Correspon
Function Change- Password
Name Setting range Min. unit Default -ding
code ability level
chapter
F02.00 Torque current -300.0% ~ 300.0% 0.1% 0 * 3 7.3.2
F02.01 Excitation current 0.0% ~ 100.0% 0.1% 0 * 3 7.3.2
F02.02 Output torque -300.0% ~ 300.0% 0.1% 0 * 3 7.3.2
Motor output
F02.03 0.0% ~ 200.0% (of motor rated power) 0.1% 0 * 3 7.3.2
power
Motor estimated
F02.04 -120.00Hz ~ 120.00Hz 0.01Hz 0 * 3 7.3.2
frequency
Motor actual
F02.05 -120.00Hz ~ 120.00Hz 0.01Hz 0 * 3 7.3.2
frequency
ASR controller -300.0% ~ 300.0% (of motor rated
F02.06 0.1% 0 * 3 7.2.2
output torque)
-300.0% ~ 300.0% (of motor rated
F02.07 Torque input 0.1% 0 * 3 7.3.2
torque)
F02.08 Motor speed 0 ~ 7200RPM 1RPM 750 * 3 7.3.2
Correspon
Function Change Password
code -ability level
chapter
AB input
F03.00 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
BC input
F03.01 Power 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
unit A1
CA input
F03.02 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
F03.03 DC bus voltage 0 ~ 1500V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
AB input
F03.04 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
BC input
F03.05 Power 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
unit B1
CA input
F03.06 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
AB input
F03.08 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
BC input
F03.09 Power 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
unit C1
CA input
F03.10 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
AB input
F03.12 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
Power voltage
unit A2 BC input
F03.13 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage

Correspon
code -ability level
chapter
CA input
F03.14 Power 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
unit A2
AB input
F03.16 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
BC input
F03.17 Power 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
unit B2
CA input
F03.18 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
AB input
F03.20 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
BC input
F03.21 Power 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
unit C2
CA input
F03.22 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
AB input
F03.24 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
BC input
F03.25 Power 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
unit A3
CA input
F03.26 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
AB input
F03.28 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
BC input
F03.29 Power 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
unit B3
CA input
F03.30 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
AB input
F03.32 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
BC input
F03.33 Power 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
unit C3
CA input
F03.34 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
AB input
F03.36 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
BC input
F03.37 Power 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
unit A4
CA input
F03.38 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
AB input
F03.40 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
BC input
F03.41 Power 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
unit B4
CA input
F03.42 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
AB input
F03.44 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
Power voltage
unit C4 BC input
F03.45 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage

Correspon
code -ability level
chapter
CA input
F03.46 Power 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
unit C4
AB input
F03.48 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
BC input
F03.49 Power 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
unit A5
CA input
F03.50 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
AB input
F03.52 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
BC input
F03.53 Power 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
unit B5
CA input
F03.54 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
AB input
F03.56 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
BC input
F03.57 Power 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
unit C5
CA input
F03.58 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
AB input
F03.60 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
BC input
F03.61 Power 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
unit A6
CA input
F03.62 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
AB input
F03.64 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
BC input
F03.65 Power 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
unit B6
CA input
F03.66 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
AB input
F03.68 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
BC input
F03.69 Power 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
unit C6
CA input
F03.70 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
AB input
F03.72 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
BC input
F03.73 Power 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
unit A7
CA input
F03.74 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
AB input
F03.76 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
Power voltage
unit B7 BC input
F03.77 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage

Correspon
code -ability level
chapter
CA input
F03.78 Power 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
unit B7
AB input
F03.80 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
BC input
F03.81 Power 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
unit C7
CA input
F03.82 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
AB input
F03.84 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
BC input
F03.85 Power 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
unit A8
CA input
F03.86 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
AB input
F03.88 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
BC input
F03.89 Power 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
unit B8
CA input
F03.90 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
AB input
F03.92 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
BC input
F03.93 Power 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
unit C8
CA input
F03.94 0 ~ 1000V 1V 0 * 7.3.3 3
voltage
Function Min. Change- Password Corresponding

code unit ability level chapter
0 ~ 12H
Unit’s place:
Motor 1 control mode selection
0: Vector control without PG
Motor control 1: Vector control with PG
F04.00 1 0 × 3 7.2.2
mode selection 2: V/F control without PG
Ten’s place:
Motor selection
0: Motor 1
1: Motor 2
0~1
0: No action
Energy-saving 1: Action, reducing output voltage 7.2.2
F04.01 1 0 × 3
running aotomatically with light loads, thus
achieving energy-saving effect.
Only effective in V/F running mode


0~3
0: Self defined V/F curve
1: 2-order curve
Motor 1 V/F curve
F05.00 2: 1.7-order curve 1 0 × 3 7.2.2
setting
3: 1.2-order curve
F05.00 = 0, F05.01 ~ F05.06
are valid
Motor 1 V/F
F05.01 F05.03 ~ F05.10 0.01Hz 0 × 2 7.2.2
frequency 3
F05.02 Motor 1 V/F voltage 3 F05.04 ~ 100.0% 0.1% 0 × 2 7.2.2
Motor 1 V/F
F05.03 F05.05 ~ F05.01 0.01Hz 0 × 2 7.2.2
frequency 2
F05.04 Motor 1 V/F voltage 2 F05.06 ~ F05.02 0.1% 0 × 2 7.2.2
Motor 1 V/F
F05.05 0.00 ~ F05.03 0.01Hz 0 × 2 7.2.2
frequency 1
F05.06 Motor 1 V/F voltage 1 0.0 ~ F05.04 0.1% 0 × 2 7.2.2
0~1
Motor 1 auto torque
F05.07 0: No action 1 1 × 2 7.2.2
boost
Motor 1 manual
F05.08 0.0 ~ 30.0% 0.1% 0 ○ 2 7.2.2
torque boost
Motor 1 torque boost
F05.09 0.0 ~ 50.0% 0.1% 0 ○ 2 7.2.2
cut-off point
Motor 1 basic
F05.10 1.00 ~ 120.00Hz 0.01Hz 50.00 × 2 7.2.2
operating frequency
Motor 1 max output
F05.11 0 ~ 10.00kV 0.01kV 10.00 × 2 7.2.2
voltage
0~2
0: No action
F05.12 Motor 1 AVR function 1 1 × 2 7.2.2
2: No action upon
decelerating
Displayed only in V/F mode
Slip compensation
F05.13 0 ~ 300.0% 0.1% 100% × 2 7.2.2
gain
Slip compensation
F05.14 0 ~ 250.0% 0.1% 200% × 2 7.2.2
limit
Compensation time
F05.15 0.1 ~ 25.0s 0.1s 10.0 × 2 7.2.2
constant
F05.16 Motor rated power 0 ~ 2400.0kW 0.1kW 1000.0 × 3 7.2.2
F05.17 Motor rated voltage 1.00 ~ 10.00kV 0.01kV 10.00 × 3 7.2.2
F05.18 Motor rated current 0 ~ 1000.0A 0.1A 72.0 × 3 7.2.2
F05.19 Motor rated frequency 0 ~ 120.00Hz 0.01Hz 50.00 × 3 7.2.2
Motor rated rotating
F05.20 0 ~ 7200RPM 1RPM 745 × 3 7.2.2
speed
F05.21 Motor PF 0.001 ~ 1.000 0.001 0.830 × 3 7.2.2
Motor stator
F05.22 0.00 ~ 50.00% 0.01% 0.92 × 2 7.2.2
resistance %R1
Motor leakage
F05.23 0.00 ~ 100.00% 0.01% 8.85 × 2 7.2.2
inductance %X
Motor rotator
F05.24 0.00 ~ 50.00% 0.01% 0.75 × 2 7.2.2
resistance %R2
Motor mutual
F05.25 0.0 ~ 2000.0% 0.1% 194.5 × 2 7.2.2
inductance %Xm
Motor zero load
F05.26 0.0 ~ 140.0A 0.1A 30.0 × 2 7.2.2
current I0
7.2.2
F05.27 Reserved 0~2 1 0 × 3
F05.28 Reserved 0 ~ 65535 1 0 × 2 /


F05.29 Motor 1 ASR1-P 0 ~ 65535 1 1000 × 2 7.2.2
F05.30 Motor 1 ASR1-I 0 ~ 65535 1 20 × 2 7.2.2
F05.31 Motor 1 ASR1-D 0 ~ 65535 1 0 × 2 7.2.2
0 ~ 8 (corresponding to 0 ~
F05.32 ASR1 output filter 1 0 × 2 7.2.2
28/10ms)
F05.33 Motor 1 ASR2-P 0 ~ 65535 1 1000 × 2 7.2.2
F05.34 Motor 1 ASR2-I 0 ~ 65535 1 10 × 2 7.2.2
F05.35 Motor 1 ASR2-D 0 ~ 65535 1 0 × 2 7.2.2
28/10ms)
Motor 1 ASR1/2
F05.37 0.00 ~ 120.00Hz 0.01Hz 50.00 × 2 7.2.2
switching frequency
F05.38 Motor 1 ACR-P 0 ~ 65535 1 750 × 2 7.2.2
F05.39 Motor 1 ACR-I 0 ~ 65535 1 750 × 2 7.2.2
F05.40 Reserved 0 ~ 65535 1 0 × 2 /
F05.41 Reserved 0 ~ 65535 1 0 × 2 /
Correspon
code ability level
chapter
0~3
1: 2-order curve
Motor 2 V/F curve
F06.00 2: 1.7-order curve 1 0 × 2 7.2.2
setting
3: 1.2-order curve
F06.00 = 0, F06.01 ~ F06.06 are
valid
Motor 2 V/F
F06.01 F06.03 ~ F06.10 0.01Hz 0 × 2 7.2.2
frequency 3
F06.02 Motor 2 V/F voltage 3 F06.04 ~ 100.0% 0.1% 0 × 2 7.2.2
Motor 2 V/F
F06.03 F06.05 ~ F06.01 0.01Hz 0 × 2 7.2.2
frequency 2
F06.04 Motor 2 V/F voltage 2 F06.06 ~ F06.02 0.1% 0 × 2 7.2.2
Motor 2 V/F
F06.05 0.00 ~ F06.03 0.01Hz 0 × 2 7.2.2
frequency 1
F06.06 Motor 2 V/F voltage 1 0.0 ~ F06.04 0.1% 0 × 2 7.2.2
0~1
Motor 2 auto torque
F06.07 0: No action 1 1 × 2 7.2.2
boost
Motor 2 manual
F06.08 0.0 ~ 30.0% 0.1% 0 ○ 2 7.2.2
torque boost
Motor 2 torque boost
F06.09 0.0 ~ 50.0% 0.1% 0 ○ 2 7.2.2
cut-off point
Motor 2 basic
F06.10 1.00 ~ 120.00Hz 0.01Hz 50.00 × 2 7.2.2
operating frequency
Motor 2 max output
F06.11 0 ~ 10.00kV 0.01kV 10.00 × 2 7.2.2
voltage
0: No action
F06.12 Motor 2 AVR function 1 1 × 2 7.2.2
2: No action upon decelerating
Displayed only in V/F mode
Motor 2 slip
F06.13 0 ~ 300.0% 0.1% 100% × 2 7.2.2
compensation gain
Motor 2 slip
F06.14 0 ~ 250.0% 0.1% 200% × 2 7.2.2
compensation limit
Motor 2
F06.15 compensation time 0.1 ~ 25.0s 0.1s 10.0 × 2 7.2.2
constant

Correspon
code ability level
chapter
Motor rated
F06.19 0 ~ 120.00Hz 0.01Hz 50.00 × 2 7.2.2
frequency
F06.20 0 ~ 7200RPM 1RPM 740 × 2 7.2.2
speed
F06.21 Motor PF 0.001 ~ 1.000 0.001 0.76 × 2 7.2.2
Motor stator
F06.22 0.00% ~ 50.00% 0.01% 1.97 × 2 7.2.2
resistance %R1
Motor leakage
F06.23 0.00% ~ 100.00% 0.01% 11.72 × 2 7.2.2
inductance %X
Motor rotator
F06.24 0.00 ~ 50.00% 0.01% 1.67 × 2 7.2.2
resistance %R2
Motor mutual
F06.25 0.0 ~ 2000.0% 0.1% 157.4 × 2 7.2.2
inductance %Xm
Motor zero load
F06.26 0.0 ~ 140.0A 0.1A 9.0 × 2 7.2.2
current I0
0~2
Motor parameter self 0: No action
F06.27 1 0 × 2 7.2.2
adjustment 1: Action (motor stopping)
2: Action (motor rotating)
F06.28 Reserved 0 ~ 65535 1 0 × 2 /
F06.29 Motor 2 ASR1-P 0 ~ 65535 1 1000 × 2 7.2.2
F06.30 Motor 2 ASR1-I 0 ~ 65535 1 20 × 2 7.2.2
F06.31 Motor 2 ASR1-D 0 ~ 65535 1 0 × 2 7.2.2
28/10ms)
F06.33 Motor 2 ASR2-P 0 ~ 65535 1 1000 × 2 7.2.2
F06.34 Motor 2 ASR2-I 0 ~ 65535 1 10 × 2 7.2.2
F06.35 Motor 2 ASR2-D 0 ~ 65535 1 0 × 2 7.2.2
28/10ms)
Motor 2 ASR1/2
F06.37 0.00 ~ 120.00Hz 0.01Hz 50.00 × 2 7.2.2
switching frequency
F06.38 Motor 2 ACR-P 0 ~ 65535 1 150 × 2 7.2.2
F06.39 Motor 2 ACR-I 0 ~ 65535 1 300 × 2 7.2.2
F06.40 Reserved 0 ~ 65535 1 0 × 2 /
F06.41 Reserved 0 ~ 65535 1 0 × 2 /

Pulse number per
F07.00 1 ~ 10000 1 1024 ○ 2 7.2.2
revolution of PG
0~1
PG rotating
F07.01 0: A is leading B; 1: B is 1 0 × 3 7.2.2
direction
leading A
PG signal filtering
F07.02 0 ~ 99 1 0 ○ 2 7.2.2
times

0~5
0: Touch-screen
Set main 1: Terminal UP/DOWN
F08.00 frequency 2: Input via COM1 (factory debug) 1 0 ○ 3 7.2.3
source 3: Input via COM2


Digital setting of
F08.01 main frequency F08.12 ~ F08.11 0.01Hz 50.00 ○ 3 7.2.3
setting
00 ~ 11H
Unit’s place:
0: Setting of ‘saving frequency
upon power failure’
Main digital 1: Setting of ‘non-saving
F08.02 frequency frequency upon power failure’ 1 0 ○ 2 7.2.3
control Ten’s place:
0: Keeping frequency upon
stopping
1: Restoring frequency to F08.01
upon stopping
F08.03 Reserved Reserved / / / / /
0~2
0: No effect
Frequency
1: Adjust relative to max output
F08.08 setting ratio 1 0 ○ 3 7.2.3
frequency
selection
2: Adjust relative to current output
frequency
Frequency
setting ratio
F08.09 0.0 ~ 200.0% 0.10% 100.0% ○ 2 7.2.3
adjustment
coefficient
Max output MAX{50.00, High frequency limit
F08.10 0.01Hz 50.00 × 2 7.2.3
frequency F08.11} ~ 120.00Hz
High frequency
F08.11 F08.12 ~ F08.10 0.01Hz 50.00 ○ 3 7.2.3
limit
Low frequency
F08.12 0.00 ~ F08.11 0.01Hz 0 ○ 3 7.2.3
limit
Jog operation
F08.13 0.10 ~ 30.00Hz 0.01Hz 5.00 ○ 3 7.2.3
frequency
Skip frequency
F08.14 1.00 ~ 120.00Hz 0.01Hz 1.00 × 2 7.2.3
1
Skip frequency
F08.15 0.00 ~ 20.00Hz 0.01Hz 0 × 2 7.2.3
1 range
Skip frequency
F08.16 1.00 ~ 120.00Hz 0.01Hz 1.00 × 2 7.2.3
2
Skip frequency
F08.17 0.00 ~ 20.00Hz 0.01Hz 0 × 2 7.2.3
2 range
Skip frequency
F08.18 1.00 ~ 120.00Hz 0.01Hz 1.00 × 2 7.2.3
3
Skip frequency
F08.19 0.00 ~ 20.00Hz 0.01Hz 0 × 2 7.2.3
3 range
zero speed
F08.20 running 0.00 ~ 20.00Hz 0.01Hz 0 ○ 2 7.2.3
threshold
zero speed
F08.21 0.00 ~ 20.00Hz 0.01Hz 0 ○ 2 7.2.3
hysteresis

Correspon-
Name Setting range Default ding
chapter
0000 ~ 1111H
Unit’s place: AI1 curve selection
0: Curve 1
1: Curve 2
Ten’s place: AI2 curve selection
0: Curve 1
1: Curve 2
F09.00 Curve selection 1 0 ○ 2 7.2.3
Hundred’s place: AI3 curve selection
0: Curve 1
1: Curve 2
Thousand’s place: AI4 curve
selection
0: Curve 1
1: Curve 2
F09.01 Curve 1 Min input 0.0% ~ F09.07 0.1% 0 ○ 2 7.2.3
Actual value Frequency reference: 0.0 ~
F09.02 corresponded to 100.0%Fmax 0.1% 0 ○ 2 7.2.3
curve 1 Min input Flux value: 0.0 ~ 100.0%Φe
F09.03 Curve 1 Max input F09.05 ~ 100.0% 0.1% 100.0% ○ 2 7.2.3
F09.04 corresponded to 100.0%Fmax 0.1% 100.0% ○ 2 7.2.3
curve 1 Max input Flux value: 0.0 ~ 100.0%Φe
Curve 1 turning
F09.05 F09.07 ~ F09.03 0.1% 100.0% ○ 2 7.2.3
point 2 input
Frequency reference: 0.0 ~
Curve 1 turning
F09.06 100.0%Fmax 0.1% 100.0% ○ 2 7.2.3
point 2 input value
Flux value: 0.0 ~ 100.0%Φe
Curve 1 turning
F09.07 F09.01 ~ F09.05 0.1% 0 ○ 2 7.2.3
point 1 input
Curve 1 turning
F09.08 100.0%Fmax 0.1% 0 ○ 2 7.2.3
point 1 input value
F09.09 Curve 2 Min input 0.0% ~ F09.15 0.1% 0 ○ 2 7.2.3
F09.10 corresponded to 100.0%Fmax 0.1% 0 ○ 2 7.2.3
curve 2 Min input Flux value: 0.0 ~ 100.0%Φe
F09.11 Curve 2 Max input F09.13 ~ 100.0% 0.1% 100.0% ○ 2 7.2.3
F09.12 corresponded to 100.0%Fmax 0.1% 100.0% ○ 2 7.2.3
curve 2 Max input Flux value: 0.0 ~ 100.0%Φe
Curve 2 turning
F09.13 F09.15 ~ F09.11 0.1% 100.0% ○ 2 7.2.3
point 2 input
Curve 2 turning
F09.14 100.0%Fmax 0.1% 100.0% ○ 2 7.2.3
point 2 input value
Curve 2 turning
F09.15 F09.09 ~ F09.13 0.1% 0 ○ 2 7.2.3
point 1 input
Curve 2 turning
F09.16 100.0%Fmax 0.1% 0 ○ 2 7.2.3
point 1 input value
Function Change Password Corresponding

Name Setting range Min. unit Default
code -ability level chapter
F10.00 Multi frequency 1 0.01Hz 5.00 ○ 2 7.2.3
F08.12 ~ F08.11

Function Change Password Corresponding

Name Setting range Min. unit Default
code -ability level chapter
F10.10 Multi frequency 11 F08.12 ~ F08.11 0.01Hz 30.00 ○ 2 7.2.3
Correspon
Function Min. Change- Password
Name Setting range Default -ding
code unit ability level
chapter
0 ~ 1123H
LED unit’s place: PLC running mode
0: No action
1: Stop after single circulation
2: Keep final value after single circulation
3: Continuous circulation
LED ten’s place: restart mode
0: Start running from phase 1
Simplified PLC
1: Continue running at the phase
function
F11.00 frequency upon stopping (or fault) 1 0 × 2 7.2.3
running mode
2: Continue running at the running
selection
LED hundred’s place: parameter storage
upon power failure
0: No storage
1: Store phase and frequency of the
moment of power failure
LED thousand’s place: unit selection of
phase time: 0: s; 1: m
0 ~ 23H
LED unit’s place:
1: Decided by F08.00 function code
2: Multi-section closed loop input i
3: Decided by F17.01 function code
LED ten’s place:
0: Run forward
1: Run reverse
F11.01 Phase 1 setting 2: Confirmed by running command 1 0 ○ 2 7.2.3
LED hundred’s place:
0: Multi section acceleration/deceleration
time 1;
time 2;
time 3;
time 4
Phase 1
F11.02 0 ~ 6500.0s 0.1s 20 ○ 2 7.2.3
running time
F11.03 Phase 2 setting The same as phase 1 1 0 ○ 2 7.2.3
Phase 2
F11.04 0 ~ 6500.0s 0.1s 20 ○ 2 7.2.3
running time
Phase 3
F11.06 0 ~ 6500.0s 0.1s 20 ○ 2 7.2.3
running time

Correspon
chapter
Phase 4
F11.08 0 ~ 6500.0s 0.1s 20 ○ 2 7.2.3
running time
Phase 5
F11.10 0 ~ 6500.0s 0.1s 20 ○ 2 7.2.3
running time
Phase 6
F11.12 0 ~ 6500.0s 0.1s 20 ○ 2 7.2.3
running time
Phase 7
F11.14 0 ~ 6500.0s 0.1s 20 ○ 2 7.2.3
running time
Phase 8
F11.16 0 ~ 6500.0s 0.1s 20 ○ 2 7.2.3
running time
Phase 9
F11.18 0 ~ 6500.0s 0.1s 20 ○ 2 7.2.3
running time
Phase 10
F11.19 The same as phase 1 1 0 ○ 2 7.2.3
setting
Phase 10
F11.20 0 ~ 6500.0s 0.1s 20 ○ 2 7.2.3
running time
Phase 11
setting
Phase 11
F11.22 0 ~ 6500.0s 0.1s 20 ○ 2 7.2.3
running time
Phase 12
setting
Phase 12
F11.24 0 ~ 6500.0s 0.1s 20 ○ 2 7.2.3
running time
Phase 13
setting
Phase 13
F11.26 0 ~ 6500.0s 0.1s 20 ○ 2 7.2.3
running time
Phase 14
setting
Phase 14
F11.28 0 ~ 6500.0s 0.1s 20 ○ 2 7.2.3
running time
Phase 15
setting
Phase 15
F11.30 0 ~ 6500.0s 0.1s 20 ○ 2 7.2.3
running time
Correspon
chapter
0~3
0: Control via control cabinet
(including touch screen and control
Running command
F12.00 panel) 1 0 ○ 3 7.2.4
channel selection
1: Control via multi function terminal
2: Control via COM1 (factory debug)
3: Control via COM2
Running direction 0~1
F12.01 1 0 ○ 3 7.2.4
setting 0: Run forward; 1: Run reverse

Correspon
chapter
0 ~ 6666H
Unit’s place: frequency channel
selection in touch screen control
mode
0: No binding
1: Digital input 1, input via
touch-screen
2: Digital input 2, input via multi
function terminal
3: Input via COM1 (factory debug)
4: Input via COM2
Running command
channel binding
F12.02 6: Internal preset input 1 0 ○ 2 7.2.4
frequency input
Ten's place: Frequency channel
channel
selection in 'Control via multi
function terminal' mode
0 ~ 6: the same as the above
Hundred's place: Frequency
channel selection in 'Control via
COM1 (factory debug)' mode
Thousand's place: Frequency
channel selection in 'Control via
COM2' mode
0~2
0: Start from startup frequency
F12.03 Startup running mode 1 0 × 3 7.2.4
1: Brake then start from startup freq.
2: Start on the fly
0.01
F12.04 Startup frequency 0.00 ~ 30.00Hz 1.00 ○ 2 7.2.4
Hz
Startup frequency
F12.05 0.00 ~ 10.00s 0.01s 0 ○ 2 7.2.4
holding time
Startup DC braking 0.0% ~ 150.0% of motor rated
F12.06 0.1% 100.0% ○ 2 7.2.4
current current
Startup DC braking
F12.07 0.00 ~ 600.00s 0.01s 60.00 ○ 2 7.2.4
time
Startup DC braking
F12.08 0.00 ~ 600.00s 0.01s 5.00 ○ 2 7.2.4
waiting
0~3
0: Decelerate to stop
1: Coast to stop 7.2.4
F12.09 Stop mode 2: Deceleration to stop + DC 1 0 × 3
braking
3: Deceleration to stop + excitation
braking
Stopping DC braking 0.01
F12.10 1.00 ~ 50.00Hz 50.00 ○ 2 7.2.4
start frequency Hz
Stopping DC braking
F12.11 0.00 ~ 600.00s 0.01s 5.00 ○ 2 7.2.4
waiting
Stopping DC braking 0.0% ~ 150.0% of motor rated
F12.12 0.1% 100.0% ○ 2 7.2.4
current current
Stopping DC braking
F12.13 0.00 ~ 600.00s 0.01s 60.00 ○ 2 7.2.4
time
Selection of 0~1
non-stopping upon 0: No action
F12.14 1 1 × 2 7.2.4
instantaneous power 1: Action (keep output upon power
failure failure)

Correspon
chapter
0~1
0: Allowing ‘run reverse’ 7.2.4
Selection of run
F12.15 1: Prohibiting ‘run reverse’ (running 1 0 × 2
reverse prevention
at zero frequency when ‘Run
reverse’ comannd is added)
Run forward / reverse
F12.16 0.00 ~ 360.00s 0.01s 0 ○ 2 7.2.4
dead time
F12.17 Reserved 0 ~ 65535 1 0 × 2 /
0.00 ~ 120.00Hz, valid only when 0.01
F12.18 Stopping speed 0.10 × 2 7.2.4
F12.09 is equal to 0 Hz
0~1
Stopping speed 0: Speed setting (only the detection
F12.19 1 0 × 2 7.2.4
detecting mode mode is available in V/F mode)
1: Speed detection value
Stopping speed delay
F12.20 0.00 ~ 10.00s 0.01s 0.05 × 2 7.2.4
time
Excitation braking 0.01
F12.21 1.00 ~ 50.00Hz 50.00 ○ 2 7.2.4
start frequency Hz
F12.22 Reserved 0 ~ 65535 1 0 ○ 2 /
Excitation braking 0.0% ~ 100.0% of motor rated 0.10
F12.23 100.0% ○ 2 7.2.4
current current %
Excitation braking
F12.24 0.00 ~ 600.00s 0.01s 60.00 ○ 2 7.2.4
time
0~2
0: Direct line acceleration /
Acceleration / 7.2.4
deceleration
F12.25 deceleration mode 1 0 × 3
1: S curve acceleration /
selection
deceleration
2: Auto acceleration / deceleration
F12.26 Reserved 0 ~ 65535 1 0 × 2 7.2.3
F12.27 Acceleration time 0.1 ~ 3600.0s 0.1s 60.0 ○ 3 7.2.4
F12.28 Deceleration time 0.1 ~ 3600.0s 0.1s 60.0 ○ 3 7.2.4
S curve acceleration
F12.29 10.0% ~ 50.0% (Acceleration time) 0.1% 20.0% ○ 2 7.2.4
startup time
S curve acceleration
F12.30 10.0% ~ 80.0% (Acceleration time) 0.1% 20.0% ○ 2 7.2.4
end time
S curve deceleration
F12.31 10.0% ~ 50.0% (Deceleration time) 0.1% 20.0% ○ 2 7.2.4
startup time
S curve deceleration
F12.32 10.0% ~ 80.0% (Deceleration time) 0.1% 20.0% ○ 2 7.2.4
end time
F12.33 Jog acceleration time 0.0 ~ 3600.0s 0.1 60.0 ○ 2 7.2.4
F12.34 Jog deceleration time 0.0 ~ 3600.0s 0.1 60.0 ○ 2 7.2.4
F12.35 Jog interval time 1.0 ~ 100.0s 0.1 10.0 ○ 2 7.2.4
0~2
Phase shift
0: 100% of nominal voltage output
F12.36 transformer output 1 0 × 2 7.2.4
1: 95% of nominal voltage
voltage selection
2: 105% of nominal voltage
F12.37 Reserved 0 ~ 65535 1 0 × 2 /
Auto current limiting
F12.38 20.0% ~ 200.0% 0.1% 100.0% × 2 7.2.4
level
Bottom fan startup
F12.39 40.0 ~ 100.0°C 0.1 40.0 ○ 2 7.2.4
temperature
Temperature
F12.40 5.0 ~ 30.0°C 0.1 10.0 ○ 2 7.2.4
hysteresis

Function Password Corresponding

Name Setting range Min. unit Default Changeability
code level chapter
0~3
0: 0: Comm Debug
F13.00 Control mode 1: Main-Slave Control 1 1 × 2 7.2.4
2: Synchronized
Control
0~1
F13.01 Reserved 0: hard connection 1 0 × 2 /
1: soft connection
Average Current
F13.02 0 ~ 100.0% 1.00% 1% ○ 2 7.2.4
Dead-zone
0~1
Loop Control
F13.03 0: Pi control 1 0 × 2 7.2.4
Mode
1: Step control
F13.04 Control Step 0 ~ 65535 1 192 ○ 2 7.2.4
F13.05 Control Period 2 ~ 100ms 1ms 4 ○ 2 7.2.4
Average Current
F13.06 0 ~ 65535 1 4096 ○ 2 7.2.4
Kp
Average Current
F13.07 0 ~ 65535 1 4096 ○ 2 7.2.4
Ki
Average Current
F13.08 0 ~ 65535 1 0 ○ 2 7.2.4
Kc
Pre-tensioning
F13.09 0 ~ 65535s 1s 20 ○ 2 7.2.4
Time
Pre-tensioning
F13.10 0 ~ 50Hz 1Hz 5 ○ 2 7.2.4
Frequency
Frequency Setting 0~1
F13.11 Mode for 0: Master-Slave 1 0 × 2 7.2.4
Parallel-comm 1: Average-Value
Parallel-comm
F13.12 Start-stop CMD 1 ~ 2000ms 1ms 500 ○ 2 7.2.4
Holding Time
Groups F14 is reserved.

Function Password Corresponding
Name Setting range Min. unit Default Changeability
code level chapter
F15.00 Pre-excitation time 0.0 ~ 10.0s 0.1s 0 × 2 7.2.4
Pre-excitation
F15.01 0 ~ 200.0% 0.1% 100% × 2 7.2.4
current
Field weakening
F15.02 0 ~ 200.0% 0.1% 100% ○ 2 7.2.4
control coefficient
Min flux reference
F15.03 10% ~ 80% 1% 10% × 2 7.2.4
value

F16.00 User self-defined analog value 1 0 ~ 65535 1 0 * 3 7.2.8


0 ~ FFFFH
BIT0 ~ BIT7:
User-defined alarm
BIT8 ~ BIT15:
F16.08 User-defined fault input word 1 0 * 3 7.2.8
User-defined fault
The correspondng
bit is 1, indicating an
alarm/fault occurs
0 ~ FFFFH
BIT0 ~ BIT15
0: User unmasked
F16.09 User-defined fault mask word 1 0 * 3 7.2.8
fault bit
1: User masked fault
bit
Correspon
chapter
0~1 7.2.4
Closed loop function
F17.00 0: No action 1 0 × 3
selection
1: Action
0~4
0: Digital input
F17.01 Input channel selection 1 1 ○ 3 7.2.4
1: AI1; 2: AI2;
3: AI3; 4: AI4
0~3
Feedback channel
F17.02 0: AI1; 1: AI2; 1 1 ○ 3 7.2.4
selection
2: AI3; 3: AI4
Input channel filter
F17.03 0.01 ~ 50.00s 0.01s 0.50 ○ 2 7.2.4
constant
Feedback channel filter
F17.04 0.01 ~ 50.00s 0.01s 0.50 ○ 2 7.2.4
constant
Digital setting for
F17.05 -10.00V ~ 10.00V 0.01V 0 ○ 2 7.2.4
reference input
0.0% ~ (F17.08) (percentage of
F17.06 Min reference input min. input value in the basic 0.1% 0 ○ 2 7.2.4
value 10V or 20mA)
0.0 ~ 100.0% (percentage of
Feedback value
feedback value corresponded to
F17.07 corresponded to Min 0.1% 0 ○ 2 7.2.4
min. input value in the basic
reference
value 10V or 20mA)
(F17.06) ~ 100.0% (percentage
F17.08 Max reference input of max. input value in the basic 0.1% 100.0% ○ 2 7.2.4
value 10V or 20mA)
0.0 ~ 100.0% (percentage of
Feedback value
feedback value corresponded to
F17.09 corresponded to Max 0.1% 100.0% ○ 2 7.2.4
max. input value in the basic
reference
value 10V or 20mA)
F17.10 Proportional gain Kp 0.000 ~ 50.000 0.001 2.000 ○ 2 7.2.4
F17.11 Integration gain Ki 0.000 ~ 50.000 0.001 0.100 ○ 2 7.2.4
F17.12 Sampling cycle 0.01 ~ 50.00s 0.01s 0.50 ○ 2 7.2.4
F17.13 Output filter time 0.01 ~ 10.00s 0.01s 0.05 ○ 2 7.2.4
0.0 ~ 20.0% (corresponded to
F17.14 Deviation limit 0.1% 2.0% ○ 2 7.2.4
process closed loop input)
0~1
0: Positive effect
Closed loop regulation
F17.15 1: Negative effect 1 0 × 3 7.2.4
characteristic
Note: the relation between input
and rotation speed

Correspon
chapter
0~1
0: When the frequency reaches
the high or low limit, stop
Integration regulation
F17.16 integration regulation 1 0 × 2 7.2.4
selection
1: When the frequency reaches
the high or low limit, continue
integration regulation
Closed loop preset
F17.17 0.00 ~ 120.00Hz 0.01Hz 0 ○ 2 7.2.4
frequency
Preset frequency
F17.18 0.0 ~ 3600.0s 0.1s 0 ○ 2 7.2.4
holding time
F17.19 -10.00 ~ 10.00V 0.01V 0 ○ 2 7.2.4
loop input 1
F17.20 -10.00 ~ 10.00V 0.01V 0 ○ 2 7.2.4
loop input 2
F17.21 -10.00 ~ 10.00V 0.01V 0 ○ 2 7.2.4
loop input 3
F17.22 -10.00 ~ 10.00V 0.01V 0 ○ 2 7.2.4
loop input 4
F17.23 -10.00 ~ 10.00V 0.01V 0 ○ 2 7.2.4
loop input 5
F17.24 -10.00 ~ 10.00V 0.01V 0 ○ 2 7.2.4
loop input 6
F17.25 -10.00 ~ 10.00V 0.01V 0 ○ 2 7.2.4
loop input 7
F17.26 -10.00 ~ 10.00V 0.01V 0 ○ 2 7.2.4
loop input 8
F17.27 -10.00 ~ 10.00V 0.01V 0 ○ 2 7.2.4
loop input 9
F17.28 -10.00 ~ 10.00V 0.01V 0 ○ 2 7.2.4
loop input 10
F17.29 -10.00 ~ 10.00V 0.01V 0 ○ 2 7.2.4
loop input 11
F17.30 -10.00 ~ 10.00V 0.01V 0 ○ 2 7.2.4
loop input 12
F17.31 -10.00 ~ 10.00V 0.01V 0 ○ 2 7.2.4
loop input 13
F17.32 -10.00 ~ 10.00V 0.01V 0 ○ 2 7.2.4
loop input 14
F17.33 -10.00 ~ 10.00V 0.01V 0 ○ 2 7.2.4
loop input 15
0~1
0: Run at zero frequency when
the process closed loop output
is negative.
Closed loop output 1: Run reverse when the
F17.34 1 0 ○ 2 7.2.4
invert selection process closed loop output is
negative. However, if ‘Run
reverse prohibition’ is set, the
inverter will run at zero
frequency
Closed loop feedback 0.0 ~ 100.0%
F17.35 0.1% 50.0% ○ 2 7.2.4
loss detection value Max. output frequency is100%
Closed loop feedback
F17.36 0.0s ~ 20.0s 0.1s 1.0 ○ 2 7.2.4
loss detection time


0 ~ 54
0: No function
1: Multi-section frequency terminal 1
Input terminal X1
F18.00 2: Multi-section frequency terminal 2 1 44 × 2 7.2.6
function selection
5: System bypass fault input
6: External fault normally open input
7: External fault normally close input
8: External reset (RESET) input
Input terminal X2 9: External jog operation (run forward)
F18.01 1 45 × 2 7.2.6
function selection control input
10: External jog operation (run
reverse) control input
11: Emergency stop
12: Coast to stop input (FRS)
13: Frequency increasing command
Input terminal X3 (UP)
F18.02 14: Frequency decreasing command 1 46 × 2 7.2.6
function selection
(DOWN)
15: Running command of stopping
simplified PLC function temporarily
16: Acceleration and deceleration
prohibition command
17: 3-line running control
Input terminal X4 18: External cut-off normally open
F18.03 1 0 × 2 7.2.6
function selection contact input
19: External cut-off normally close
contact input
20: Stop DC braking input command
21: Closed loop prohibition
22: Simplified PLC function prohibition
Input terminal X5 23: Main frequency setting source
F18.04 1 0 × 2 7.2.6
function selection selection 1
24: Main frequency setting source
selection 2
25: Main frequency setting source
selection 3
26: Main frequency setting switched
to AI
Input terminal X6
F18.05 27: Command switched to terminals 1 47 × 2 7.2.6
function selection
28: Command source selection 1
31: Multi-section closed loop input
terminal 1
terminal 2
terminal 3
Input terminal X7
F18.06 34: Multi-section closed loop input 1 48 × 2 7.2.6
function selection
terminal 4
35: External stop command
36: Inverter operation prohibition
37: Run forward prohibition
38: Run reverse prohibition
39: Open/closed loop switch terminal


40: Pre-excitation command terminal
41: Motor 1 and 2 switch terminal
42: FWD
43: REV
44: Remote startup
Input terminal X8 45: Remote stop
F18.07 1 0 × 2 7.2.6
function selection 46: Remote jog
47: Switching-on operation
48: Switching-off operation
49: Memory clearance upon stop of
simplified PLC function
50 ~ 54: Reserved
0~4
0: Control via remote terminal
1: 2-line control mode 1 (any two
terminals in X1 ~ X8)
2: 2-line control mode 2 (any two
Running mode terminals in X1 ~ X8)
F18.08 1 0 × 2 7.2.6
setting 3: 3-line control mode 1 -
self-conserved function (any three
4: 3-line control mode 2 -
self-conserved function (any three
Terminal UP 0.01
F18.09 0.01 ~ 99.99Hz/s 1.00 ○ 2 7.2.6
acceleration rate Hz/s
Terminal DOWN 0.01
F18.10 0.01 ~ 99.99Hz/s 1.00 ○ 2 7.2.6
deceleration rate Hz/s
External terminal
F18.11 0 ~ 500ms 1ms 10 ○ 2 7.2.6
filter time
0 ~ FFH
Binary system setting
Input terminal
0: Normal logic, valid upon connection
F18.12 effective state 1 0 ○ 2 7.2.6
1: Reserve logic, valid upon
setting
disconnection
BIT0 ~ BIT7: X1 ~ X8
Correspon
chapter
0 ~ 35
F19.00 Relay output terminal Y1 0: Signal in inverter operation 1 0 × 2 7.2.6
(RUN)
1: Frequency arrived signal (FAR)
2: Frequency level detection signal
(FDT1)
F19.01 Relay output terminal Y2 3: Frequency level detection signal 1 0 × 2 7.2.6
(FDT2)
4: Overload detection signal (OL)
5: Reserved
F19.02 Relay output terminal Y3 6: Stop upon external fault (EXT) 1 0 × 2 7.2.6
7: Frequency high limit (FHL)
8: Frequency low limit (FLL)
9: Inverter running at zero speed
10: Indication for completing
F19.03 Relay output terminal Y4 operation in simplified PLC 1 0 × 2 7.2.6
function phase

Correspon
chapter
11: Indication for completing
circulation of simplified PLC
F19.04 Relay output terminal Y5 function 1 0 × 2 7.2.6
12: Inverter alarm
13: Ready for inverter operation
(RDY)
F19.05 Relay output terminal Y6 14: Inverter fault 1 0 × 2 7.2.6
15: Power unit in bypass operation
16: Indication terminal of motor 1
and 2
17: Flux detection signal
F19.06 Relay output terminal Y7 1 0 × 2 7.2.6
It is valid when the flux detection
value exceeds the setting.
18: Remote control
19: Local control
F19.07 Relay output terminal Y8 20: RUN indicator 1 0 × 2 7.2.6
21: CHARGING indicator
22: ALARM indicator
23: FAULT indicator
24: Soft start bypass closing
F19.08 Transistor Y11 output 1 0 × 2 7.2.6
command
25: Soft start output opening
command
26: Severe fault
F19.09 Transistor Y12 output 27: Minor fault 1 0 × 2 7.2.6
28: Faulty bypass closing
command
29: Output breaker closing
F19.10 Transistor Y13 output command 1 0 × 2 7.2.6
30: Working in frequency
conversion
31: Working in automatic bypass
32: Severe fault of belt parallel
F19.11 Transistor Y14 output system 1 0 × 2 7.2.6
33: Minor fault of belt parallel
system
34: Brake release signal
F19.12 Transistor Y15 output 35: Closing bypass contact from 1 0 × 2 7.2.6
frequency conversion to working
frequency
36: Opening output contact from
frequency conversion to working
F19.13 Transistor Y16 output frequency 1 0 × 2 7.2.6
37: Opening bypass contact from
working frequency to frequency
conversion
F19.14 Transistor Y17 output 38: Closing output contact from 1 0 × 2 7.2.6
working frequency to frequency
conversion
39: Control command of excitation
cabinet
F19.15 Transistor Y18 output 40: Inverter ready signal 1 0 × 2 7.2.6
41: Allowing manual closing signal
42 ~ 50: Reserved
Binary system setting 0 ~ FFFFH
0: Valid upon connection
Output terminal
F19.16 1: Valid upon disconnection 1 0 ○ 2 7.2.6
effective state setting
BIT0 ~ BIT7: Relay Y1 ~ Y8
BIT8 ~ BIT15: Transistor Y11 ~ Y18

Correspon
chapter
F19.17 Relay Y1 output delay 0.1 ~ 10.0s 0.1s 0.1 ○ 2 7.2.6
Frequency reached
F19.25 0.00 ~ 120.00Hz 0.01Hz 2.50 ○ 2 7.2.6
(FAR) detection width
0~1
0: Speed setting (frequency
F19.26 FDT1 detection mode command after acceleration and 1 0 ○ 2 7.2.6
deceleration)
F19.27 FDT1 level 0.00 ~ 120.00Hz 0.01Hz 50.00 ○ 2 7.2.6
F19.28 FDT1 delay 0.00 ~ 120.00Hz 0.01Hz 1.00 ○ 2 7.2.6
0~1
0: Speed setting (frequency
F19.29 FDT2 detection mode command after acceleration and 1 0 ○ 2 7.2.6
deceleration)
F19.30 FDT2 level 0.00 ~ 120.00Hz 0.01Hz 25.00 ○ 2 7.2.6
F19.31 FDT2 delay 0.00 ~ 120.00Hz 0.01Hz 1.00 ○ 2 7.2.6
F19.32 Flux detected value 10.0% ~ 100.0% 0.1% 100.0% ○ 2 7.2.6
Correspon
code -ability level
chapter
0 ~ 111H
Unit’s place: AI1
0: Voltage input
1: Current input
Ten’s place: AI2
Transducer output
F27.00 0: Voltage input 1 0 × 2 7.2.6
type selection
1: Current input
Hundred’s place: AI3
0: Voltage input
1: Current input
AI4 is differential voltage input
0~4
AI1 function 0: No function 7.2.6
F27.01 1 0 × 2
selection 1: Main frequency setting input
2 ~ 4: Reserved
AI1 input zero drift
F27.02 -100.0% ~ 100.0% 0.1% 0 ○ 2 7.2.6
correction
F27.03 AI1 input gain -10.00 ~ 10.00 0.01 1.00 ○ 2 7.2.6
F27.04 AI1 filter 0.01 ~ 10.00s 0.01s 1.00 ○ 2 7.2.6
0~3
1: Lower than zero drift, so it is
AI1 zero drift equal to zero drift 7.2.6
F27.05 1 0 × 2
correction mode 2: Higher than zero drift, so it is
equal to zero drift
3: Taking zero drift as center and
taking the absolute value

Correspon
code -ability level
chapter
0~4
AI2 function 0: No function
F27.06 1 0 × 2 7.2.6
2 ~ 4: Reserved
F27.07 -100.0% ~ 100.0% 0.1% 0 ○ 2 7.2.6
correction
F27.08 AI2 input gain -10.00 ~ 10.00 0.01 1.00 ○ 2 7.2.6
F27.09 AI2 filter 0.01 ~ 10.00s 0.01s 1.00 ○ 2 7.2.6
0~3
AI2 zero drift equal to zero drift
F27.10 1 0 × 2 7.2.6
equal to zero drift
0~4
F27.11 1 0 × 2 7.2.6
2 ~ 4: Reserved
F27.12 -100.0% ~ 100.0% 0.1% 0 ○ 2 7.2.6
correction
F27.13 AI3 input gain -10.00 ~ 10.00 0.01 1.00 ○ 2 7.2.6
F27.14 AI3 filter 0.01 ~ 10.00s 0.01s 1.00 ○ 2 7.2.6
0~3
AI3 zero drift equal to zero drift 7.2.6
F27.15 1 0 × 2
equal to zero drift
0~4
F27.16 1 0 × 2 7.2.6
2 ~ 4: Reserved
F27.17 -100.0% ~ 100.0% 0.1% 0 ○ 2 7.2.6
correction
F27.18 AI4 input gain -10.00 ~ 10.00 0.01 1.00 ○ 2 7.2.6
F27.19 AI4 filter 0.01 ~ 10.00s 0.01s 1.00 ○ 2 7.2.6
0~3
AI4 zero drift equal to zero drift
F27.20 1 0 × 2 7.2.6
equal to zero drift
Correspon
chapter
0 ~ 1111H
Unit’s place: AO1 selection
0: 0 ~ 10V
Transducer input
F28.00 1: 0 ~ 20mA 1 0 × 2 7.2.6
type selection
Ten’s place: AO2 selection
0: 0 ~ 10V
1: 0 ~ 20mA

Correspon
chapter
Hundred’s place: AO3 selection
0: 0 ~ 10V
Transducer input 1: 0 ~ 20mA
F28.00 1 0 × 2 7.2.6
type selection Thousand’s place: AO4 selection
0: 0 ~ 10V
1: 0 ~ 20mA
0 ~ 20
0: Output frequency (0 ~ max. output
frequency)
1: Frequency setting (0 ~ max. output
frequency)
2: Frequency setting after
acceleration and deceleration (0 ~
max. output frequency)
3: Rotation speed of the motor (0 ~
max. rotation speed)
4: Output current (0 ~ two times as
large as the rated current of the
inverter)
5: Output current (0 ~ two times as
large as the rated current of the
Analog output
motor)
F28.01 terminal AO1 1 0 × 2 7.2.6
6: Output torque (0 ~ three times as
function
large as the rated torque of the motor)
7: Output torque current (0 ~ three
times as large as the rated torque of
the motor)
8: Output voltage (0 ~ 1.2 times as
large as the rated voltage of the
inverter)
9: AI1 (0 ~ max. analog input)
12: AI4 (analog differential input 0 ~
10V)
13: Output power (0 ~ two times as
large as the rated power of the motor)
14 ~ 20: Reserved
F28.02 AO1 filter 0.0 ~ 20.0s 0.1s 0.1 ○ 2 7.2.6
100.0
F28.03 AO1 gain 0.0% ~ 200.0% 0.1% ○ 2 7.2.6
%
AO1 zero drift
F28.04 -100.0% ~ 100.0% 0.1% 0 ○ 2 7.2.6
correction
Analog output
F28.05 terminal AO2 The same as AO1 1 0 × 2 7.2.6
function
F28.06 AO2 filter 0.0 ~ 20.0s 0.1s 0.1 ○ 2 7.2.6
100.0
F28.07 AO2 gain 0.0% ~ 200.0% 0.1% ○ 2 7.2.6
%
AO2 zero drift
F28.08 -100.0% ~ 100.0% 0.1% 0 ○ 2 7.2.6
correction
Analog output
function
F28.10 AO3 filter 0.0 ~ 20.0s 0.1s 0.1 ○ 2 7.2.6
100.0
F28.11 AO3 gain 0.0% ~ 200.0% 0.1% ○ 2 7.2.6
%
AO3 zero drift
F28.12 -100.0% ~ 100.0% 0.1% 0 ○ 2 7.2.6
correction

Correspon
chapter
Analog output
function
F28.14 AO4 filter 0.0 ~ 20.0s 0.1s 0.1 ○ 2 7.2.6
100.0
F28.15 AO4 gain 0.0% ~ 200.0% 0.1% ○ 2 7.2.6
%
AO4 zero drift
F28.16 -100.0% ~ 100.0% 0.1% 0 ○ 2 7.2.6
correction
Correspon
chapter
0 ~ FFFFH:
0: User unmasked fault bit
1: User masked fault bit
BIT0: Input voltage high
BIT1: Input over voltage
BIT2: Input voltage low
BIT3: Input phase imbalance
System fault mask BIT4: Inverter overload pre-alarm
F29.00 1 0 × 2 7.2.5
word BIT5: Output grounded
BIT6: Motor underload protection
BIT7: Motor speed abnormal
BIT8: Motor over speed pre-alarm
BIT9: Motor overload
BIT10: Closed loop feedback signal
loss
BIT11 ~ 15: Reserved
0 ~ FFFFH:
0: User unmasked fault bit
1: User masked fault bit
BIT0: Power unit bypass contactor
failure
BIT1 ~ 5: Reserved
Power unit fault mask BIT6: Power unit IGBT over
F29.01 1 0 × 2 7.2.5
word temperature pre-alarm
BIT7 ~ 10: Reserved
BIT11: Power unit DC over voltage
pre-alarm
BIT15: Power unit bypass optical
fiber failure
0 ~ FFFFH:
0: Alarm/minor fault (A/F1)
1: Severe fault (F2)
BIT0: Input over voltage (A/F2)
BIT1: Input under voltage (A/F2)
BIT2: Input phase imbalance (A/F2)
BIT3: Output phase imbalance
Fault handling method
F29.02 (A/F2) 1 0 × 2 7.2.5
selection
BIT4: Output phase loss (A/F2)
BIT5: Output grounded (A/F2)
BIT6: Under load protection (A/F2)
BIT7: PG fault (F1/F2)
loss fault (F1/F2)
BIT9 ~ 15: Reserved

Correspon
chapter
0 ~ 4:
0: Running at current frequency
setting
Continuous running 1: Running at the frequency set via
F29.03 frequency selection at F08.01 1 0 × 2 7.2.5
minor fault 2: Running at upper frequency limit
3: Running at lower frequency limit
4: Running at continuous running
frequency at minor fault
Continuous running
0.0% ~ 100.0% (speed before the
F29.04 frequency setting at 0.1% 100.0% × 2 7.2.5
fault)
minor fault
Motor under load
F29.05 protection detection 0.0 ~ 100.0% 0.1% 100.0% × 2 7.2.5
level
Motor under load
F29.06 protection detection 0.0 ~ 3600.0s 0.1s 600.0 × 2 7.2.5
time
Motor abnormal speed
F29.07 0.0 ~ 100.0% 0.1% 20.0% × 2 7.2.5
detection level
Motor abnormal speed
F29.08 0.0 ~ 3600.0s 0.1s 600.0 × 2 7.2.5
detection time
F29.09 Max allowed RPM 0% ~ 130.0% 0.1% 120.0% × 2 7.2.5
Motor over speed
F29.10 pre-alarm detection 0.0 ~ 3600.0s 0.1s 600.0 × 2 7.2.5
time
Motor over speed
time
PG feedback signal
F29.12 abnormal detection 0.0 ~ 10.0s 0.1s 10.0 × 2 7.2.5
time
Motor over current
F29.13 pre-alarm detection 100.0% ~ 250.0% 0.1% 110.0% × 2 7.2.5
level
Motor over current
F29.14 protection detection 100.0% ~ 250.0% 0.1% 125.0% × 2 7.2.5
level
Motor over current
time
Motor overload
F29.16 20.0% ~ 200.0% 0.1% 120.0% × 2 7.2.5
detection level
Motor overload
F29.17 0.0 ~ 3600.0s 0.1s 600.0 × 2 7.2.5
detection time
Input phase
F29.18 imbalance judgment 0 ~ 100.0% 0.1% 90.0% × 2 7.2.5
coefficient k
Output phase
F29.19 imbalance judgment 0 ~ 100.0% 0.1% 90.0% × 2 7.2.5
coefficient k
Phase shift
F29.20 transformer over 60.0 ~ 160.0°C 0.1°C 110.0 × 2 7.2.5
temperature pre-alarm
Phase shift
transformer over
F29.21 80.0 ~ 180.0°C 0.1°C 130.0 × 2 7.2.5
temperature
protection

Correspon
chapter
F30.00 Local unit Reserved 0 ~ 247 1 1 × 2 7.2.7
F30.01 communication Reserved 0 ~ 1000ms 1ms 5 × 2 7.2.7
0~1
Protocol
F30.02 0: MODBUS 1 0 × 3 7.2.7
selection
1: Reserved
0~6
0: 9600BPS
1: 19200BPS
Baud rate 2: 38400BPS
F30.03 1 4 × 3 7.2.7
selection 3: 57600BPS
4: 115200BPS
5: 125000BPS
6: 230400BPS
COM1 (factory 0~5
debug) 0: 1-8-2-N format, RTU
communication 1: 1-8-1-E format, RTU
with main 2: 1-8-1-O format, RTU
controller Data format 3: 1-7-2-N format,
F30.04 1 0 × 3 7.2.7
selection ASCII
4: 1-7-1-E format,
ASCII
5: 1-7-1-O format,
ASCII
F30.05 Reserved 0~1 1 0 × 2 /
COM1 (factory
debug)
F30.06 communication 0.0 ~ 1000.0s 0.1s 0.0 × 2 7.2.7
overtime
detected time
0~1
Protocol
F30.07 0: MODBUS 1 0 × 3 7.2.7
selection
1: Reserved
0~6
0: 9600BPS
1: 19200BPS
Baud rate 2: 38400BPS
F30.08 1 4 × 3 7.2.7
selection 3: 57600BPS
4: 115200BPS
5: 125000BPS
6: 230400BPS
COM2 0~5
communication 0: 1-8-2-N format, RTU
with main 1: 1-8-1-E format, RTU
controller 2: 1-8-1-O format, RTU
Data format 3: 1-7-2-N format,
F30.09 1 0 × 3 7.2.7
selection ASCII
4: 1-7-1-E format,
ASCII
5: 1-7-1-O format,
ASCII
F30.10 Reserved 0~1 1 0 × 2 /
COM2
communication
F30.11 0.0 ~ 1000.0s 0.1s 0.0 × 2 7.2.7
overtime
detected time
Group F63 parameters are factory parameters, not open to the user.


0 ~ FFFFH:
BIT0: Input voltage high
BIT1: Input over voltage
BIT2: Input voltage high limit
BIT3: Input voltage low
Input side fault BIT4: Input voltage low limit
F64.00 1 0 * 3 7.2.5
state word BIT5: Input phase imbalance
BIT6: Input over current
BIT7: Input phase reverse
BIT8: Input under frequency
BIT9: Input over frequency
0 ~ FFFFH:
BIT0: Output over current
BIT1: Inverter overload pre-alarm
Output side fault BIT2: Inverter overload protection
F64.01 1 0 * 3 8.2
state word BIT3: Output phase imbalance
BIT4: Output phase loss
BIT5: Output grounded
BIT6 ~ 15: Reserved
0 ~ FFFFH:
BIT0: Under load protection
BIT1: Rotating speed abnormal
BIT2: Over speed alarm
BIT3: Overspeed protection
Motor fault state
F64.02 BIT4: PG fault 1 0 * 3 7.2.5
word 1
BIT5: Motor over current pre-alarm
BIT6: Motor over current protection
BIT7: Motor over load
BIT8: Run reverse fault
0 ~ FFFFH
BIT0 ~ 7: User self-defined alarm
User self-defined
F64.03 BIT8 ~ 15: User self-defined fault 1 0 * 3 7.2.8
fault output word
The corresponding bit is 1,
indicating an alarm or fault occurs
0 ~ FFFFH:
BIT0: Phase shift transformer
overheat pre-alarm
BIT1: Phase shift transformer
overheat protection
BIT2: Cooling fan overheat fault
BIT3: Soft startup pre-charging
failure
BIT4: Ambient over temperature
BIT5: High voltage sampling circuit
fault in control power supply
Inverter system BIT6: Low voltage sampling circuit
F64.04 1 0 * 3 8.2
fault state word 1 fault in control power supply
BIT7: AC/DC power supply failure
BIT8: 5V power failure
BIT9: DCDC 1 failure
BIT10: DCDC 2 failure
BIT11: Door of power cabinet
opened
BIT12: Door of transformer cabinet
opened
BIT13: Emergency power off
BIT14: Emergency stop
BIT15: External fault


0 ~ FFFFH:
BIT0: Bypass is working
BIT1: Start-on-fly failure
BIT2: Switching-off failure
Inverter system BIT3: Switching-on failure
F64.05 1 0 * 3 8.2
fault state word 2 BIT4: Phase shift transformer
PT100 opened
BIT5: Precharging CB open
BIT6: Control contactor abnormal
BIT7 ~ 15: Reserved
0 ~ FFFFH:
BIT0: EEPROM fault
BIT1: Dual RAM fault
BIT2: Reserved
BIT3: Power up self-detection
failure
BIT4: Parameter self adjustment
failure
Fault state word BIT5: FPGA fault
F64.06 related to single BIT6: Current detecting circuit 1 0 * 3 8.2
board abnormal
BIT7: System bypass fault
loss fault
BIT9: Power unit bypass
configuration fault
BIT10: Multi point fault in bypass
process
0 ~ FFFFH:
BIT0: Reserved
BIT1: HMI communication failure
BIT2: CAN (for IO management)
Communication
F64.07 communication failure 1 0 * 3 8.2
fault state word
BIT3: COM1 (factory debug)
communication failure
BIT4: COM2 communication failure
BIT5 ~ 15: Reserved
0 ~ FFFFH:
Power unit A1 BIT0: Power unit bypass contactor
F64.08 1 0 * 3 8.2
fault state word failure
BIT1: Power unit IGBT failure
BIT2: Power unit communication
Power unit B1
F64.09 failure 1 0 * 3 8.2
fault state word
BIT3: Power unit fuse broken
BIT4: Power unit IGBT over current
Power unit C1 BIT5: Power unit IGBT over
F64.10 temperature 1 0 * 3 8.2
fault state word
BIT6: Power unit IGBT over
temperature pre-alarm
Power unit A2 BIT7: Power unit DC voltage
F64.11 1 0 * 3 8.2
fault state word equalization resistor open
BIT8: Power unit input under
voltage
Power unit B2
F64.12 BIT9: Power unit DC capacitor over 1 0 * 3 8.2
fault state word
voltage
BIT10: Power unit DC over voltage
Power unit C2 BIT11: Power unit DC over voltage
F64.13 pre-alarm 1 0 * 3 8.2
fault state word


Power unit A3
F64.14 1 0 * 3 8.2
fault state word
Power unit B3
F64.15 1 0 * 3 8.2
fault state word
Power unit C3
F64.16 1 0 * 3 8.2
fault state word
Power unit A4
F64.17 1 0 * 3 8.2
fault state word
Power unit B4
F64.18 1 0 * 3 8.2
fault state word
Power unit C4
F64.19 1 0 * 3 8.2
fault state word
Power unit A5
F64.20 1 0 * 3 8.2
fault state word
Power unit B5
F64.21 1 0 * 3 8.2
fault state word
Power unit C5 BIT14: Power unit optic fiber fault
F64.22 1 0 * 3 8.2
fault state word BIT15: Power unit bypass optic fiber
Power unit A6
F64.23 fault 1 0 * 3 8.2
fault state word
Power unit B6
F64.24 1 0 * 3 8.2
fault state word
Power unit C6
F64.25 1 0 * 3 8.2
fault state word
Power unit A7
F64.26 1 0 * 3 8.2
fault state word
Power unit B7
F64.27 1 0 * 3 8.2
fault state word
Power unit C7
F64.28 1 0 * 3 8.2
fault state word
Power unit A8
F64.29 1 0 * 3 8.2
fault state word
Power unit B8
F64.30 1 0 * 3 8.2
fault state word
Power unit C8
F64.31 1 0 * 3 8.2
fault state word
Correspon
chapter
0~5
0: Touch-screen
1: Terminal UP/DOWN
Set main frequency
F08.00 2: Input via COM1 (factory debug) 1 0 ○ 3 7.2.3
source
3: Input via COM2
Digital setting of
F08.01 main frequency 0.00 ~ 120.00Hz 0.01Hz 50.00 ○ 3 7.2.3
setting
Upper frequency
F08.11 F08.12 ~ F08.10 0.01Hz 50.00 ○ 3 7.2.3
limit
Lower frequency
F08.12 0.00 ~ F08.11 0.01Hz 0 ○ 3 7.2.3
limit
Jog operation
F08.13 0.10 ~ 30.00Hz 0.01Hz 5.00 ○ 3 7.2.3
frequency
0~3
Running command 0: Control via control cabinet
F12.00 1 0 ○ 3 7.2.4
channel selection (including touch screen and control
panel)

Correspon
chapter
1: Control via multi function terminal
2: Control via COM1 (factory debug)
3: Control via COM2
0~1
Running direction
F12.01 0: Run forward 1 0 ○ 3 7.2.4
setting
1: Run reverse
0~2
Startup running 0: Start from startup frequency
F12.03 1 0 × 3 7.2.4
mode 1: Brake then start from startup freq.
2: Start on the fly
0~3
0: Decelerate to stop
1: Coast to stop
F12.09 Stop mode 2: Deceleration to stop + DC 1 0 × 3 7.2.4
braking
3: Deceleration to stop + excitation
braking
F12.27 Acceleration time 0.1 ~ 3600.0s 0.1s 60.0 ○ 3 7.2.4
F12.28 Deceleration time 0.1 ~ 3600.0s 0.1s 60.0 ○ 3 7.2.4
0 ~ 12H
Unit’s place:
Motor 1 control mode selection
0: Vector control without PG
Motor control mode 1: Vector control with PG
F04.00 1 0 × 3 7.2.2
selection 2: V/F control without PG
Ten’s place:
Motor selection
0: Motor 1
1: Motor 2
0~3
Motor 1 V/F curve
F05.00 1: 2-order curve 1 0 × 3 7.2.2
setting
2: 1.7-order curve
3: 1.2-order curve
Motor rated
F05.19 0 ~ 120.00Hz 0.01Hz 50.00 × 3 7.2.2
frequency
F05.20 0 ~ 7200RPM 1RPM 745 × 3 7.2.2
speed
F05.21 Motor PF 0.001 ~ 1.000 0.001 0.830 × 3 7.2.2

Appendix 2 Communication Mode 175
Appendix 2 Communication Mode
The inverter provides COM2 communication port for communication connection.

The following introduces the communication mode of the inverter, including connecting mode and port mode.
1. Connecting Mode
As shown in Figure 1, the connecting mode of the inverter is single host / single slave mode.
Host Host
(PC) (PLC)
RS232
RS232/RS485
conversion module RS485
RS485
Inverter Inverter
Figure 1 Schematic diagram of connecting mode of the inverter
2. Port Mode
The inverter provides COM2 communication port for the user, which is an RS485 port: asynchronous, semiduplex.
The default communication parameters are: 1-8-N-2, 115200bps, RTU. See descriptions of F30 group function code
for the parameter setting.
The communication protocol of the inverter is Modbus protocol, supportive of common register read-write. As a slave,
the inverter implements point-to-point communication with the host. The slave address is 0x01 by default.
 Note
1. Upon multi-inverter or long-distance communication, parallel-connect a 100Ω ~ 120Ω resistance between the positive and
negative ends of the signal cable used for communication in the master station, to improve the communication immunity.
2. The inverter only provides RS485 ports. If the communication port of the external device is RS232 port, a RS232/RS485
conversion module is required.

176 Appendix 3 Descriptions On System Automatic Bypass
Appendix 3 Descriptions On System Automatic Bypass
1. Operating Principle Of System Automatic Bypass

The operating principle of system automatic bypass is shown in Figure 2.
Figure 2 Simplified system schematic diagram
1.1 Conditions
1. ‘System-bypass Components Configuration’ is selected;

2. ‘System-bypass enable’ is selected;
3. Current operating status allows the inverter to switch to system automatic bypass;
4. The bypass breaker status is normal.
1.2 Switching Process
1. The inverter needs to stop running due to a severe fault;

2. If current working condition allows switching, the inverter will send out a switching signal of system bypass, QF1
and QF2 open, after a delay till the motor back-EMF eliminates, close QF3.
3．If the switch is successful, the motor will run under power frequency, any condition does not support switchback.
2. Setting Of System Automatic Bypass
2.1 HMI Setting
The bypass enabling setting in HMI is shown in Figure 3.

Appendix 3 Descriptions On System Automatic Bypass 177
Figure 3 Control screen
Clicking the System Bypass Settings button enters the ‘System-bypass settings’ screen, as shown in Figure 4.
Figure 4 System-bypass settings
System-bypass Components Configuration

Objective: To make the software compatible with inverter system with/without automatic bypass.
Impact: If configured as ‘without system automatic bypass’, the ‘output breaker is not closed’ fault cannot be detected.
System-bypass Enable
Objective: Under the condition of with automatic bypass, compatible with the user’s need of using or disusing the
system automatic bypass.
Impact: If select Enable, when severe fault occurs during running, the motor will switch to the system automatic
bypass; if select not to enable, under any condition, the motor will not switch to the system automatic bypass.
2.2 Setting Of Multi-fuction Terminals
Setting of multi-function input terminal

1. Feedback signal of faulty bypass output breaker (QF2) (If there is no feedback signal of this breaker, you do not
need to set the function number.)
Function number: 51
Function: access point of feedback signal of the output breaker, used to determine the system operating status and
detect the fault of ‘output breaker is not closed’.
2. Feedback signal of faulty bypass breaker (QF3)
Function number: 50
Function: access point of feedback signal of the bypass breaker, used to determine the system status and detect
bypass-related faults.
Setting of multi-function output terminal

1. Output breaker closing command
Terminal: relay terminal

178 Appendix 3 Descriptions On System Automatic Bypass
Function number: 29
Function: After self-test is completed, close output circuit breaker.
2. Switching command of system automatic bypass
Function number: 28
Function: when a fault occurs during running, the motor will switch to system automatic bypass.
3. Inverter running status
Terminal: relay or transistor
Function number: 30
Function: Display motor is running in inverter state
4. Operating status of system automatic bypass
Terminal: relay or transistor
Function number: 31
Function: Display if the motor is running in the system automatic bypass state.
3. Display Of System Automatic Bypass
Figure 5 ‘Operation Monitoring’ screen
4. Faults Of System Automatic Bypass

1. Output breaker is not closed.
Figure 6 Fault screen
Detection methods: After the main controller is powered on and passes self-test, it will send a command of closing
output breaker. 2s later, if the feedback signal of output breaker is 0, the output breaker is considered as ‘not closed’.
Fault level: severe fault (F2)
Troubleshooting:
1) Check the feedback signal wiring of output circuit breaker;
2) Check the function setting of the corresponding multi-function terminals.
Fault reset method: reset it manually after the fault eliminates.

Appendix 3 Descriptions On System Automatic Bypass 179
2. Bypass contactor closes abnormally
Detection method: if the feedback signal of bypass breaker is detected as 1 at any moment without sending bypass
switching command, the fault is reported
Fault level: severe fault (F2)
Troubleshooting:
1) Check the feedback signal wiring of bypass breaker;
3. System automatic bypass fault
Detection method: if the feedback signal of bypass breaker is detected as 0 after the bypass switching command is
sent and a delay of 10s, the fault is reported.
Fault level: heavy fault (F2)
Troubleshooting:
1) Check the feedback signal wiring of bypass breaker;
5. Conditions Not Allowing Switching To System Automatic Bypass

1. The inverter is configured as no same bypass or not enabling system automatic bypass;
2. The inverter is shutdown (running indicator is blinking);
3. Start preparation process, respectively, according to different ways:
1) Starting from starting frequency: in starting frequency holding time;
2) First brake and then start from starting frequency: in entire braking process and starting frequency holding time;
3) Speed tracking and re-start: in speed tracking process.
4. Stopping process (after the user presses the STOP button);
5. Jog operation;
6. Zero-frequency operation or running PLC prohibited.
7. After operation of emergency power-off (EPO).

180 Appendix 4 Descriptions On Multi-Split Soft Startup
Appendix 4 Descriptions On Multi-Split Soft Startup
1. Operating Principle Of Multi-Split Soft Startup

The multi-split soft startup function is mainly applied in occasions when multiple transformers or asynchronous motors
need to be soft started in turn. The inverter raises output frequency and voltage from zero to the power grid frequency
and voltage to avoid impact to the equipment caused by direct start. In order to avoid impact to the power gird, the
inverter locks phase when the frequency and voltage of inverter are close to those of power grid, the equipment is
switched to power grid for power supply after phase lock, and then the inverter shuts down. Repeating the
procedures implements the multi-split soft startup function. The operating principle is shown in Figure 9.
Standard frequency power
KM1 Soft startup cabinet
High voltage breaker KM2
Inverter
8. Switching command of control power
Sending Switching
acceleration/ command of
Setting soft deceleration/ control power
startup constant speed
function status.
HMI 1 3. Start up according 4
to set mode and
accelerate to set Telling LDSP 5. When inverter is
frequency 50Hz. that phase lock in constant speed
is successful. status, it will start up
phase lock function.
6
Startup 7. Conduct Coast to
2
button stop and switch to
standard frequency
power.
LDSP ADSP
Figure 9 Schematic diagram of multi-split soft startup
2. Setting Of Multi-Split Soft Startup
2.1 Enabling Setting
The enabling setting of multi-split soft startup is shown Figure 10.

Appendix 4 Descriptions On Multi-Split Soft Startup 181
Figure 10 Enabling setting of multi-split soft startup
2.2 Setting Of Multi-Function Output Terminal
1) Bypass closing command of soft startup

Function number: 24
2) Output open command of soft startup
Function number: 25

182 Appendix 5 Descriptions On Output Switch
Appendix 5 Descriptions On Output Switch
1. Function Overview
The function realizes switchover between inverter driving motor to run and grid driving motor to run.
2. Terminal Configuration
2.1 Input Multi-Function Terminal Setting
Click Parameter Settings -> I/O -> Digital Input to enter the setting page of input multi-function terminals, as shown in
Figure 11.
Figure 11 Input multi-function terminal setting
Configure the terminals according to actual cable connection, as given in Table 3.

Table 3 Terminal function
Function number Function
50 Bypass breaker feedback
51 Output breaker feedback
54 Frequency conversion – working frequency command
55 Working frequency – frequency conversion command
Note: If there is no output breaker feedback signal, do not configure No.51 function
2.2 Output Multi-Function Terminal Setting
Click Parameter Settings -> I/O -> Digital Output to enter the setting page of output multi-function terminals, as shown
in Figure 12.
Figure 12 Output multi-function terminal setting

Appendix 5 Descriptions On Output Switch 183
Configure the terminals according to cable connection, as given in Table 4.

Table 4 Terminal function
Function number Function
37 Bypass breaker opening
35 Bypass breaker closing
36 Motor breaker opening
38 Motor breaker closing
3. Operation Descriptions
Ensure that the inverter is powered on and has no faults. ‘Upper frequency’ setting is not less than 50,
LOCAL-ROMOTE selecting switch is set to ‘REMOTE’, and ‘Running command channel selection’ is set to ‘Control
via multi function terminal’.
When you need to perform frequency conversion – working frequency switchover, you only need to press the
corresponding multi function input terminal button, at this point, if the inverter is in stop mode, it will start up
automatically and operates at 50Hz; if the inverter is in running mode, it will decelerate to 50Hz automatically. After
that, the inverter completes switch control of frequency conversion – working frequency automatically. After the
switchover finishes, the inverter stops.
When you need to perform working frequency – frequency conversion switchover, you only need to press the
corresponding multi function input terminal button, at this point, the inverter will start up automatically and operates at
50Hz, and then it completes switch control of working frequency – frequency conversion. After the switchover finishes,
the inverter will operates at the setting frequency before switchover automatically.

184 Appendix 6 Descriptions On Belt Conveyor Control
Appendix 6 Descriptions On Belt Conveyor Control
1. Belt Conveyor Applications

With the continuous improvement and development of the belt drive technology, the belt conveyor has become one of
the main means of transporting bulk materials, because it can achieve continuous loading, unloading and
transportation of bulk materials. The belt conveyor features long-distance transporting, large transmission capacity,
low power consumption, low investment cost, and easy maintenance, etc., widely used in ports, docks, metallurgy,
thermal power plants, mines and other enterprises for material delivery. MegaVert-F series medium voltage inverter
can achieve torque balance in belt drive field.
2. Control Parameter Settings Of Belt Conveyor

In field, the belt conveyor needs to be commissioned by customer service personnel before put into use. You can
achieve parallel control by starting/stopping one inverter. All the control parameters of belt conveyor can keep the
default.
 Note
1. Ensure that all motors have the same specifications and parameters.
2. All parallel parameters should be consistent and match.
3. The startup frequency must be less than the pre-tensioning frequency of the belt conveyor.
4. Make sure that the motor control mode is vector mode before inverter parallel connecting and starting motors.
5. It is currently supported that up to four MegaVert-F series medium voltage inverters can be parallel connected for use.
The belt conveyor control settings page is shown in Figure 13.
Figure 13 Belt conveyor control settings page
In application, the parameters in the screen keep default. Ensure that all inverters complete pre-charging, press the
Start Motor button on any inverter to operate the parallel system, in the same way, you can operate the Stop Motor
button on any inverter to realize shutdown of the parallel system.
3. Fault Description Of Belt Conveyor
3.1 Handshake Failure
Reasons: At least one inverter participating in parallel system fails in handshaking.

Constraints:
1) Parallel enabled
2) After the control cabinet is powered on, wait five minutes and detect the fault

Appendix 6 Descriptions On Belt Conveyor Control 185
Level: Alarm
Clear: It can be automatically cleared after parallel disabled or parallel handshaking success.
3.2 Inconsistent Information
Reasons: At least two inverters participating in parallel system have inconsistent parallel information, their
comparison is as follows:
1) Control mode (VF, vector)
2) Starting mode
3) Stop mode
4) Acceleration and deceleration mode
5) The number of parallel machines
6) Acceleration time
7) Deceleration time
8) Control mode
Constraints:
1) Parallel enabled
2) Succeed in handshaking
Level: Alarm
Clear: It can be automatically cleared after parallel disabled or information becoming consistent.
3.3 Parallel System Startup Failure
Reasons: Starting it under the condition that the inverters participating in parallel system have inconsistent parallel
information.
Constraints: Parallel enabled
Level: Severe fault
Clear: It can be manually cleared after parallel disabled or information becoming consistent.
3.4 Parallel System Communication Failure
Reasons:
1) Starting it under the condition that parallel handshake is not successful.
2) Parallel communication fails
Constraints: Parallel enabled
Level: Severe fault
Clear: It can be manually cleared after parallel disabled or parallel communication recovery.
3.5 No.X Inverter’s High Voltage Circuit Breaker Not Closed
Reasons: At least one inverter participating in parallel system starts up under the condition that the high voltage
circuit breaker is not closed. X means the number of inverter whose high voltage circuit breaker is not closed.
Constraints:
1) Parallel enabled
Level: Severe fault
Clear: Manually cleared

186 Appendix 6 Descriptions On Belt Conveyor Control
3.6 CAN Communication Node Failure Of No.X Inverter
Reasons: At least one inverter participating in parallel system quits handshake. X means the number of inverter
quitting handshake.
Constraints:
1) Parallel enabled
Level: Severe fault
Clear: It can be manually cleared after parallel disabled or resuming handshake.
3.7 Current Sharing Imbalance Alarm Of Parallel System
Reasons: Current sharing imbalance of parallel system.

Constraints:
1) Parallel enabled
2) End of pre-tensioning
Level: Alarm
Clear: It can be manually cleared after parallel disabled or current sharing balance.
3.8 Current Sharing Imbalance Fault Of Parallel System
Reasons: Current sharing imbalance of parallel system.

Constraints:
1) Parallel enabled
2) End of pre-tensioning
Level: Severe fault
Clear: It can be manually cleared after parallel disabled or shutdown.

Appendix 7 HMI Menu Structure Tree 187
Appendix 7 HMI Menu Structure Tree
Figure 14 HMI Menu Structure Tree

188 Appendix 8 Fan Box Dimension
Appendix 8 Fan Box Dimension
1194.0
1170.5
913.0
635.5
617.0
608.0 587.0
568.5
590.5 291.0
330.0 33.5
29.5
12.0 10.0
260.5
262.0
137.5
137.5
137.5
137.5
Figure 15 FAN-1 Figure 16 FAN-2
697.0 697.0
679.5 679.5
364.5 364.5
29.5 29.5
12.0 12.0
312.0
342.0
162.5
162.5
177.5
177.5
Figure 17 FAN-3 Figure 18 FAN-4
814.5
789.5
419.5
49.5
24.5
387.0
200.0
200.0
Figure 19 FAN-5

Appendix 9 Descriptions On Removing Transportation Brackets 189
Appendix 9 Descriptions On Removing Transportation Brackets
For the power unit delivered with the inverter, please follow the below method to remove the transportation brackets.
1. B-Type Inverter
1. After the inverter is put in place, open the power unit cabinet door, and remove the transportation brackets of power
unit, as shown in Figure 20.
 Note
During removing process, do not drop screws or nuts into the cabinet or power unit.
M8*30 screws 10kV 12 pcs

6kV 6 pcs
Plain washers 8 10kV 12 pcs
6kV 6 pcs
M8 nuts 10kV 12 pcs
6kV 6 pcs
M5*10 screws 10kV 48 pcs
6kV 30 pcs
Transportation 10kV 6 pcs
brackets 6kV 3 pcs
B-type
Figure 20 Removing the transportation brackets of B-type inverter
2. After the brackets are removed, restore the M5 * 10 Sems screws into front panel of the power unit.
2. C-Type Inverter
1. After the inverter is put in place, open the power unit cabinet door, and remove the transportation brackets of power
unit, as shown in Figure 21.
 Note
During removing process, do not drop screws or nuts into the cabinet or power unit.

190 Appendix 9 Descriptions On Removing Transportation Brackets
M8*20 screw (6 pcs)
M5*10 screw (30 pcs)
Transportation
bracket (3 pcs)
C-type
Figure 21 Removing the transportation brackets of C-type inverter
2. After the brackets are removed, restore the M5 * 10 Sems screws into front panel of the power unit.

Appendix 10 Abbreviations 191
Appendix 10 Abbreviations
Table 5 Meanings of abbreviations

Abbreviations Meanings Abbreviations Meanings
ASR Speed regulator FAR Frequency arrived signal
ACR Current regulator FDT Frequency level detection signal
AI Analog input FHL Frequency high limit
AO Analog output FLL Frequency low limit
CCI Analog current input FWD Rorward rotation
DI Digital input FRS Free shutdown input
DO Digital output Ie Motor rated current
EMI Electro magnetic interference OL Overload detection signal
Maximum output frequency of the Optoelectronic speed measuring
Fmax PG
inverter encoder
FH High frequency limit of the inverter REV Reverse rotation
FL Low frequency limit of the inverter VCI Analog voltage input
Fb Basic operating frequency Φe Motor rated magnetic flux

MegaVert Series V1.1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MegaVert Series V1.1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MegaVert Series Medium Voltage Inverter

Copyright © 2013 by Emerson Network Power Co., Ltd.

Emerson Network Power Co., Ltd.

Please read the relevant chapter of this manual before installation.

Risk of electric shock

Upstream power distribution

Downstream power distribution

Contacting with power units

Chapter 1 Product Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 Naming Convention .............................................................................................................................................. 1

Chapter 2 Installation ........................................................................................................................................................ 13

2.1 Installation Condition........................................................................................................................................... 13

Chapter 3 Electrical Connection ........................................................................................................................................ 31

3.1 Notes .................................................................................................................................................................. 31

4.1 Electrical principle ............................................................................................................................................... 54

Chapter 5 Operation, Control And Display ........................................................................................................................ 58

5.1 Operation Safety ................................................................................................................................................. 58

Chapter 6 Descriptions On Basic Operation...................................................................................................................... 73

6.1 Basic Operation .................................................................................................................................................. 73

Chapter 7 Descriptions On Function And Setting .............................................................................................................. 82

7.1 System Configuration.......................................................................................................................................... 82

Chapter 8 Fault Descriptions And Handling .................................................................................................................... 125

8.1 Descriptions Of Alarms And Faults ................................................................................................................... 125

Chapter 9 Service And Maintenance ............................................................................................................................... 134

9.1 Safety................................................................................................................................................................ 134

Appendix 1 Function Code List ....................................................................................................................................... 141

Appendix 2 Communication Mode .................................................................................................................................. 175

1. Connecting Mode ................................................................................................................................................ 175

Appendix 3 Descriptions On System Automatic Bypass ................................................................................................. 176

1. Operating Principle Of System Automatic Bypass .............................................................................................. 176

Appendix 4 Descriptions On Multi-Split Soft Startup ....................................................................................................... 180

1. Operating Principle Of Multi-Split Soft Startup .................................................................................................... 180

Appendix 5 Descriptions On Output Switch..................................................................................................................... 182

1. Function Overview .............................................................................................................................................. 182

Appendix 6 Descriptions On Belt Conveyor Control ........................................................................................................ 184

1. Belt Conveyor Applications ................................................................................................................................. 184

Appendix 8 Fan Box Dimension ...................................................................................................................................... 188

Appendix 9 Descriptions On Removing Transportation Brackets .................................................................................... 189

1. B-Type Inverter ................................................................................................................................................... 189

Appendix 10 Abbreviations.............................................................................................................................................. 191

Chapter 1 Product Overview

1.1 Naming Convention

Figure 1-1 Naming convention

Power unit without bypass

Inverter edition (default setting); A: Initial edition

Output voltage 6kV

Input voltage 6kV

Capacity rating: 400kVA

Series name; F: High performance

Figure 1-2 Naming convention of MegaVert-F0400-06/06A-N

MegaVert Series Medium Voltage Inverter User Manual

Transformer cabinet Power unit cabinet Control cabinet

MegaVert Series Medium Voltage Inverter User Manual

Control cabinet Power unit cabinet Transformer cabinet

Control cabinet Power unit cabinet Transformer cabinet

1.3 Specification And Model

MegaVert Series Medium Voltage Inverter User Manual

Table 1-1 Specification and model of high-performance inverter

MegaVert Series Medium Voltage Inverter User Manual

Table 1-2 Specification and model of normal-performance inverter

MegaVert Series Medium Voltage Inverter User Manual

Rated output Applicable

1.4 System Basic Principle